COP 500L UM GB SISTEMA 15-06-2012 8:30 Pagina 1
FIAT500L ENGLISH
The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FIAT reserves the right to modify the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons. If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer. Printed in recycled paper without chlorine. OWNER HANDBOOK COP 500L UM GB SISTEMA 15-06-2012 8:30 Pagina 2
WHY CHOOSING GENUINE PARTS
We really know your car because we invented, designed and built it: we really know every single detail. At Fiat Service authorised workshops you can find technicians directly trained by us, offering quality and professionalism for all service operations. Fiat workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks and practical recommendations by our experts. With Fiat Genuine Parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance features of your new car unchanged in time: that's why you bought it for. Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our cars; we recommend them because they come from our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies. For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones designed by Fiat for your car.
SAFETY: ENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS, COMFORT: SUSPENSION PERFORMANCE: SPARK PLUGS, LINEACCESSORI BRAKING SYSTEM CLIMATE CONTROL MAINTENANCE AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS INJECTORS AND BATTERIES ROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS
Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing a Fiat 500L. We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your car and use it in the best possible way. You are recommended to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time. It contains important information, advice and instructions for the use of the car which will help you get the very best out of your Fiat. The handbook also provides a description of special features and tips as well as essential information for correct care, maintenance, safe car driving and use and preservation of your Fiat over time. Carefully read the warnings and indications marked with the following symbols:
personal safety;
car safety;
environmental protection.
The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Fiat offers to its Customers: ❒ the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity; ❒ the range of additional services available to Fiat Customers. We are sure that these will help you familiarise with your new car and appreciate it and the care provided by the people at Fiat. Enjoy reading. Happy motoring!
This Owner Handbook describes all the versions of the Fiat 500L. As a consequence, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine and version that you have purchased.All data contained in this publication are purely indicative. Fiat Group Automobiles can modify the specifications of the vehicle model described in this publication at any time, for technical or commercial reasons. For further information, contact a Fiat Dealership. ESSENTIAL INFORMATION! REFUELLING RESPECTINGTHE ENVIRONMENT Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol The car is fitted with a system that allows with octane rating (RON) not less than 95 in continuous diagnosis of the components related compliance with the European specification to emissions to ensure increased respect for EN228. the environment. The use of petrol that does not conform to the ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES above-mentioned specification will cause the If, after buying the car, you decide to add EOBD warning light to switch on and the electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually irregular operation of the engine. draining the battery), contact a Fiat Dealership. Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel for They will calculate the overall electrical motor vehicles in compliance with the European requirement and check that the car’s electrical specification EN590. The use of other products system can support the required load. or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty. SCHEDULED SERVICING Correct maintenance of the car is essential for STARTINGTHE ENGINE ensuring that it maintains its performance and its Make sure that the handbrake is engaged; place safety features, its environmental friendliness the gear lever in neutral. Fully depress the clutch and low running costs for a long time to come. pedal, without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to MAR-ON and wait for THE OWNER MANUAL CONTAINS… the warning light to switch off (and … important information, advice and warnings warning light for diesel versions); turn the for correct use, driving safety and maintenance of ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as your car over time. Special attention must be the engine starts. paid to the symbols provided (personal safety) (environmental protection) (car integrity). PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the car on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
GETTING TO DASHBOARD KNOW YOUR CAR SAFETY The presence and position of the controls, instruments and indicators may vary according to the different STARTING AND versions. DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 1 F0Y0042 1. Adjustable and directable air diffusers 2. Radio controls on the steering wheel (for versions/markets, where provided) 3. Exterior light control stalk 4. Instrument panel 5. Windscreen wiper/rear window wiper/trip computer control stalk 6. Adjustable and directable centre air vents 7. Fixed upper air vent 8. Passenger front airbag 9. Upper glove compartment (for versions/markets, where provided the compartment may be conditioned) 10. Storage compartment 11. Lower glove compartment 12. Control buttons 13. Heating/ventilation system or manual climate control (for versions/markets, where provided) or automatic dual zone climate control (for versions/markets, where provided) 14. USB port/AUX socket (for versions/markets, where provided) 15. UConnect® (for versions/markets, where pro- vided) or radio system setup 16. Ignition switch 17. Driver front airbag 18. Cruise Control/Speed Limiter lever (for versions/markets, where provided)
3 CONTROL PANEL AND GETTINGINSTRUMENTS TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SAFETYInstrument background colour and type may vary according to the version.
STARTINGThe AND warning lights and are only present on Diesel versions. On diesel versions, the maximum engine DRIVINGspeed (red range on the rev counter) corresponds to 5000 rpm.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESVERSIONS WITH MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 2 F0Y1107 A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Multifunction display C. Rev counter D. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light E. Engine coolant temperature gauge with overheating warning light
4 VERSIONS WITH RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 3 F0Y1108 A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Reconfigurable multifunction display C. Rev counter D. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light E. Engine coolant temperature gauge with overheating warning light
5 SPEEDOMETER (SPEED INDICATOR) Under normal conditions, the needle assumes different positions within the scale depending on the GETTINGShows TO the car speed (speedometer). KNOW YOUR CAR usage conditions. SAFETYREV COUNTER C - Low engine coolant temperature. H - High engine coolant temperature. STARTINGThis AND indicates the engine rpm. DRIVING The warning light B fig. 4 may switch on (with a WARNING LIGHTSFUEL LEVEL GAUGE message on the display for some versions) to indicate AND MESSAGES that the coolant temperature is too high; in this This shows the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank. IN AN EMERGENCY case, stop the engine and contact a Fiat Dealership. E - tank empty SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEF - tank full If the needle for the engine coolant TECHNICALThe warning light A fig. 4 (on certain versions temperature reaches the red area, stop SPECIFICATIONStogether with the message on the display) switches the engine immediately and contact a Fiat INDEXon to indicate that approximately 6 to 8 litres of fuel Dealership. are left in the tank; in these circumstances refuel at the earliest opportunity. Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty: the gaps in fuel delivery could damage the catalyst. IMPORTANT The needle will point to E and warning light A will flash to indicate a fault in the system. If this is the case, go to a Fiat Dealership to have the system checked.
ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE INDICATOR The needle shows the temperature of the engine coolant and starts supplying indications when the fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.
fig. 4 F0Y0118 6 DISPLAY MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY "STANDARD"
SCREEN GETTING TO The car may be provided with a multifunction or KNOW YOUR CAR reconfigurable multifunction display that shows useful The following information is shown on the display information, according to the previous settings, fig. 5: SAFETY when driving. A Date STARTING AND DRIVING With the ignition key removed, the display activates B Activation of Dualdrive electric power steering and shows the time and total milometer reading (CITY indication) or of ECO driving mode (ECO WARNING LIGHTS (in km or miles) for a few seconds when a front door indication) AND MESSAGES is opened/closed. C Gear Shift Indicator (for versions/markets, where IN AN EMERGENCY NOTE With a very low outside temperature (below provided) SERVICING AND 0°C) it may take longer than normal for information D Headlight alignment position (only with dipped MAINTENANCE to appear on the display. headlights on) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS E Odometer (display of distance travelled in kilometres/miles) INDEX F Time (always displayed, even with key removed and doors closed) G Start&Stop function indication (for versions/ markets where provided) H Outside temperature (for versions/markets, where provided) I "Speed limiter" display (for versions/markets, where provided)
fig. 5 F0Y1101 7 RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION E Odometer (display of distance travelled in kilometres/miles) GETTINGDISPLAY TO "STANDARD" SCREEN KNOW YOUR CAR F Headlight alignment position (only with dipped
SAFETYVersions without "Speed Limiter" headlights on) The following information appears on the display G Car status indication (e.g. doors open, possible ice STARTING AND DRIVINGfig. 6: on road, etc.)
WARNING LIGHTSA Time On some versions the display shows the turbine AND MESSAGES B Date or trip distance display in kilometres (or pressure fig. 7. IN AN EMERGENCYmiles) C Outside temperature (for versions/markets, where SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEprovided)
TECHNICALD Gear Shift Indicator (for versions/markets, where SPECIFICATIONSprovided)
INDEX
fig. 6 F0Y1102 fig. 7 F0Y0186 8 Versions with "Speed Limiter" H Car status indication (e.g. doors open, possible ice on road, etc.) (for versions/markets, where provided) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR The following information appears on the display GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR fig. 8: SAFETY The GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) system advises the A Time STARTING AND driver to change gear through a specific indication on DRIVING B Date or trip distance display in kilometres (or the instrument panel fig. 9. miles) WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Gear Shift Indicator (for versions/markets, where Through the GSI, the driver is notified that changing C gear will allow a reduction in fuel consumption. provided) or Start&Stop function indication (for IN AN EMERGENCY versions/markets, where provided) When the SHIFT UP icon ( SHIFT) is shown on the SERVICING AND D "Speed limiter" display (for versions/markets, display, the GSI is advising the driver to engage a MAINTENANCE higher gear, while the SHIFT DOWN ( SHIFT) icon where provided) TECHNICAL advises the driver to engage a lower gear. SPECIFICATIONS E Odometer (display of distance travelled in The indication on the instrument panel remains on kilometres/miles) INDEX until the driver changes gear or the driving F Headlight alignment position (only with dipped conditions return to a situation where changing gear headlights on) is not required to reduce consumption. G Outside temperature (for versions/markets, where provided)
fig. 8 F0Y1103 fig. 9 F0Y1104 9 CONTROL BUTTONS SETUP MENU
GETTING TO KNOW YOURNOTE CAR Buttons and fig. 10 are described in The menu comprises a series of options which can the following pages. The buttons are and on be selected using buttons and to access the SAFETYsome versions. different selection and setting operations (Setup) indicated below. Some options have a submenu. STARTING AND DRIVING To scroll up through the screen and the related The menu can be activated by briefly pressing the WARNING LIGHTS button. AND MESSAGESoptions or to increase the displayed value. The menu comprises the following options: IN AN EMERGENCYPress briefly to access the menu and/or go to next ❒ MENU SERVICINGscreen AND or confirm the desired menu selection. ❒ MAINTENANCE LIGHTING Hold down to go back to the standard screen. ❒ HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT (for versions/markets, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS where provided) ❒ INDEXTo scroll down through the displayed menu and the SPEED BEEP related options or to decrease the value displayed. ❒ HEADLIGHT SENSOR (for versions/markets Buttons and activate different functions where provided) according to the following situations: ❒ CORNERING LIGHTS (for versions/markets, ❒ within the menu, they allow you to scroll up and where available) down; ❒ during setting operations, they increase or decrease the displayed value.
fig. 10 F0Y0035 10 ❒ RAIN SENSOR (for versions/markets, where Selecting an option from the main menu without a
provided) submenu: GETTING TO ❒ TRIP B ACTIVATION/DATA ❒ briefly press the button to select the main menu KNOW YOUR CAR ❒ SET TIME option to be set; SAFETY ❒ press buttons or (with single presses) to ❒ SET DATE STARTING AND select the new setting; DRIVING ❒ AUTOCLOSE ❒ briefly press the button to store the new setting WARNING LIGHTS ❒ MEASUREMENT UNIT and to go back to the same main menu option AND MESSAGES ❒ LANGUAGE selected previously. IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ WARNINGS VOLUME SERVICING AND Selecting an option from the main menu with a MAINTENANCE ❒ BELT BUZZER submenu: ❒ TECHNICAL SERVICE ❒ briefly press the button to display the first SPECIFICATIONS ❒ submenu option; AIRBAG/PASSENGER BAG (for versions/markets, INDEX where provided) ❒ press buttons or (with single presses) to ❒ DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (for versions/ scroll through all the submenu options; markets, where provided) ❒ briefly press the button to select the displayed ❒ CITY BRAKE C./COLLISION MITIGATION submenu option and to open the relevant setup (for versions/markets, where provided) menu; ❒ EXIT MENU ❒ press buttons or (with single presses) to select the new setting for this submenu option; ❒ briefly press button to store the new setting and at the same time go back to the previously selected menu option.
11 MENU ITEMS Note On versions with reconfigurable multifunction
GETTING TO display adjustment can be made both with lights off KNOW YOURNote CAR With UConnect® system (for versions/ ("daytime" mode brightness level) and with lights on ("nighttime" mode brightness level). SAFETYmarkets where provided), some Menu items are shown on the display of the latter and not on the STARTINGinstrument AND panel display. Headlamp alignment (Headlamp alignment DRIVING corrector position adjustment) WARNING LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided) AND MESSAGESMenu This option allows you to access the Setup Menu. This function allows the headlamp alignment IN AN EMERGENCY corrector position to be adjusted (on 4 levels). Press the or button to select the various SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEMenu items. To carry out the adjustment, proceed as follows: ❒ press button briefly. The level set previously TECHNICALHold down the button to return to the standard SPECIFICATIONSscreen. flashes on the display; ❒ INDEX press button or to adjust the position; Lighting ❒ press the button briefly to return to the menu (Interior light adjustment) screen or hold the button down to return to the (with side lights on only) standard screen without storing. With the side lights on, this function is used to set the brightness of the instrument panel, UConnect® Speed Beep (Speed limit) system controls (for versions/markets where pro- This function is used to set the car speed limit (km/h vided) and automatic climate control system controls or mph); the driver is immediately alerted when (for versions/markets where provided) to 8 levels. this limit is exceeded. Proceed as follows to adjust the brightness: To set the desired speed limit, proceed as follows: ❒ press button briefly. The level set previously ❒ briefly press the button: the display will show flashes on the display; the text "Speed Beep"; ❒ press button or to set the required ❒ press button or to select speed limit brightness level; activation (On) or deactivation (Off); ❒ press the button briefly to return to the menu ❒ if the function is on, press or to select the screen or hold the button down to return to the desired speed limit and then press to confirm. standard screen without saving.
12 Note Setting is possible between 30 and 200 km/h, The dusk sensor sensitivity can be adjusted according or 20 and 125 mph, according to the previously to 3 levels (level 1 = minimum sensitivity, level 2 = GETTING TO set unit. See the "Measurement unit adjustment medium sensitivity, level 3 = maximum sensitivity); KNOW YOUR CAR (Measurement unit)" paragraph described below. The the greater the sensitivity set, the less the external setting will increase/decrease by 5 units each time light variation needed to turn on the lights (e.g. with SAFETY button / is pressed. Hold down the a setting on level 3 at sunset the headlights switch STARTING AND / button to automatically increase/decrease on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). DRIVING the setting rapidly. Complete the adjustment with WARNING LIGHTS Proceed as follows to set: AND MESSAGES single presses of the button when you approach the desired value. ❒ press button briefly. The level set previously flashes on the display; IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ press the button briefly to return to the menu ❒ SERVICING AND screen or hold the button down to return to the press the or button to make the MAINTENANCE standard screen without storing. adjustment; TECHNICAL ❒ SPECIFICATIONS To cancel the setting, proceed as follows: press the button briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the button down to return to the ❒ briefly press the button: "On" will flash on the standard screen without storing. INDEX display; ❒ press button : "Off" will flash on the display; Cornering lights ❒ press the button briefly to return to the menu (Activation/deactivation of cornering lights) screen or give the button a long press to return (for versions/markets, where provided) to the standard screen without storing. This function activates/deactivates ("On"/"Off") the cornering lights (see the description in the “Exterior Headlight sensor lights” paragraph). (Automatic headlight/dusk sensor sensitivity Proceed as follows to activate/deactivate the lights: adjustment) (for versions/markets, where provided) ❒ press button briefly. "On" or "Off" flash on the display, according to what has been previously This function is used to turn the headlights on or off set; according to external light conditions. ❒ press or to make your choice; ❒ press the button briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the button down to return to the standard screen without storing.
13 Rain sensor Time adjustment (Clock adjustment) (Rain sensor sensitivity adjustment) GETTING TO This function enables the clock to be set through KNOW YOUR(for CAR versions/markets, where provided) two submenus: “Time” and “Format”. SAFETYThis function allows you to adjust the rain sensor To carry out the adjustment, proceed as follows: sensitivity to 4 levels. STARTING AND ❒ DRIVING press button briefly. The display shows the two To set the required sensitivity level, proceed as submenus "Time" and "Format"; WARNING LIGHTSfollows: AND MESSAGES ❒ ❒ press the or button to switch between press button briefly. The sensitivity “level” set the two submenus; IN AN EMERGENCYpreviously flashes on the display; ❒ once you have selected the submenu to be ❒ press the or button to make the SERVICING AND changed, press the button briefly; MAINTENANCEadjustment; ❒ if the "Time" submenu is selected and button is TECHNICAL❒ press the button briefly to return to the menu SPECIFICATIONS pressed briefly, "hours" will flash on the display. screen or hold the button down to return to the Press the or button to make the INDEXstandard screen without storing. adjustment; ❒ Activation/Trip B data pressing the button briefly again: the "minutes" (ActivatingTrip B) flash on the display. Press the or button to make the adjustment; With this function it is possible to activate ("On") or ❒ if the "Format" submenu is selected and button deactivate ("Off") the Trip B display (partial trip). is pressed briefly, the display mode will flash For more information see the "Trip computer" on the display. Press the or button to paragraph. select "12h" or "24h" mode. When you have For activation/deactivation, proceed as follows: carried out the required settings, briefly press the ❒ press the button briefly to make the display flash button to go back to the submenu screen or On or Off according to the previous setting; hold the button down to go back to the main menu screen without storing the new settings. ❒ press the or button to make the adjustment; Hold down the button again to return to the ❒ standard screen or to the main menu according to press the button briefly to return to the menu the menu items where you are in. screen or give the button a long press to return to the standard screen without storing.
14 IMPORTANT The setting will increase or decrease IMPORTANT The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time the button or is by one unit each time the button or is GETTING TO pressed. Keeping the button pressed causes an pressed. Keeping the button pressed causes an KNOW YOUR CAR automatic rapid speed increase/decrease. Complete automatic rapid speed increase/decrease. Complete the setting by briefly pressing the button when the setting by briefly pressing the button when SAFETY you approach the required value. you approach the required value. STARTING AND DRIVING
Set date (Setting the date) Autoclose WARNING LIGHTS (Automatic door lock operation with car AND MESSAGES Using this function it is possible to update the date running) IN AN EMERGENCY (year - month - day). If this function is On, it automatically locks the doors To carry out the adjustment, proceed as follows: SERVICING AND when a speed of 20 km/h is exceeded. MAINTENANCE ❒ press button briefly. The "year" flashes on the Proceed as follows to activate or deactivate this TECHNICAL display; SPECIFICATIONS function: ❒ press the or button to make the ❒ INDEX adjustment; press button briefly. "On" or "Off" flash on the display, according to what has been previously set; ❒ press button briefly. The "month" flashes on the ❒ display; press or to make your choice; ❒ ❒ press the or button to make the press the button briefly to return to the adjustment; submenu screen or hold the button down to return to the main menu screen without saving; ❒ press button briefly. The "day" flashes on the ❒ display; hold down the button again to return to the standard screen or to the main menu according ❒ press the or button to make the to the menu items where you are in. adjustment; ❒ press the button briefly to return to the menu screen or give the button a long press to return to the standard screen without storing.
15 Unit of measurement ❒ if the "Temperature" submenu is selected and
GETTING(Setting TO the unit of measurement) button is pressed briefly, the display shows "°C" KNOW YOUR CAR or "°F" depending on the previous setting; With this function it is possible to set the units ❒ SAFETYthrough three submenus: "Distances", press or to make your choice; "Consumption" and "Temperature". STARTING AND Once the required settings are made, briefly press DRIVINGTo set the desired measurement unit, proceed as button to go back to the submenu screen or hold
WARNING LIGHTSfollows: the button down to return to the main menu screen AND MESSAGES ❒ press button briefly. The display will show the without storing. IN AN EMERGENCYthree submenus; Hold down the button again to return to the ❒ standard screen or to the main menu according to SERVICING ANDpress button or to scroll through the MAINTENANCEthree submenus; the menu items where you are in. TECHNICAL❒ once you have selected the submenu to be SPECIFICATIONS Language (Language selection) changed, press the button briefly; INDEX❒ if the "Distances" submenu is selected and button Display messages can be set to be shown in different is pressed briefly, the display shows "km" or languages: Italian, German, English, Spanish, French, "mi" depending on the previous setting; Portuguese, Polish, Dutch, Turkish (the list varies according to the market). ❒ press or to make your choice; To set the desired language, proceed as follows: ❒ if the "Consumption" submenu is selected and ❒ button is pressed briefly, the display shows press button briefly. The “language” set "km/l", "l/100km" or "mpg" depending on previously flashes on the display; the previous setting. If the measurement unit set ❒ press or to make your choice; for "Distances" is "km", the display allows the ❒ press the button briefly to return to the menu measurement unit ("km/l" or "l/100km") for screen or hold the button down to return to the Consumption to be set. If the measurement unit standard screen without storing. set for "Distances" is "mi", the display will show Consumption in "mpg"; ❒ press or to make your choice;
16 Warnings volume Service (Scheduled servicing) (Adjusting the alert/warning acoustic signal With this function it is possible to view information GETTING TO volume) KNOW YOUR CAR on mileage or time intervals for servicing. With this function the volume of the buzzer which With the Service function it is also possible to view SAFETY accompanies the display of any failure/warning can be the interval (in kilometres or miles) before the STARTING AND adjusted to 8 levels. next engine oil change is due. DRIVING To set the desired volume, proceed as follows: To consult this display, proceed as follows: WARNING LIGHTS ❒ AND MESSAGES press button briefly. The volume “level” set ❒ press button briefly. The display shows the previously flashes on the display; service interval in kilometres (km) or miles (mi) IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ press or to make your choice; according to the previous setting (see the "Units of SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ❒ press the button briefly to return to the menu measurement" paragraph); ❒ TECHNICAL screen or hold the button down to return to the press the button briefly to return to the menu SPECIFICATIONS standard screen without storing. screen or hold it down to return to the standard screen. INDEX Seat belt buzzer (SBR buzzer reactivation) Note The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” requires the (for versions/markets, where provided) car to be serviced every 30,000 km (or 18,000 miles) for petrol versions and every 35,000 km (or 21,000 This function can only be displayed after a Fiat miles) for diesel versions. This message is displayed Dealership has deactivated the SBR system (see automatically - when the key is turned to MAR-ON - paragraph “SBR system” in the “Safety” chapter). 2,000 km (or equivalent value in miles) before these To reactivate this function, proceed as follows: deadlines and reappears every 200 km (or equivalent ❒ press the button briefly; "Off" will flash on the value in miles). Below 200 km servicing indications display. Press the or button and "On" are more frequent. The display will be in km or will appear; mi depending on the measurement unit settings. When one of the next scheduled deadlines is ❒ press the button briefly to return to the approaching, the word “Service” will appear on the submenu screen or hold the button down display, followed by the number of kilometres or to return to the main menu screen without saving. miles left, when the key is turned to MAR-ON. Contact a Fiat Dealership. The operations in the “Scheduled servicing plan” will be performed and the message will be reset.
17 Airbag/Passenger bag ❒ press button briefly. "On" or "Off" flash on the
GETTING(Activation/deactivation TO of passenger side display, according to what has been previously set; KNOW YOURfront CAR airbag and side bag for pelvis, chest and ❒ press or to make your choice; shoulder protection - for versions/markets, SAFETY ❒ where provided) press the button briefly to return to the
STARTING AND submenu screen or hold the button down DRIVINGThis function allows the passenger airbag to be to return to the main menu screen without saving; activated / deactivated. WARNING LIGHTS ❒ hold down the button again to return to the AND MESSAGESProceed as follows: standard screen or to the main menu according IN AN EMERGENCY❒ press the button and, after the message "Bag to the menu items where you are in. pass: Off" (to deactivate) or "Bag pass: On" (to SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEactivate) is displayed by pressing buttons and City Brake Control - "Collision Mitigation" , press the button again; (for versions/markets, where provided) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS❒ a confirmation request message will appear on the This function allows to activate ("On") or de-activate
INDEXdisplay; ("Off") the City Brake Control - "Collision ❒ by pressing the or buttons select "Yes" (to Mitigation" system. confirm activation/deactivation) or "No" (to To adjust proceed as follows: cancel); ❒ press button briefly. "On" or "Off" flash on the ❒ press the button briefly; a message confirming display, according to what has been previously set; the selection is displayed and you return to the ❒ a confirmation request message will appear on the menu screen; Hold down the button to return to display; the standard screen without storing. ❒ by pressing the or buttons select "Yes" (to Daytime running lights (D.R.L.) confirm activation/deactivation) or "No" (to (for versions/markets, where provided) cancel); ❒ This function can be used to activate/deactivate the press the button briefly; a message confirming daytime running lights. the selection is displayed and you return to the menu screen; Hold down the button to return to Proceed as follows to activate or deactivate this the standard screen without storing. function: When the system is deactivated the dedicated ❒ press button briefly. The display shows a warning light in the instrument panel switches on submenu; (see chapter "Warning lights and Messages").
18 Exit menu TRIP COMPUTER
GETTING TO The last function closing the cycle of settings listed in KNOW YOUR CAR the menu screen. GENERAL INFORMATION Pressing the button briefly will return the display The Trip computer is used to display information on SAFETY to the standard screen without saving. car operation when the key is turned to MAR-ON. STARTING AND DRIVING Press the button to return to the first menu This function allows you to define two separate trips WARNING LIGHTS option (Lighting). called “Trip A” and “Trip B” where the car's AND MESSAGES "complete journeys" are monitored in a reciprocally independent manner. IN AN EMERGENCY
Both journeys can be reset (reset - start of a new SERVICING AND journey). MAINTENANCE
“Trip A” is used to display the figures relating to: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ❒ Outside temperature (for versions/markets, where provided) INDEX ❒ Range ❒ Distance travelled A ❒ Average consumption A ❒ Instantaneous consumption ❒ Average speed A ❒ Trip time A (driving time). “Trip B” may be used to display the figures relating to: ❒ Distance travelled B ❒ Average consumption B ❒ Average speed B ❒ Trip time B (driving time).
19 Note “Trip B” may be disabled (see “Activating Trip Average consumption B”). “Range” and “Instantaneous fuel consumption" GETTING TO Shows the approximate average fuel consumption KNOW YOURparameters CAR cannot be reset. since the start of the new journey. SAFETY VALUES DISPLAYED Instantaneous consumption STARTING AND DRIVING Outside temperature (for versions/markets, where This value shows the fuel consumption. The value is WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESprovided) constantly updated. The display will show “----” if the car is parked with the engine running. Indicates the temperature outside the passenger IN AN EMERGENCYcompartment. Average speed SERVICING AND MAINTENANCERange This shows the car average speed as a function of the TECHNICAL overall time elapsed since the start of the new SPECIFICATIONSThis indicates the approximate distance which can be mission. travelled with the amount of fuel present in the INDEXtank.“----”will appear on the display in the following cases: Trip time ❒ range value lower than 50 km (or 30 mi) Shows the time elapsed since the start of a new journey. ❒ car parked with engine running for a long period. IMPORTANT If there is no information, the Trip IMPORTANT The range value variation can be computer displays "----"inplaceofthevalue. affected by several factors: driving style, type of route When normal operating condition is restored, (motorway, urban, mountain roads, etc.), conditions calculation of different units will restart regularly. No of use (load, tyre pressures, etc.). Trip planning values displayed before the failure will be reset nor must therefore take the above into account. will a new mission be started. Distance travelled Shows the distance covered since the start of the new journey.
20 DISPLAYED INFORMATION The icons relating to the various parameters are the
following: GETTING TO The displays shown below are reported as an KNOW YOUR CAR example: for further information refer to the ❒ "Range"; "Display" paragraph in this chapter. ❒ "Average consumption A” (if Trip A is active, SAFETY
Each time a value is displayed, the following or “B” if Trip B is active); STARTING AND information is shown fig. 11: ❒ "Distance" (if Trip A is active, or “B” if DRIVING ❒ Trip B is active); WARNING LIGHTS A - animated icon in the upper part; AND MESSAGES ❒ B - name, value and unit of measure of the ❒ "Instantaneous consumption"; selected parameter (e.g. "Range 150 km"); ❒ "Average speed A” (if Trip A is active, or “B” IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ if Trip B is active); SERVICING AND C - the word "Trip" (or "Trip A" or "Trip B"). MAINTENANCE After a few seconds the name and value of the ❒ "Trip time" (if Trip A is active, or “B” if Trip B TECHNICAL selected parameter are replaced by an icon fig. 12. is active); SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 11 F0Y1105 fig. 12 F0Y1106 21 TRIP BUTTON IMPORTANT The reset operation when “Trip A” or “Trip B” details are being displayed resets the GETTINGThis TO is located on the right-hand stalk fig. 13. With KNOW YOUR CAR information associated with the function displayed. the ignition key turned to MAR, this button allows SAFETYyou to view the previously described parameters and also reset them to begin a new mission: Start of journey procedure STARTING AND DRIVING❒ short press: display various readings; With ignition key at MAR, press and hold the TRIP button for more than 2 seconds to reset. WARNING LIGHTS❒ AND MESSAGESlong press: reset readings and start a new mission. ExitTrip IN AN EMERGENCYNew mission You can automatically exit the TRIP function once all SERVICINGThis AND begins after a reset: MAINTENANCE the values have been displayed or by holding the ❒ “manual” resetting by the user, by pressing the button down for more than 1 second. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSrelevant button; ❒ INDEX"automatic" resetting, when the "Trip distance" reaches 99999.9 km or when the "Travel time" reaches 999:59 (999 hours and 59 minutes); ❒ after disconnection/reconnection of the battery.
fig. 13 F0Y0045 22 SYMBOLS THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM
GETTING TO Special coloured labels have been attached near to or To further protect your car from theft, it has been KNOW YOUR CAR on some of the components of your car. These fitted with an engine immobilising system. It is labels bear symbols that remind you of the automatically activated when the ignition key is SAFETY precautions to be taken with regard to that removed. STARTING AND particular component. DRIVING There is an electronic device in each key which can Under the bonnet there is also a label that WARNING LIGHTS identify the signal emitted, when the engine is AND MESSAGES summarises all the symbols. started, from an aerial built into the ignition switch. The signal is the "password", different every time the IN AN EMERGENCY vehicle is started, through which the control unit SERVICING AND recognises the key and enables starting. MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL OPERATION SPECIFICATIONS
Each time the vehicle is started turning the ignition INDEX key to MAR-ON, the Fiat CODE system control unit sends an acknowledgement code to the engine control unit to deactivate the immobiliser. The code is sent only if the Fiat CODE system control unit has acknowledged the code received from the key. Each time the ignition key is turned to STOP, the Fiat CODE system deactivates the functions of the engine management control unit. If, during starting, the code is not correctly recognised, the warning light switches on in the instrument panel. In this case, turn the key to STOP and then to MAR-ON; if it is still locked, try again with the other keys that come with the vehicle. Contact a Fiat Dealership if you still cannot start the engine.
23 Warning light switching on while driving THE KEYS
GETTING TO KNOW YOURIf CAR the warning light switches on, this means that the system is running a self-diagnosis (for example KEY WITHOUT REMOTE CONTROL SAFETYfor a voltage drop). Should the fault persist, contact a The metal insert A fig. 14 enables: Fiat Dealership. STARTING AND ❒ DRIVING the ignition switch; ❒ the door lock. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES To request duplicates of the key, go to a Fiat
IN AN EMERGENCY Dealership, taking an ID document and the car ownership documents. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 14 F0Y0117 24 KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL Unlocking the doors and the tailgate
(for versions/markets, where provided) GETTING TO Briefly press button : for unlocking of doors and KNOW YOUR CAR The metal insert A fig. 15 of the key operates: luggage compartment, timed switching-on of internal ❒ the ignition switch; roof lights and double flashing of direction indicators SAFETY (for versions/markets, where provided). ❒ the door lock. STARTING AND The doors are unlocked automatically if the fuel DRIVING Press button B to open/close the metal insert. cut-off system intervenes. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Once the doors are locked, if one or more doors or WARNING the luggage compartment are not closed correctly, IN AN EMERGENCY the LED and direction indicators start flashing Button B should only be pressed when SERVICING AND the key is away from the body, in quickly. MAINTENANCE particular from the eyes and from objects that TECHNICAL can be spoilt (e.g. clothes). Do not leave the key Locking the doors and the tailgate SPECIFICATIONS unattended to avoid the button being Briefly press button : for locking of doors and INDEX accidentally pressed while it is being handled, luggage compartment, with switching-off of roof light e.g. by a child. and single flashing of direction indicators (for versions/markets, where provided). If one or more doors are open, the doors will not be locked. This is indicated by a rapid flashing of the direction indicators (for versions/markets, where provided). The doors will be locked if the tailgate is open however. When a speed of over 20 km/h is reached, the doors are automatically locked if this specific function has been set (only on versions with multi-function reconfigurable display). When the doors are locked from outside the car (using the remote control), the LED above the button will switch on for a few seconds and then start flashing (deterrent function).
fig. 15 F0Y0019 25 When the doors are locked from inside the car (by REPLACINGTHE BATTERY INTHE KEY
GETTINGpressing TO the button) the LED will remain on WITH REMOTE CONTROL KNOW YOURconstantly. CAR To replace the battery, proceed as follows: SAFETY Opening the luggage compartment ❒ press button A fig. 16 and open the metal insert B; STARTING AND ❒ turn the screw C to using a fine bit screwdriver; DRIVINGPress the button to open the luggage compartment using the remote control. ❒ take out the battery case D and replace the WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESThe direction indicators will flash twice to indicate battery E making sure that polarities are correct; ❒ IN AN EMERGENCYthat the luggage compartment has been opened. refit the battery case D inside the key and lock it turning the screw C to . SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE The electronic components inside the key TECHNICAL may be damaged if the key is subjected Used batteries should be disposed of, as SPECIFICATIONS to strong shocks. In order to ensure specified by law, in the special containers,
INDEXcomplete efficiency of the electronic devices otherwise take them to a Fiat Dealership, inside the key, it should never be exposed which will deal with their disposal. to direct sunlight.
REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL REMOTE CONTROLS The system can recognise up to 8 remote controls. Should a new remote control be necessary, go to a Fiat Dealership, taking an ID document and the car ownership documents.
fig. 16 F0Y0018 26 SAFE LOCK DEVICE Deactivating the device
(for versions/markets, where provided) GETTING TO The device deactivates automatically: KNOW YOUR CAR This safety device inhibits the operation of the ❒ carrying out the door unlocking operation interior door handles and the door locking/unlocking (pressing the button on the key with remote SAFETY button. control or turning the metal insert of the key STARTING AND It thereby prevents the opening of the doors from without remote control in the driver side door DRIVING inside the passenger compartment, serving as an lock); WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES obstacle to break-in attempts (e.g. broken window). ❒ by turning the ignition key to the MAR position. We recommend that you activate the device each IN AN EMERGENCY time you park your car. WARNING SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Activating the device Once the safe lock system is engaged, it TECHNICAL is impossible to open the doors from SPECIFICATIONS The device is enabled on all the doors by quickly inside the car.Therefore, before getting out of double-pressing the button on the key. the car check that there is no-one left on board. INDEX The direction indicators flash 3 times and the LED above the fig. 17 button flashes to indicate that the device has been activated. If one or more of the doors are not closed correctly, the device will not activate, thus preventing a person from getting stuck inside the passenger compartment by entering the car through, and then closing, the open door.
fig. 17 F0Y0039 27 IGNITION DEVICE WARNING GETTING TO KNOW YOURThe CAR key can be turned to 3 different positionsfig. 18: If the ignition device has been tampered with (e.g. an attempted theft), have it SAFETY❒ STOP: engine off, key can be removed, steering column locked. Some electrical devices (e.g. sound checked by a Fiat Dealership before driving STARTING AND again. DRIVINGsystem, central door locking system, etc.) can operate; WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES❒ MAR: driving position. All electrical devices are enabled; WARNING IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ AVV: engine start-up. Always remove the key when you leave SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEThe ignition switch is fitted with a safety system that your car to prevent someone from accidentally operating the controls. Remember TECHNICALrequires the ignition key to be turned back to STOP st SPECIFICATIONSif the engine does not start, before the starting to engage the handbrake. Engage 1 gear if operation can be repeated. the car is parked uphill or reverse if the car is INDEX parked downhill. Never leave children unattended in the car.
fig. 18 F0Y0044 28 STEERING LOCK SEATS
GETTING TO Engagement: when the key is in position STOP, KNOW YOUR CAR remove the key and turn the steering wheel until it is WARNING locked. SAFETY All adjustments must be made with the Disengagement: move the steering wheel slightly car stationary. STARTING AND as you turn the ignition key to MAR. DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES WARNING The fabric upholstery of the seats has IN AN EMERGENCY It is absolutely forbidden to carry out been designed to withstand long-term SERVICING AND any after-market operation involving wear deriving from normal use of the car. MAINTENANCE steering system or steering column Some precautions are however required.Avoid TECHNICAL modifications (e.g.: installation of anti-theft prolonged and/or excessive rubbing against SPECIFICATIONS device) that could badly affect performance and clothing accessories such as metal buckles and safety, invalidate the warranty and also result Velcro strips which, by applying a high pressure on INDEX in non-compliance of the car with type- the fabric in a small area, could cause it to approval requirements. break, thereby damaging the upholstery.
WARNING Never remove the key while the car is moving.The steering wheel will lock as soon as it is turned.This holds true for cars being towed as well.
29 FRONT SEATS Height adjustment
GETTING TO (for versions/markets, where provided) KNOW YOUR CAR Lengthwise adjustment Move lever B fig. 20 upwards or downwards to SAFETYLift lever A fig. 19 (on the inner side of the seat) and achieve the required height. push the seat forwards or backwards: in driving STARTING AND DRIVINGposition your arms should rest on the rim of the IMPORTANT Carry out the adjustment while sitting steering wheel. on the seat involved (driver side or passenger side). WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY WARNING
SERVICING AND Once you have released the adjustment MAINTENANCE lever, always check that the seat is
TECHNICALlocked on the guides by trying to move it back SPECIFICATIONSand forth. If the seat is not locked into place,
INDEXit may unexpectedly slide and cause the driver to lose control of the car.
fig. 19 F0Y0218 fig. 20 F0Y0216 30 Backrest angle adjustment WARNING Operate lever C fig. 21 to adjust the backrest angle, GETTING TO Do not move the front passenger seat KNOW YOUR CAR accompanying it with the movement of the torso table if a child is seated on the same or SAFETY (operate the lever until the desired position is sitting in the suitable child restraint system. reached, then release it). STARTING AND DRIVING Positioning the passenger seat as a table. Electric lumbar adjustment WARNING LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided) AND MESSAGES (for versions/markets, where provided) Move the seat fully backwards by operating lever A IN AN EMERGENCY (see "Lengthwise adjustment"), operate lever C, fold With key at MAR-ON press button A fig. 22 to operate the lumbar area supporting device for SERVICING AND the backrest down to the cushion then release MAINTENANCE lever C. regulating comfort level when driving. Release the button when you reach the desired TECHNICAL It is advisable to carry out this procedure from the SPECIFICATIONS outside, with the left hand. position. INDEX
Before tilting the front passenger seat table fully, remove any objects laid on it.
fig. 21 F0Y0217 fig. 22 F0Y0215 31 Electric seat heating Storage compartment
GETTING(for TO versions/markets, where provided) KNOW YOUR CAR Behind the front seat backrest there is a storage With the key turned to MAR-ON, press button B to compartment fig. 24. SAFETYswitch the function on/off.
STARTINGWhen AND the function is enabled, the LED on the DRIVINGbutton switches on.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESIMPORTANT If this function is activated with engine off the battery may run down. IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICINGDriver's AND side seat armrest MAINTENANCE(for versions/markets, where provided) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSOn some versions the driver's side seat is equipped with an armrest. INDEX The armrest can be raised/lowered by acting in the direction shown by the arrows (see fig. 23).
fig. 23 F0Y0159 fig. 24 F0Y0270 32 Ta b l e In the rear of the backrests there is also an object
(for versions/markets, where provided) retaining net C. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR On some versions, behind the front seat backrest IMPORTANT Do not place objects heavier than 3 kg there is a folding support surface A fig. 25 equipped on the supporting surface: for safety reasons the SAFETY with cup/can holders. To fold the support surface supporting surface is detached from its housing when STARTING AND operate point B. subject to higher loads. DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES WARNING IN AN EMERGENCY Do not travel with the supporting surface open: always make sure it is SERVICING AND correctly closed. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 25 F0Y0271 33 SLIDING AND FOLDING REAR SEATS To increase the room between seat and parcel shelf
GETTING TO grab tab C fig. 28 on the parcel shelf and secure it on KNOW YOURLengthwise CAR adjustment the magnetic device D, then operate lever B to bring the backrest in the desired position. SAFETYRaise lever A fig. 26, gripping it in the central area and push the seat forwards or backwards. STARTING AND DRIVINGThe two parts of the seat can be adjusted WARNING LIGHTSindividually. AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCYBackrest angle adjustment
SERVICINGRaise AND lever B fig. 27 and adjust the backrest angle, MAINTENANCEaccompanying it with the movement of the torso.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSThe backrest can be further folded to improve driving comfort. INDEX
fig. 27 F0Y0259
fig. 26 F0Y0074 fig. 28 F0Y0066 34 Rear armrest HEAD RESTRAINTS
(for versions/markets, where provided) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR To use the armrest fig. 29, lower it as shown in the FRONT figure. They are height-adjustable: to adjust them, operate SAFETY
as follows. STARTING AND DRIVING
Upwards adjustment: raise the head restraint until it WARNING LIGHTS clicks into place. AND MESSAGES Downwards adjustment: press button A fig. 30 and IN AN EMERGENCY lower the head restraint. SERVICING AND Proceed as follows to remove the head restraints: MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL ❒ raise the head restraints to their maximum height; SPECIFICATIONS ❒ press buttons A and B (at the side of the two head restraint supports), then remove the head INDEX restraints by pulling them upwards.
fig. 29 F0Y0163 fig. 30 F0Y0060 35 REAR STEERING WHEEL
GETTING(for TO versions/markets, where provided) KNOW YOUR CAR The steering wheel can be adjusted both axially and Two height-adjustable head restraints are provided vertically. SAFETYfor the rear seats. On some versions a head restraint is also provided for the central seat. To adjust, move lever A fig. 32 downwards to STARTING AND position 1, then adjust the steering wheel to the DRIVINGUpwards adjustment: raise the head restraint until it most suitable position and lock it in position by WARNING LIGHTSclicks into place. moving lever A to position 2. AND MESSAGES Downwards adjustment: press button A fig. 31 and IN AN EMERGENCYlower the head restraint. WARNING
SERVICINGProceed AND as follows to remove the head restraints: MAINTENANCE All adjustments must be carried out only ❒ raise the head restraints to their maximum height; with the car stationary and engine off. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS❒ press buttons A and B fig. 31 at the side of the two supports, then remove the head restraints INDEXby pulling them upwards. IMPORTANT If the rear seats are used, always set the head restraints in the "completely raised" position.
fig. 31 F0Y0061 fig. 32 F0Y0043 36 WARNING REAR VIEW MIRRORS GETTING TO It is absolutely forbidden to carry out INTERIOR MIRROR KNOW YOUR CAR
any after-market operation involving SAFETY steering system or steering column The mirror is fitted with a safety device that causes modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft its release in the event of a violent impact with STARTING AND device) that could badly affect performance and the passenger. DRIVING safety, invalidate the warranty and also result WARNING LIGHTS Operate lever A fig. 33 to adjust the mirror into two AND MESSAGES in the car not meeting type-approval different positions: normal or anti-glare. requirements. IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 33 F0Y0223 37 ELECTROCHROMIC INTERIOR MIRROR DOOR MIRRORS
GETTING(for TO versions/markets, where provided) KNOW YOUR CAR Some versions feature an electrochromic mirror Manual adjustment SAFETYfig. 34 with an ON/OFF switch to activate/deactivate From the inside of the car, operate lever A fig. 35 to the electrochromic function. adjust the mirror. STARTING AND DRIVINGWhen reverse gear is engaged, the mirror is
WARNING LIGHTSautomatically set for daytime use. AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 34 F0Y0225 fig. 35 F0Y0275 38 Electrical adjustment Manual folding
(for versions/markets, where provided) GETTING TO If necessary, fold the mirrors by moving them from KNOW YOUR CAR The mirrors can be adjusted only if the ignition key is position 1 (open) to position 2 (closed) fig. 37. in MAR position. SAFETY IMPORTANT When driving the mirrors should To adjust proceed as follows: STARTING AND always be in position 1 (open). DRIVING ❒ use device A fig. 36 to select the required mirror WARNING LIGHTS (right or left); AND MESSAGES ❒ move device A to position B and manipulate it to adjust the left door mirror; IN AN EMERGENCY
❒ SERVICING AND move device A to position D and manipulate it to MAINTENANCE adjust the right door mirror. TECHNICAL Once you have finished the adjustment, return device SPECIFICATIONS A to intermediate locking position C. INDEX
fig. 36 F0Y0250 fig. 37 F0Y0226 39 CLIMATE CONTROL CENTRAL AIR DIFFUSERS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR A fig. 40 - Adjustable and directable central air SIDE AIR DIFFUSERS diffusers: SAFETYA fig. 38 - Adjustable and directable side air diffusers: ❒ use device B to adjust the vent to the required
STARTING❒ AND position; DRIVINGuse device B to adjust the vent to the required position; ❒ turn wheel C to adjust the air flow. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES❒ turn wheel C to adjust the air flow.
IN AN EMERGENCYD - Fixed side air diffuser.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEUPPER AIR DIFFUSERS
TECHNICALA fig. 39 - Upper adjustable air diffuser. Turn wheel B SPECIFICATIONSto adjust the air flow.
INDEXC - Fixed upper air diffuser.
fig. 39 F0Y0108
fig. 38 F0Y0107 fig. 40 F0Y0109 40 CLIMATIC COMFORT
GETTING TO DIFFUSERS KNOW YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 41 F0Y0222 1. Fixed upper diffuser 2. Adjustable side diffusers 3. Fixed diffusers for side windows 4. Adjustable centre air diffusers 5. Adjustable upper diffuser
41 HEATING AND VENTILATION
GETTING TO KNOW YOURCONTROLS CAR
SAFETY
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 42 F0Y0156
42 A - Air temperature adjustment knob: IMPORTANT When the engine is cold, it takes a few minutes to achieve optimum passenger compartment ❒ blue section = cold air GETTING TO heating. KNOW YOUR CAR ❒ red section = hot air SAFETY B - air recirculation on/off button; RAPID DEMISTING/DEFROSTING STARTING AND C - fan activation/adjustment knob: This function activates rapid desisting/defrosting of DRIVING ❒ the windscreen and front side windows. 0 = fan off WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ❒ 1-2-3-4 = fan speed For rapid demisting/defrosting, proceed as follows: D - heated rear window on/off button; ❒ turn knob A to the red section; IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ E - air distribution knob: press button B and deactivate internal air SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE air from central outlets and side vents recirculation (LED on button off); ❒ TECHNICAL air from central outlets, side vents and front and turn knob C to 4 (maximum fan speed); SPECIFICATIONS rear footwell vents ❒ turn knob E to . INDEX air only from front and rear footwell vents air from front and rear footwell vents, to Window demisting windscreen and side windows The climate control system is very useful in air outlet to windscreen and side windows preventing the windows from misting up in the event of high levels of humidity. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT In the event of considerable external humidity and/or VENTILATION/HEATING rain and/or large differences in temperature inside To heat the passenger compartment, proceed as and outside the passenger compartment, perform follows: the following preventive window demisting procedure: ❒ turn knob A to the red section; ❒ turn knob A to the red section; ❒ turn knob E to ; ❒ press button B and deactivate internal air ❒ turn knob C to 4 (maximum fan speed). recirculation (LED on button off); Then operate the controls to maintain the desired comfort conditions.
43 ❒ turn knob E to with the possibility of moving it IMPORTANT Internal air recirculation makes it
GETTING TOto position if misting does not occur; possible to reach the required heating or cooling KNOW YOUR❒ CARturn knob C to the 2nd speed (advised speed). It is conditions more quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not use the internal air recirculation SAFETYpossible to select a different speed according to your own judgement. function on rainy/cold days as it would considerably STARTING AND increase the possibility of the windows misting. DRIVING HEATED REAR WINDOW WARNING LIGHTS AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTION AND MESSAGESDEMISTING/DEFROSTING Turn knob E to manually select one of the five IN AN EMERGENCYPress button D ( ) to activate/deactivate the function. possible air distribution settings in the passenger SERVICING AND compartment: MAINTENANCEThe activation of the function is indicated by the LED on the button itself switching on. The function is Air flow to the windscreen, front side window TECHNICAL and front/rear footwell diffusers. SPECIFICATIONSautomatically deactivated after 20 minutes. Air flow to the front/rear footwell diffusers. This For versions/markets where provided, press the INDEX air distribution allows the passenger button to activate demisting/defrosting of door compartment to be heated quickly. mirrors and windscreen (for versions/markets, where provided). Air flow distributed between central and side dashboard vents and front/rear footwell vents. IMPORTANT Do not affix stickers to the inside of Air flow to central/side dashboard vents the heated rear window over the heating filaments, (passenger’s body). to avoid damage that might cause them to stop Air flow to windscreen and side windows. working properly.
INTERNAL AIR RECIRCULATION Press button B ( ) so that the LED on the button switches on. It is advisable to switch internal air recirculation on while standing in traffic or in tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted air. Do not use the function for a long time, particularly if there are many passengers on board, to prevent the windows from misting up.
44 MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
CONTROLS SAFETY
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
°C °C TECHNICAL °F °F SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 43 F0Y0041
45 A - Air temperature adjustment knob: ❒ turn knob F to ;
GETTING❒ TOblue section = cold air ❒ press button D to activate climate control system KNOW YOUR CAR st ❒ red section = hot air and turn knob C to at least 1 (1 speed). For SAFETY rapid cooling, turn knob C to 4 (maximum fan B - air recirculation on/off button; speed). STARTING AND DRIVINGC - fan activation/adjustment knob: ❒ IMPORTANT According to particular outside WARNING LIGHTS0 = fan off AND MESSAGES environmental conditions, the climate control system ❒ 1-2-3-4 = fan speed activates recirculation automatically (for versions/ IN AN EMERGENCYD - climate control system compressor on/off markets, where additional heater provided).
SERVICINGbutton; AND MAINTENANCE Reduction in cooling E - heated rear window on/off button; ❒ TECHNICAL turn knob A clockwise to increase the SPECIFICATIONSF - air distribution knob: temperature; air from central outlets and side vents INDEX ❒ press button B to deactivate internal air air from central outlets, side vents and front and recirculation (LED on button off); rear footwell vents ❒ turn knob C to reduce the fan speed. air only from front and rear footwell vents air from front and rear footwell vents, to PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING windscreen and side windows To heat the passenger compartment, proceed as air outlet to windscreen and side windows follows: ❒ CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (cooling) turn knob A to the red section; ❒ press button B to enable internal air recirculation To cool the passenger compartment, proceed as (LED on button on); follows: ❒ turn knob F to ; ❒ turn knob A to the blue section; ❒ st ❒ turn knob C to at least 1 (1 speed). For rapid press button B to enable internal air recirculation heating, turn knob C to 4 (maximum fan speed). (LED on button on);
46 Reduction in heating Window demisting
❒ turn knob A anticlockwise to decrease the GETTING TO The climate control system is very useful in KNOW YOUR CAR temperature; preventing the windows from misting up in the event ❒ press button B to deactivate internal air of high levels of humidity. SAFETY
recirculation (LED on button off); In the event of considerable external humidity and/or STARTING AND ❒ turn knob C to reduce the fan speed. rain and/or large differences in temperature inside DRIVING and outside the passenger compartment, perform WARNING LIGHTS IMPORTANT When the engine is cold, it takes a few the following preventive window demisting AND MESSAGES minutes to achieve optimum passenger compartment procedure: IN AN EMERGENCY heating. ❒ turn knob A to the red section; SERVICING AND ❒ MAINTENANCE RAPID DEMISTING/DEFROSTING turn knob F to with the possibility of moving it to position if misting does not occur; TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS This operation allows the windscreen and front side ❒ turn knob C to the 2nd speed. windows to be rapidly demisted/defrosted. INDEX For rapid demisting/defrosting, proceed as follows: HEATED REAR WINDOW ❒ turn knob A to the red section; DEMISTING/DEFROSTING ❒ turn knob C to 4 (maximum fan speed); Press button E ( ) to turn the function on/off. ❒ turn knob F to . The activation of the function is indicated by the LED on the button itself switching on. The function is IMPORTANT In this condition, the climate control automatically deactivated after 20 minutes. system deactivates the recirculation function (LED For versions/markets where provided, press the on button B off) and activates the compressor (LED button to activate demisting/defrosting of door on button D on). The purpose of this automatic mirrors and heated windscreen (for versions/ operation is to prevent the window misting up. markets, where provided). IMPORTANT Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage that might cause them to stop working properly.
47 INTERNAL AIR RECIRCULATION Selecting the footwell/windscreen or only windscreen distribution activates the climate control system GETTINGPress TO button B ( ) so that the LED on the KNOW YOUR CAR compressor (LED on A/C button on) and the air button switches on. It is advisable to switch internal recirculation is set to "outside air" (LED on button B SAFETYair recirculation on while standing in traffic or in off). This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted air. STARTING AND windows. The user can always set air recirculation DRIVINGDo not use the function for a long time, particularly and climate control system compressor. WARNING LIGHTSif there are many passengers on board, to prevent AND MESSAGESthe windows from misting up. START&STOP
IN AN EMERGENCY IMPORTANT Internal air recirculation makes it Manual climate control system SERVICINGpossible AND to reach the required heating or cooling MAINTENANCEconditions more quickly depending on the mode If the Start&Stop function is activated (engine off
TECHNICALselected. Do not use the internal air recirculation when the car speed is zero), the system keeps the air SPECIFICATIONSfunction on rainy/cold days as it would considerably flow selected by the user. increase the possibility of the windows misting. INDEX In these conditions, the passenger compartment cooling and heating cannot be guaranteed, as the AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTION compressor stops with the engine coolant pump. Turn knob F to manually select one of the five The Start&Stop function can be deactivated, to possible air distribution settings in the passenger enhance the operation of the climate control system, compartment: by pressing the dedicated button on the dashboard. Air flow to the windscreen, front side window and front/rear footwell diffusers. Air flow to the front/rear footwell diffusers. This air distribution allows the passenger compartment to be heated quickly. Air flow distributed between central and side dashboard diffusers and front/rear footwell diffusers. Air flow to central/side dashboard vents (passenger’s body). Air flow to windscreen and side windows.
48 ADDITIONAL ELECTRIC HEATER SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
(for versions/markets, where provided) GETTING TO In winter, the climate control system must be turned KNOW YOUR CAR The additional electric heater ensures more rapid on at least once a month for about 10 minutes. passenger compartment heating. Have the system inspected at a Fiat Dealership SAFETY
It activates in cold weather conditions, if the before the summer. STARTING AND following conditions are verified: DRIVING ❒ outside temperature low; WARNING LIGHTS The system uses R134a coolant which AND MESSAGES ❒ engine coolant temperature low; does not pollute the environment in the IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ engine on; event of accidental leakage. Under no circumstances use R12 fluid, which is ❒ st SERVICING AND fan speed set to 1 speed; incompatible with the components of the system. MAINTENANCE
❒ knob A turned completely clockwise to red TECHNICAL section. SPECIFICATIONS The heater is switched off when at least one of the INDEX conditions above is no longer verified. Note The power of the electric heater is modulated according to the battery voltage.
49 AUTOMATIC DUAL ZONE CLIMATE GETTINGCONTROL TO SYSTEM KNOW YOUR(for CAR versions/markets, where provided) SAFETY CONTROLS STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 44 F0Y0034
50 A - driver side temperature adjustment knob; The climate control system can recognise extremely cold (or extremely hot) conditions in the passenger B - internal air recirculation on/off button; GETTING TO compartment and consequently provide optimal KNOW YOUR CAR C - heated rear window and thermal comfort management of the system’s capabilities. windscreen on/off button (for versions/markets, SAFETY where available); Note The reference temperature is 22°C for STARTING AND DRIVING D - climate control system compressor on/off optimal comfort management. WARNING LIGHTS button; The automatically controlled parameters and AND MESSAGES E - climate control system on/off button; functions are: ❒ IN AN EMERGENCY F - fan speed adjustment knob; air temperature at the driver/front passenger side vents; SERVICING AND G - fan speed indicator LED; MAINTENANCE ❒ air distribution at the driver/front passenger side H - air distribution selection buttons; TECHNICAL vents; SPECIFICATIONS I - MAX-DEF function (rapid defrosting/demisting of ❒ fan speed (continuous variation of the air flow); front windows), heated rear window and heated ❒ INDEX door mirrors (for versions/markets, where provided) compressor engagement (for cooling/dehumidifying activation button; the air); ❒ L - passenger side temperature adjustment knob; air recirculation. M - driver/passenger side MONO function activation All these functions can be adjusted manually by button (alignment of set temperatures); operating the system, selecting one or more functions and modifying their parameters. N - AUTO function activation button (automatic operation). Automatic control of the functions will be suspended: the system will only override the settings DESCRIPTION for safety reasons. Manual selections always take priority over automatic The automatic dual zone climate control system ones and are stored until the AUTO button is regulates the air temperatures in the passenger pressed or the system itself intervenes for specific compartment in two zones: driver side and safety reasons. passenger side. The system maintains comfort inside the passenger compartment and compensates for possible variations in external climate conditions. 51 The amount of air introduced into the passenger SWITCHING ONTHE CLIMATE CONTROL
GETTINGcompartment TO is not affected by car speed; it is SYSTEM KNOW YOURregulated CAR by the fan, which is controlled electronically. The climate control system can be switched on in SAFETY different ways: it is advisable to press the AUTO The air temperature is always automatically button and turn the knobs to set the desired STARTING AND DRIVINGcontrolled according to the temperature set on the temperatures. display (except for when the system is off or in WARNING LIGHTS In this way the system operates completely AND MESSAGEScertain conditions when the compressor is not running). automatically to adjust the temperature, quantity and IN AN EMERGENCY distribution of the air introduced into the passenger The system allows the following to be set or adjusted compartment. It also manages the air recirculation SERVICINGmanually: AND function and the activation of the air conditioning MAINTENANCE ❒ driver/passenger side air temperature; compressor. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS❒ fan speed (continuous variation); During automatic operation, you can change the set temperatures, air distribution and fan speed at any ❒ air distribution to 7 positions; INDEX time by using the relevant buttons or knobs: the ❒ compressor enablement; system will automatically change the settings to ❒ rapid defrosting/demisting function; adjust to the new requirements. ❒ air recirculation; During completely automatic operation (AUTO), ❒ varying the air flow and/or distribution (which are heated rear window; not displayed) causes the AUTO function LED ❒ system deactivation. to disappear and the system to operate in MANUAL mode (displaying both the flow and distribution requested). The climate control system detects the When the compressor is deactivated, the AUTO passenger compartment temperature operation remains active only if the system can using a mean radiant temperature sensor guarantee in-car comfort. Otherwise, the system located in the interior rear view mirror and switches to MANUAL mode (the set temperatures protected by a specific cover. Obstructing the will flash on the display). The fan speed is the same in field of view of this sensor with any object could all the zones of the passenger compartment. cause the climate control system to operate with less than optimal efficiency.
52 ADJUSTINGTHE AIRTEMPERATURE Air flow distributed between footwell diffusers (hotter air) and central and side Turn the A or L knob clockwise or anticlockwise to GETTING TO dashboard vents (cooler air). This distribution KNOW YOUR CAR adjust the air temperature in the front left (knob setting is useful in spring and autumn on A) or right (knob L) zone of the passenger sunny days. SAFETY compartment. STARTING AND Air flow distributed between footwell DRIVING The set temperatures are shown on the displays. diffusers and windscreen and front side WARNING LIGHTS Press the MONO button to align the air window defrosting/demisting diffusers. This AND MESSAGES temperature between the two zones. distribution setting allows the passenger Turn the L knob to return to the separate compartment to be warmed effectively and IN AN EMERGENCY prevents the windows from misting. management of air temperatures in the two zones. SERVICING AND Air flow distribution between windscreen MAINTENANCE Turning the knobs completely in one direction or the demisting/defrosting diffusers and side and other activates the "HI" (maximum heating) or TECHNICAL central dashboard vents. This allows air to be SPECIFICATIONS "LO" (maximum cooling) functions respectively. sent to the windscreen in conditions of To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature strong sunlight. INDEX knob to the desired temperature. Air flow distribution to all diffusers on the car. AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTION By pressing buttons H ( / / ), it is possible to Note Air always flows from the side dashboard set one of the 7 possible air distributions manually: diffusers: it is, however, possible to interrupt the air flow by operating the wheel located near the Air flow to the windscreen and front side corresponding vents. window diffusers to demist/defrost them. In AUTO mode, the climate control system Air flow at central and side dashboard vents to automatically manages air distribution (the LEDs on ventilate the chest and the face during the hot buttons H are off). season. Air flow to the front and rear footwell diffusers. When set manually, the air distribution is indicated This air distribution setting heats the passenger by the LEDs on the selected buttons switching on. compartment most quickly, giving a prompt sensation of warmth.
53 In combined function mode, functions are enabled AUTO BUTTON together with those already set when the relevant GETTING TO When the AUTO button is pressed (LED on button KNOW YOURbutton CAR is pressed. If a button whose function is already active is pressed, the operation is cancelled lit) the climate control system automatically adjusts SAFETYand the corresponding LED switches off. the following settings in the corresponding zones: ❒ STARTING AND quantity and distribution of the air introduced into DRIVINGTo restore automatic control of the air distribution after a manual selection, press the AUTO button. the passenger compartment WARNING LIGHTS ❒ AND MESSAGES climate control system compressor ADJUSTINGTHE FAN SPEED ❒ air recirculation IN AN EMERGENCY Turn knob F to increase/decrease the fan speed. cancelling all previous manual adjustments. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEThe speed is indicated by the LEDs G on the knob F This is indicated by the LED on the AUTO button switching on. switching on. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS❒ maximum fan speed = all LEDs lit; If the AUTO button is pressed when the AUTO LED is on, the system switches to completely manual INDEX❒ minimum fan speed = one LED lit. mode; it displays the current flow and distribution The fan can only be excluded if the climate control status, which will no longer be managed system compressor has been switched off by pressing automatically. button D. If a manual intervention is made on at least the air IMPORTANT To restore automatic control of the fan distribution or on the fan speed, the LED switches speed after a manual adjustment, press the AUTO off to indicate that the system is no longer button. controlling all functions automatically. Deactivating the compressor results in the deactivation of automatic operation only if the system is no longer able to guarantee comfort conditions (which depend on the set temperature). IMPORTANT Should the system no longer be able to guarantee the required temperature set in various passenger compartment zones, the set temperature value will flash for a few seconds on the display. To restore automatic system control after one or more manual adjustments, press the AUTO button. 54 MONO BUTTON IMPORTANT The engagement of the recirculation
system makes it possible to reach the required GETTING TO Press the MONO button (LED on button lit) to align KNOW YOUR CAR the passenger side air temperature with that of the heating/cooling conditions faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use it on rainy/cold days as it would driver side. SAFETY considerably increase the possibility of the windows This function makes temperature regulation easier STARTING AND misting up inside (especially if the climate control DRIVING when the driver is travelling alone. system is off). When the outside temperature is low, WARNING LIGHTS Turn knob L to set the passenger side temperature recirculation is forced off (air drawn in from the AND MESSAGES and return to separate air temperature management. outside) to prevent the windows from misting up. IN AN EMERGENCY AIR RECIRCULATION SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE The air recirculation is managed according to the It is inadvisable to use internal air recirculation when the outside following operating logics: TECHNICAL temperature is low, since the windows SPECIFICATIONS ❒ forced activation (air recirculation always on): could mist up rapidly. indicated by the LED on button B ; INDEX ❒ forced deactivation (air recirculation always off, air intake from the outside), signalled by the LED on button B switching off. Forced activation/deactivation can be selected by pressing button B . When button is pressed, the climate control system automatically activates internal air recirculation (LED on button B on) It is still possible to activate outside air recirculation (LED on the button off) and vice versa, by pressing button B . In automatic operation, recirculation is managed automatically by the system according to outside environmental conditions.
55 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM To restore automatic control of compressor
GETTINGCOMPRESSOR TO engagement, press button C again or press the KNOW YOUR CAR AUTO button. Press button D to activate/deactivate the SAFETYcompressor (activation is indicated by the LED on With compressor off: the button switching on). ❒ STARTING AND if the outside temperature is higher than the set DRIVINGThe system remembers that the compressor has one, the climate control system will not be able WARNING LIGHTSbeen switched off, even after the engine has stopped. to satisfy the request. The temperature values will AND MESSAGES then flash on the display for a few seconds to When the compressor is switched off the system indicate this; IN AN EMERGENCYdeactivates air recirculation to prevent the windows from misting up. In this case, if the system is capable ❒ the fan speed can be reset manually. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEof maintaining the required temperature, the AUTO With the compressor on and the engine running, LED does not switch off. TECHNICAL manual ventilation cannot be lower than the SPECIFICATIONSThe temperatures will instead flash for a few seconds minimum speed (only one LED lit).
INDEXand the AUTO LED will switch off if the required temperature cannot be maintained. IMPORTANT With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Moreover, under certain environmental conditions, windows could mist rapidly since the air is not dehumidified.
56 RAPID WINDOW DEMISTING/ IMPORTANT The MAX-DEF function remains on for
DEFROSTING (MAX-DEF function) about 3 minutes from when the engine coolant GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR Press the button to activate (LED on button on) reaches the appropriate temperature. the windscreen and side window demisting/ When the function is activated, the LED on the SAFETY defrosting function. AUTO button switches off. With the function STARTING AND The climate control system carries out the following activated the only possible manual adjustments are DRIVING adjusting the fan speed and turning the heated rear operations: WARNING LIGHTS window off. AND MESSAGES ❒ switches on the air conditioning compressor when When the B, C, or AUTO buttons are pressed, the environmental conditions are suitable; IN AN EMERGENCY climate control system will deactivate the MAX-DEF ❒ switches air recirculation off; function. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ❒ sets maximum air temperature (HI) in both zones; Selecting the footwell/windscreen or only windscreen TECHNICAL ❒ sets fan speed according to the engine coolant distribution activates the climate control system SPECIFICATIONS temperature; compressor (LED on A/C button on) and the air ❒ recirculation is set to "outside air" intake (LED on INDEX directs air flow to windscreen and front side button off). windows diffusers; ❒ This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the activates the heated rear window; windows. It is, however, always possible to manage ❒ activates the heated windscreen (for versions/ air recirculation and the climate control system markets, where provided); compressor manually. ❒ displays the fan speed (LED G lit).
57 HEATED REAR WINDOW Heated windscreen
GETTINGDEMISTING/DEFROSTING TO (for versions/markets, where provided) KNOW YOUR CAR Press the button to activate heated rear window Press button C to activate this function. SAFETYdemisting/defrosting. When the function is active, a warning light on
STARTINGThe AND effective activation of the function is indicated by the instrument panel is on. DRIVING the warning light on the instrument panel For versions/markets where provided, press the C WARNING LIGHTSswitching on. AND MESSAGES button to activate also demisting/defrosting of This function switches off automatically after about windscreen (with engine running only) and heated IN AN EMERGENCY20 minutes or when the engine is turned off. It is not door mirrors (for versions/markets, where provided). switched on automatically the next time the engine SERVICING AND This function is timed and switches off automatically MAINTENANCEis started. after 4 minutes for the windscreen and 20 minutes
TECHNICALFor versions/markets where provided, press the for the rear window and door mirrors. Press button SPECIFICATIONSbutton to activate demisting/defrosting of door C again to disable the function in advance. mirrors and heated nozzles (for versions/markets, INDEX Press button C to activate the heated windscreen where provided). again : IMPORTANT Do not affix stickers to the inside of ❒ pressing the button once the warning light the heated rear window over the heating filaments, switches on in the instrument panel; to avoid damage that might cause them to stop ❒ pressing the button twice the warning light working properly. switches on in the instrument panel (the heated rear window warning light stays on); ❒ pressing the button a third time the warning lights e switch off. IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on the inside of the rear window over the heating filaments to avoid damage.
58 SWITCHING OFFTHE CLIMATE CONTROL When the Start&Stop function is active (engine off at
SYSTEM zero car speed), the climate control system will GETTING TO request the reactivation of the engine if the inside KNOW YOUR CAR Press button . temperature conditions rapidly deteriorate or if With climate control system off: maximum cooling ("LO") or quick demisting SAFETY ❒ (MAX-DEF) are requested. STARTING AND air recirculation is on, thus isolating the passenger DRIVING compartment from the outside; With the Start&Stop function active (engine off at WARNING LIGHTS ❒ the compressor is off; zero car speed), air flow is reduced in order to AND MESSAGES ❒ maintain comfort conditions inside the passenger the fan is off; compartment as long as possible when the system is IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ the heated rear window can be activated/ in AUTO mode (LED on button on). SERVICING AND deactivated. When a low air flow is selected, the climate control MAINTENANCE
system control unit always activates the Start&Stop TECHNICAL IMPORTANT The climate control system control SPECIFICATIONS unit stores the temperatures set before the system function. was switched off and restores them when any button The climate control system control unit attempts to INDEX of the system is pressed (except for button D). manage the "discomfort" caused by the engine To restart the climate control system in fully stopping (deactivation of compressor and engine automatic mode press the AUTO button. coolant pump) as best it can but the operation of the climate control system can be enhanced through the deactivation of the Start&Stop function by START&STOP pressing the button on the dashboard control trim (see contents of "Start&Stop system" paragraph in Automatic dual zone climate control system this chapter). The automatic dual zone climate control system manages the Start&Stop function (engine off when Note In particularly severe climate conditions it is car speed is zero) to ensure adequate comfort inside recommended to limit the use of the Start&Stop the car. function to prevent the compressor from continuously switching on and off, with consequent The Start&Stop function is disabled until a suitable rapid misting of the windows and accumulation of comfort level in the passenger compartment is humidity with unpleasant smells in the passenger ensured; thus the engine does not turn off during compartment. these temporary stages, even if car speed is zero.
59 Note When the Start&Stop function is on (engine EXTERNAL LIGHTS
GETTINGoff TO and vehicle speed zero), the automatic KNOW YOURrecirculation CAR management is turned off always taking The left-hand stalk operates most of the external air in from outside, to reduce the probability of lights. SAFETY window misting up (as the compressor is off). The ignition key has to be in the MAR position for STARTING AND the exterior lights to come on. DRIVING ADDITIONAL HEATER The instrument panel and the various dashboard WARNING LIGHTS(for versions/markets, where provided) AND MESSAGES controls will come on with the external lights. This allows the passenger compartment to be heated IN AN EMERGENCYmore quickly in cold weather conditions. DAY LIGHTS (DRL)
SERVICING AND "Daytime Running Lights" MAINTENANCEThe heater switches off automatically when the required comfort conditions are achieved. (for versions/markets, where provided) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSThe additional heater activates automatically With the ignition key turned to MAR-ON and ring depending on the environmental conditions and with nut A fig. 45 turned to O, the daytime running lights INDEXengine started. are activated automatically; the other lights and interior lighting remain off. IMPORTANT The heater only operates if the outside temperature and engine coolant temperature are low. The heater will not activate if the battery voltage is too low.
fig. 45 F0Y0048 60 WARNING AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL (AUTOLIGHT) GETTING TO The daytime running lights are an (Dusk sensor) KNOW YOUR CAR (for versions/markets, where provided) alternative to the dipped beam SAFETY headlights for driving during the daytime in This infrared LED sensor, combined with the rain countries where it is compulsory to have lights STARTING AND on during the day; where it is not compulsory, sensor and located on the windscreen, detects the DRIVING variations in outside brightness depending on the the use of daytime running lights is permitted. WARNING LIGHTS light sensitivity set with the Setup Menu: the greater AND MESSAGES the sensitivity, the less external light is required to activate the exterior lights. IN AN EMERGENCY WARNING Activation SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Daytime running lights cannot replace The dusk sensor activates when ring nut A fig. 45 is TECHNICAL dipped headlights when driving at night turned to . In this way the side lights and dipped SPECIFICATIONS or through tunnels.The use of daytime running headlights are activated automatically according to lights is governed by the highway code of the the external light level. INDEX country in which you are driving. Comply with Following automatic light activation, the fog lights legal requirements. (for versions/markets, where provided) and rear fog light may still be switched on. When the lights are automatically switched off, the front and rear fog SIDE LIGHTS AND DIPPED BEAM lights (if activated) are also switched off. The next HEADLIGHTS time the lights are switched on automatically, the fog With the ignition key turned to MAR, turn the ring lights must be reactivated manually (if required). nut A fig. 45 to . If dipped beams are activated, With dusk sensor active, it is not possible to keep the daytime running lights go out and the side lights the main beam headlights on constantly; only flashing and dipped headlights come on. The warning is permitted. To switch these lights on constantly, light will come on in the instrument panel. turn ring nut A to and pull the stalk towards the When the ignition key is turned to STOP or steering wheel. removed and the ring nut A is turned from O to , On automatic sensor controlled deactivation, the all the side lights and number plate lights come on. dipped headlights are deactivated first, followed The warning light switches on in the instrument by the side lights a few seconds later. panel.
61 If the sensor is activated but is malfunctioning, the DIRECTION INDICATORS side lights and dipped beam headlights are switched GETTING TO Bring the stalk to the (stable) position: KNOW YOURon CAR irrespective of the outside light level: the sensor failure is indicated on the display. It is also possible to upwards: right-hand direction indicator activation; SAFETY deactivate the sensor and switch on the desired downwards: left-hand direction indicator activation. STARTINGlights, AND if necessary. DRIVING The or warning light will flash on the instrument panel. WARNING LIGHTSIMPORTANT The sensor cannot detect the presence AND MESSAGESof fog. These lights must therefore be switched on Direction indicators are switched off automatically manually in these circumstances. IN AN EMERGENCY when the steering wheel is straightened.
SERVICINGMAIN AND BEAM HEADLIGHTS MAINTENANCE Lane change function To activate the main beam headlights, with ring nut at TECHNICAL If you wish to signal a lane change, put the left stalk SPECIFICATIONS, pull the stalk towards the steering wheel. The in the unstable position for less than half a second. warning light switches on in the instrument panel. INDEX The direction indicator on the side selected will When the stalk is pulled towards the steering wheel be activated for 5 flashes and then go out again, the main beam headlights deactivate, the automatically. dipped headlights reactivate and the warning light switches off. “Cornering lights” It is not possible to switch on the main beam When the dipped headlamps are on and the speed is headlights in fixed mode if the automatic lighting below 40 km/h, if the steering wheel rotation angle control system is active. is large or the direction indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will switch on on the FLASHING relevant side to improve visibility at nighttime. You can flash the headlights by pulling the stalk towards the wheel (unstable position). The warning light will come on in the instrument panel.
62 “FOLLOW ME HOME” DEVICE WINDOW CLEANING This allows the space in front of the car to be lit up GETTING TO The right stalk controls windscreen wiper/washer KNOW YOUR CAR for a certain period of time. and heated rear window wiper/washer operation. Activation: with the ignition key turned to STOP or SAFETY removed, pull the stalk towards the steering wheel WINDSCREEN WASHER/WIPER STARTING AND within 2 minutes from when the engine is turned off. DRIVING They can be operated only with the ignition key WARNING LIGHTS Each time the stalk is moved, the lights stay on for turned to MAR. AND MESSAGES an extra 30 seconds up to a maximum of 210 seconds; then the lights are switched off The ring nut A fig. 46 can be moved to four different IN AN EMERGENCY automatically. positions: SERVICING AND Also, each time the stalk is operated, the windscreen wiper off. MAINTENANCE
warning light on the instrument panel switches intermittent operation. TECHNICAL on. The display shows a message and the time set for continuous slow operation. SPECIFICATIONS the function. continuous fast operation. INDEX The warning light switches on when the stalk is Move the stalk upwards (unstable position) to limit first moved and stays on until the function is operation to the time for which the stalk is held automatically deactivated. Each movement of the in this position. When released, the stalk will return stalk only increases the amount of time the lights stay on. Deactivation: keep the stalk pulled towards the steering wheel for more than two seconds.
fig. 46 F0Y0049 63 to its default position and the wiper will be A further stroke after approximately six seconds
GETTINGautomatically TO stopped. completes the wiping cycle (for versions/markets, KNOW YOURWith CAR the ring nut A fig. 46 in position , the where provided). SAFETYwindscreen wiper will automatically adapt operating speed to the speed of the car. RAIN SENSOR STARTING AND (for versions/markets, where provided) DRIVINGWith the windscreen wipers operational, if reverse This is located behind the interior rear view mirror, WARNING LIGHTSgear is engaged, the rear window wiper is AND MESSAGESautomatically activated. in contact with the windscreen fig. 47 and can detect the presence of rain and, consequently, manage the IN AN EMERGENCY cleaning of the windscreen in accordance with the Do not use the windscreen wiper to SERVICING AND amount of water on the screen. MAINTENANCE remove layers of snow or ice from the The sensor has an adjustment range that varies TECHNICAL windscreen. In such conditions, the SPECIFICATIONS progressively from wiper still (no stroke) when the windscreen wiper may be subjected to excessive windscreen is dry, to wiper at 2nd continuous speed stress and the motor cut-out switch, which INDEX (fast continuous operation) with intense rain. prevents operation for a few seconds, may intervene. If operation is not restored (even after turning the key and restarting the car engine), contact a Fiat Dealership.
Do not operate the windscreen wiper with the blades lifted from the windscreen.
"Smart washing" function Pull the lever towards the steering wheel (unstable position) to activate the windscreen washer. Keeping the stalk pulled for more than half a second, with just one movement it is possible to operate the washer jet and the wiper at the same time. The wiper stops working three strokes after the
stalk is released. fig. 47 F0Y0255 64 Activation This prevents unwanted activation of the rain sensor when the engine is started (i.e. when the windscreen The sensor is activated when the ring nut A fig. 46 is GETTING TO turned to position: the windscreen wiper stroke is being washed by hand or the wipers are stuck to KNOW YOUR CAR the windscreen by ice). frequency is thus adjusted in accordance with the SAFETY amount of water on the windscreen. To restore automatic operation of the rain sensor, STARTING AND The activation of the sensor is signalled by a "stroke" turn ring nut A from position to position and DRIVING then turn the ring nut back to the position. to show that the command has been acquired. WARNING LIGHTS The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted When the rain sensor is reactivated using any of the AND MESSAGES manoeuvres described above, reactivation is through the Setup menu (see paragraph "Menu IN AN EMERGENCY Items" in this section). indicated by a single stroke of the windscreen wipers, regardless of the condition of the windscreen. SERVICING AND The variation in sensitivity during rain sensor MAINTENANCE operation is also signalled by a stroke of the wipers. In the event of malfunction of the rain sensor whilst TECHNICAL This stroke is also executed with the windscreen dry. it is active, the windscreen wiper operates SPECIFICATIONS intermittently at a speed consistent with the IMPORTANT Keep the glass in the sensor area sensitivity setting of the rain sensor, regardless of INDEX clean. whether there is rain on the glass (on some versions sensor failure is indicated on the display). If the windscreen washer is used with the rain sensor activated, the normal washing cycle is performed, The sensor continues to operate and it is possible to set the windscreen wiper to continuous mode (1st after which the rain sensor resumes its normal nd automatic operation. or 2 speed). The failure indication remains for as long as the sensor is active. Deactivation Move the stalk ring nut away from the position or turn the ignition key to STOP. If the ignition key is turned to the STOP position leaving the ring nut A in position , no wiping cycle is performed at the next startup (ignition key to the MAR-ON position) even in case of rain.
65 The rain sensor is able to recognise, and Activation automatically adjust itself in the presence of the GETTING TO Turn the ring nut B fig. 46 from to to operate KNOW YOURfollowing CAR conditions: the rear window wiper as follows: ❒ SAFETYpresence of dirt on the controlled surface (salt, ❒ dirt, etc.); in intermittent mode when the windscreen wiper STARTING AND is not operating; DRIVING❒ presence of streaks of water caused by the worn ❒ in synchronous mode (at half the speed of the WARNING LIGHTSwindow wiper blades; AND MESSAGES windscreen wiper) when the windscreen wiper ❒ difference between day and night. is operating; IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ in continuous mode with reverse engaged.
SERVICING AND Do not activate the rain sensor when MAINTENANCE With the windscreen wiper on and reverse gear washing the car in an automatic car wash. engaged, rear window wiping will be continuous in TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS the same way. Pushing the stalk towards the dashboard (unstable INDEX Make sure the device is switched off if position) the rear window washer jet will activate. there is ice on the windscreen. Keep the stalk pushed for more than half a second to activate the rear window wiper as well. Releasing WARNING the stalk will activate the smart washing function, as described for the windscreen wiper. Make sure the device is switched off whenever the windscreen must be Deactivation cleaned. The function stops when the stalk is released.
REAR WINDOW WASHER/WIPER Do not use the rear window wiper to It can be operated only with the ignition key turned removelayersofsnoworice.In to MAR. such conditions, the wiper may be subjected to excessive stress and the motor protection, which prevents operation for a few seconds, may intervene. If operation is not restored, contact a Fiat Dealership.
66 CRUISE CONTROL The speed adjustment function cannot be activated in 1st or reverse gear; it is advisable to activate (for versions/markets, where provided) th GETTING TO the function in 4 or higher gears. KNOW YOUR CAR This is an electronically controlled driving assistance device that allows the desired car speed to be When travelling downhill with the device active, the SAFETY car speed may slightly exceed the stored one. maintained, without having to press the accelerator STARTING AND pedal. DRIVING Storing car speed WARNING LIGHTS This device can be used at a speed above 30 km/h on AND MESSAGES long stretches of dry, straight roads with few Proceed as follows: variations (e.g. motorways). ❒ turn ring nut A fig. 48 to and press the IN AN EMERGENCY accelerator pedal so that the car reaches the The use of this device on extra-urban roads with SERVICING AND traffic is not therefore recommended. Do not use desired speed; MAINTENANCE the device in town. ❒ move the stalk upwards (+) for at least one TECHNICAL second, then release it: the speed is memorised SPECIFICATIONS
ACTIVATINGTHE DEVICE and you can therefore release the accelerator INDEX pedal. Turn ring nut A fig. 48 to . Activation is indicated by the warning light on the instrument panel If needed (when overtaking for instance), you can switching on and, on some versions, by a message on accelerate simply by depressing the accelerator pedal: the display. when you release the pedal, the car goes back to the speed stored previously.
Restoring the stored speed If the device has been deactivated, for example by depressing the brake or clutch pedal, the set speed can be restored as follows: ❒ accelerate progressively until a speed close to that stored is reached; ❒ engage the gear selected at the time that the speed was stored; ❒ press the CANC RES button (B fig. 48).
fig. 48 F0Y0050 67 INCREASINGTHE STORED SPEED DEACTIVATINGTHE DEVICE
GETTING TO KNOW YOURThis CAR can be carried out in two ways: The device can be deactivated by the driver in the ❒ by pressing the accelerator and storing the new following ways: SAFETYspeed reached ❒ turning ring nut A to O;
STARTING AND ❒ DRIVINGor by stopping the engine ❒ by moving the stalk upwards (+) until the new ❒ by pressing the brake pedal, the clutch or the WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESspeed, which will be stored automatically, is accelerator; in this last case the system is not reached. completely deactivated but gives priority to the IN AN EMERGENCY Each movement of the stalk corresponds to an acceleration request. The device still remains SERVICING AND active, without the need to press the CANC RES MAINTENANCEincrease in speed of about 1 km/h, while keeping the stalk held upwards will continuously increase the button to return to the previous condition once TECHNICAL acceleration is concluded. SPECIFICATIONSspeed. Automatic deactivation INDEXREDUCINGTHE STORED SPEED This can be carried out in two ways: The device deactivates automatically in the following cases: ❒ by deactivating the device and then storing the ❒ new speed intervention of the ABS or ESC systems; ❒ or with the car speed below the set limit ❒ ❒ by moving the lever downwards (–) until the new in the event of system failure. speed, which will automatically remain stored, is reached. Each movement of the lever corresponds to a reduction in speed of about 1 km/h, while keeping the stalk held downwards will decrease the speed continuously.
68 WARNING Activating the device To activate the device, turn ring nut A fig. 48 to . GETTING TO When travelling with the device active, KNOW YOUR CAR never move the gear lever to neutral. Activation of the device is indicated by the warning light on the instrument panel switching SAFETY
on and, on some versions, by a message on the STARTING AND display plus last programmed speed value. DRIVING WARNING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES In the event of device faults or failures, Speed limit programming turn knob A to O and contact a Fiat The speed limit can be programmed without IN AN EMERGENCY Dealership. necessarily activating the device. SERVICING AND To store a speed value higher than that displayed, MAINTENANCE move stalk A upwards (+). Each movement of the TECHNICAL SPEED LIMITER SPECIFICATIONS stalk corresponds to an increase in speed of about 1 This device allows the speed of the car to be limited km/h, while keeping the stalk held upwards will INDEX to values which can be set by the driver. increase the speed with an increment of 5 km/h. The maximum speed can be set both with car To store a value lower than that displayed, move stationary and in motion. The minimum speed that stalk A downwards (–). Each movement of the stalk can be set is 30 km/h. corresponds to a decrease in speed of about 1 When the device is active, the car speed depends on km/h, while keeping the stalk held downwards a the pressure at the accelerator pedal, until the decrease of 5 km/h is obtained. programmed speed limit is reached (see "Speed limit programming" paragraph). If necessary (in the event of overtaking for example), the programmed speed limit can be exceeded by fully depressing the accelerator pedal. By gradually reducing the pressure on the accelerator pedal, the function will be reactivated as soon as the car speed drops below the programmed speed.
69 Activating/deactivating the device Deactivating the device
GETTING TO KNOW YOURPress CAR the CANC RES button to activate/deactivate To deactivate the device, turn ring nut A to O. the device. The deactivation of the device is indicated by the SAFETYThe activation of the device is indicated by the warning light switching off on the instrument
STARTING ANDwarning light on the instrument panel switching panel and, on some versions, by a message and DRIVINGon. symbol on the display.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESThe deactivation of the function is instead indicated by the symbol on the display. Automatic deactivation of device IN AN EMERGENCY The device deactivates automatically in the event of Exceeding the programmed speed SERVICING AND fault in the system. MAINTENANCEBy fully depressing the accelerator pedal, the TECHNICALprogrammed speed can be exceeded even with the SPECIFICATIONSdevice active. INDEXIn this case the device is deactivated temporarily and the set speed flashes on the display. Reducing the speed below the programmed value reactivates the device automatically.
Flashing of programmed speed The programmed speed flashes in the following cases: ❒ when the accelerator pedal has been fully depressed and the car speed has exceeded programmed speed; ❒ when the device cannot reduce the speed of the car due to the gradient of the road; ❒ in the event of sharp acceleration.
70 ROOF LIGHTS IMPORTANT Before getting out of the car, make
sure that the roof light bulbs are off; this will prevent GETTING TO FRONT ROOF LIGHT the battery from being drained once the doors are KNOW YOUR CAR closed. In any case, if a light is left on by mistake, the Switch A fig. 49 switches the roof lights on/off. roof light switches off automatically about 15 SAFETY minutes after the engine has been switched off. STARTING AND A switch positions: DRIVING ❒ central position: lights C and E switch on/off when ROOF LIGHTTIMING WARNING LIGHTS the doors are opened/closed; AND MESSAGES ❒ On certain versions, to facilitate getting into/out of pressed to the left (position OFF): lights C and E IN AN EMERGENCY are always switched off; the car, especially at night or in poorly-lit areas, two timed modes have been provided. SERVICING AND ❒ pressed to the right (position ): lights C and D MAINTENANCE are always switched on. Timing when getting into the car TECHNICAL The lights switch on/off gradually. SPECIFICATIONS The roof lights switch on according to the following Switch B switches on/off light C. modes: INDEX Switch D switches on/off light E. ❒ for about 10 seconds when the doors are unlocked; ❒ for about 3 minutes when one of the doors is opened; ❒ for about 10 seconds when the doors are closed. The timed period is interrupted when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON.
fig. 49 F0Y0098 71 The lights switch off in three ways: REAR ROOF LIGHT
GETTING❒ TOwhen all doors are closed, the 3-minute timer will KNOW YOUR CARstop and a 10-second one will start. This timer will Versions without sun roof (or glazed roof) SAFETYstop when the key is turned to MAR-ON; Press the cover A fig. 50 to switch the light on/off. ❒ The light will stay on for a few seconds after the STARTING ANDwhen doors are locked (either with remote DRIVINGcontrol or with key on driver side door), the roof doors are closed and will then switch off automatically. WARNING LIGHTSlight switches off; AND MESSAGES❒ the interior lights are switched off in any case after The light switches off in any case when the ignition
IN AN EMERGENCY15 minutes to preserve battery charge. key is turned to MAR-ON. The light switches off automatically after a few SERVICING AND MAINTENANCETiming when getting out of the car minutes if a door is left open. To switch it on again, if necessary, open another door or close and reopen TECHNICALAfter removing the key from the ignition switch, the SPECIFICATIONSroof lights switch on as follows: the same door or press the cover A. INDEX❒ if the ignition key is removed within 3 minutes from the engine stopping, the roof lights switch on for 10 seconds; ❒ for about 3 minutes when one of the doors is opened; ❒ for about 10 seconds when one of the doors is closed. The timing stops automatically when the doors are locked.
fig. 50 F0Y0101 72 Versions with sun roof (or with glazed roof) COURTESY LIGHTS
(for versions/markets, where provided) GETTING TO For versions with sun roof (or with glazed roof), KNOW YOUR CAR there are two roof lights A fig. 51 at the sides (above On some versions, courtesy lights are fitted behind the rear doors). the sun visors. SAFETY
To switch the lights on/off, press at the + sign on the Use switch A fig. 53 to switch the light on/off. STARTING AND roof light cover. DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS The rear roof light(s) also switch on in the same AND MESSAGES circumstances that cause the front roof light to switch on. IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOF LIGHT MAINTENANCE
The roof light A fig. 52 is located on the left side of TECHNICAL the luggage compartment. This switches on SPECIFICATIONS automatically when the luggage compartment is INDEX opened and switches off when it is closed. The light switches on/off regardless of the ignition key position.
fig. 52 F0Y0102
fig. 51 F0Y0252 fig. 53 F0Y0100 73 GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT CONTROLS
GETTING TO KNOW YOURThe CAR roof light A fig. 54 switches on automatically when the glove compartment is opened and switches HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS SAFETYoff when it is closed. Press the fig. 55 button to switch the lights on/off.
STARTINGThe AND light switches on/off regardless of the ignition When the hazard warning lights are on, the and DRIVINGkey position. warning lights flash.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IMPORTANT The use of hazard warning lights is governed by the highway code of the country you are IN AN EMERGENCY driving in: comply with legal requirements.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Emergency braking
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS In the event of emergency braking the hazard warning lights switch on automatically as well as INDEX warning lights and in the instrument panel. The lights switch off automatically when emergency braking ceases.
VOL TUNE
VOL SCROLL
ENTER
ENTER
BROWSE BROWSE
fig. 54 F0Y0099 fig. 55 F0Y0037 74 FOG LIGHTS CENTRAL LOCKING
(for versions/markets, where provided) GETTING TO Press the fig. 57 button to lock all doors at the KNOW YOUR CAR Press the fig. 56 button to switch the lights on/off. same time. When the doors are locked, the LED The LED above the button will also switch on when above the button switches on. SAFETY the lights are on. Locking takes place irrespective of the position of STARTING AND the ignition key. DRIVING REAR FOG LIGHT WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Press the fig. 56 button to switch the light on/off. The LED above the button will also switch on when IN AN EMERGENCY the light is on. SERVICING AND The rear fog light switches on only when the dipped MAINTENANCE headlights or front fog lights are switched on. Press TECHNICAL the button again to switch the light off, or switch off SPECIFICATIONS the dipped headlights or the front fog lights (for versions/markets, where provided). INDEX
fig. 56 F0Y0038 fig. 57 F0Y0039 75 DUALDRIVE ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ECO FUNCTION
GETTING(for TO versions/markets, where provided) (for versions/markets, where provided) KNOW YOUR CAR Press the CITY button fig. 58 to activate the Press the ECO button fig. 59 to activate the function. SAFETYfunction. When this function is active, the word When the ECO function is activated, the car is set CITY on the instrument panel will light up. STARTING AND for city driving, characterised by less effort on the DRIVINGThis function stays in the memory, so when the steering wheel (Dualdrive system on) and reduced
WARNING LIGHTSvehicle is started again, the system keeps the setting fuel consumption. AND MESSAGES it had before the engine was stopped. When the function is activated, an activation or IN AN EMERGENCYFor more details, see the contents of the "Dualdrive deactivation message is shown on the display for electric power steering" paragraph in this chapter. some versions/markets. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE This function stays in the memory, so when the
TECHNICAL vehicle is started again, the system keeps the setting SPECIFICATIONS it had before the engine was stopped. Press the
INDEX ECO button again to deactivate the function and restore the normal driving setting.
fig. 58 F0Y0036 fig. 59 F0Y0260 76 FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM To restore the correct operation of the car, proceed as follows: This intervenes in the event of an impact causing: GETTING TO ❒ turn the ignition key to the MAR position; KNOW YOUR CAR ❒ the interruption of the fuel supply with the engine consequently cutting out ❒ activate the right direction indicator; SAFETY ❒ ❒ deactivate the right direction indicator; STARTING AND the automatic unlocking of the doors DRIVING ❒ the automatic switching on of the interior lights ❒ activate the left direction indicator; WARNING LIGHTS ❒ the switching on of the hazard warning lights. ❒ deactivate the left direction indicator; AND MESSAGES
❒ activate the right direction indicator; IN AN EMERGENCY On some versions, the intervention of the system is ❒ deactivate the right direction indicator; indicated by a message shown on the display. SERVICING AND ❒ activate the left direction indicator; MAINTENANCE IMPORTANT Carefully check the car for fuel leaks, ❒ TECHNICAL for instance in the engine compartment, under deactivate the left direction indicator; SPECIFICATIONS ❒ the car or near the tank area. After a collision, turn turn the ignition key to the STOP position. INDEX the ignition key to STOP to prevent the battery from running down. WARNING If, after an impact, you smell fuel or notice leaks from the fuel system, do not reactivate the system to avoid the risk of fire.
77 INTERIOR FITTINGS On some versions, the compartment may be cooled
GETTING TO by an air vent connected to the climate control KNOW YOURSTORAGE CAR COMPARTMENTS system (operate wheel B fig. 61 to adjust the air flow rate inside the compartment). SAFETY Upper compartment The cooling function is only carried out with the STARTING AND climate control system on. DRIVINGTo open the compartment, press button A fig. 60
WARNING LIGHTSpushing it upwards and holding it down rotate the AND MESSAGESflap as shown in the figure, until it reaches
IN AN EMERGENCY"completely open" stop position.
SERVICINGIMPORTANT AND Do not insert objects of such a size MAINTENANCEthat the compartment cannot be completely closed.
TECHNICALEnsure that the compartment is completely closed SPECIFICATIONSwhen driving.
INDEX
fig. 60 F0Y0055 fig. 61 F0Y0056 78 Lower compartment IMPORTANT Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W to the socket. Do not damage To open the compartment, use the handle A fig. 62. GETTING TO the socket by using unsuitable adaptors. KNOW YOUR CAR When the compartment is opened a light switches on to illuminate it. On versions with optional "smoker’s kit", the cigar SAFETY lighter takes the place of the power socket (see STARTING AND Compartment under the seat "Cigar lighter" paragraph). DRIVING (for versions/markets, where provided) WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES On some versions, there is a storage compartment under the passenger seat fig. 63: do not use it to IN AN EMERGENCY store objects which weigh more than 1.5 kg. SERVICING AND To open the compartment, use handle A. MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL POWER SOCKETS SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX Passenger compartment power socket It is located on the central tunnel fig. 64, near the handbrake lever. It only operates with the ignition key at MAR-ON. fig. 63 F0Y0160
fig. 62 F0Y0057 fig. 64 F0Y0052 79 Luggage compartment power socket IMPORTANT Always check that the cigar lighter is
GETTING TO switched off. KNOW YOURThis CAR is located on the left side of the luggage compartment fig. 65. It only operates with the IMPORTANT Do not connect devices with power SAFETYignition key at MAR-ON. higher than 180 W to the socket. Do not damage
STARTING AND the socket by using unsuitable adaptors. DRIVINGIMPORTANT Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W to the socket. Do not damage WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESthe socket by using unsuitable adaptors. WARNING
IN AN EMERGENCY The cigar lighter gets extremely hot. CIGAR LIGHTER Handle it carefully and make sure that (for versions/markets, where provided) SERVICING AND children don’t use it: risk of fire and/or burns. MAINTENANCE This is located on the central tunnel fig. 66, next to TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSthe handbrake lever. To activate the cigar lighter, press button A. INDEXAfter a few seconds the button automatically returns to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready for use.
fig. 65 F0Y0059 fig. 66 F0Y0058 80 SUNVISORS GLASSES HOLDER
(for versions/markets, where provided) GETTING TO These are located at the sides of the interior rear KNOW YOUR CAR view mirror. They can be adjusted forwards and This is located on the left of the driver side sun visor, sideways. above the door fig. 68. SAFETY
To direct the visor laterally, detach the visor from STARTING AND the interior rear view mirror side hook and turn DRIVING it towards the side window. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES A courtesy mirror with light is fitted on the back of the visors on some versions. The light allows the IN AN EMERGENCY mirror to be used even in poor light conditions. SERVICING AND To access the mirror, use flap A fig. 67, sliding it as MAINTENANCE shown in the figure. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 67 F0Y0054 fig. 68 F0Y0051 81 REAR SEAT SURVEILLANCE MIRROR FIXED GLASS ROOF
GETTING(for TO versions/markets, where provided) (for versions/markets, where provided) KNOW YOUR CAR This is located next to the front roof light. It comprises an extensive fixed glass panel and is SAFETYTo bring it to usage position, operate in area A fitted with an electrically operated sun blind.
STARTINGfig. AND 69, turning it downwards. DRIVING BLIND MOVEMENT
WARNING LIGHTSEXTINGUISHER AND MESSAGES Blind operation is carried out with the key at (for versions/markets, where provided) MAR-ON only. IN AN EMERGENCY Where required, the fire extinguisher is located in Press again button A fig. 70: the blind will move the luggage compartment. SERVICING AND towards the rear part of the car, until end of travel. MAINTENANCE With blind fully open press button A: the blind TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS will move towards the front part of the car, until it is fully closed. INDEX During the automatic opening and closing stages, press button A again to interrupt the blind movement.
fig. 69 F0Y0122 fig. 70 F0Y0121 82 ANTI-PINCH SAFETY DEVICE ❒ take Allen wrench B provided and located in the tool box or, depending on the version, in the The sun blind is provided with an "anti-pinch" safety GETTING TO Fix&Go Automatic container located in the KNOW YOUR CAR device that can detect the presence of any obstacle luggage compartment; during the closing movement (front area and central SAFETY crossmember area). ❒ introduce the wrench B provided into housing A STARTING AND and turn it clockwise to open the curtain or DRIVING When this occurs the blind interrupts its stroke anticlockwise to close it. immediately. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES SUN CURTAIN INITIALISATION EMERGENCY OPERATION PROCEDURE IN AN EMERGENCY
If the control button fails, the sun curtain can be SERVICING AND Following an automatic movement malfunction while MAINTENANCE moved manually proceeding as described below: opening/closing or after an emergency manoeuvre ❒ remove protective cap A fig. 71 on the internal TECHNICAL (see description in the previous paragraph), the SPECIFICATIONS trim; automatic operation of the sun curtain must be initialised again. INDEX Proceed as follows: ❒ press button A in closing position; ❒ hold down button A: after approximately 10 seconds the curtain moves jerkily to closing position. Once the movement has ended (curtain closed) release button B; ❒ turn the ignition key to STOP and keep it there for 10 seconds; ❒ turn the ignition key to the MAR-ON position; ❒ press button A in closing position; ❒ hold down button A until the curtain is completely closed: the initialisation procedure has ended; ❒ press button A again within 3 seconds from the conclusion of the initialisation procedure;
fig. 71 F0Y0285 83 ❒ hold down button A: the curtain will perform an ELECTRIC SUN ROOF
GETTING TOautomatic opening and closing cycle: should this (for versions/markets, where provided) KNOW YOUR CARnot occur, repeat the operation from the beginning; The sun roof comprises two glass panels (the front SAFETY one is mobile and the rear one fixed) and is fitted ❒ keeping button A held down, wait until the curtain STARTING AND with an electrically operated sun blind. DRIVINGis completely closed. The sun roof and the blind can be operated only with WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES the ignition key turned to MAR-ON.
IN AN EMERGENCY OPENING
SERVICING AND Press button A fig. 72: the front glass panel will move MAINTENANCE into the “spoiler” position. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS After opening in “spoiler” position, press button A once again for more than half a second to bring INDEX the roof automatically to fully open position. Automatic movement can be interrupted in any position by pressing button A again.
fig. 72 F0Y0120 84 CLOSING BLIND MOVEMENT
GETTING TO From the fully open position press button A fig. 72: Press again button B fig. 72: the blind will move KNOW YOUR CAR the front glass panel will move into the “spoiler” towards the rear part of the car, until it is fully open. position. With blind fully open press button B: the blind will SAFETY
After opening in spoiler position, press button A move towards the front part of the car, until it is fully STARTING AND again for more than half a second to bring the roof closed. DRIVING automatically to fully closed position. Automatic WARNING LIGHTS During the automatic opening and closing stages, AND MESSAGES movement can be interrupted in any position by press button B again to interrupt the blind pressing button A again. movement. IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND Do not open the sun roof if a transverse ANTI-PINCH SAFETY DEVICE MAINTENANCE roof rack is fitted. Do not open the sun The sun roof and the electric blind are equipped with TECHNICAL roof if there is snow or ice on it: you may an anti-pinch safety system capable of detecting the SPECIFICATIONS damage it. presence of an obstacle whilst the roof is closing: INDEX if this happens, the system intervenes and the movement of the glass is immediately reversed. WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid the risk of injury to those still inside the car due to accidental operation of the sun roof. Improper use of the roof can be dangerous. Before and during operation, always check that no-one is exposed to the risk of being injured by the moving sunroof or by objects getting caught or hit by it.
85 EMERGENCY OPERATION INITIALISATION PROCEDURE
GETTING TO KNOW YOURIf CAR the control buttons fail to operate, the sun blind Following an automatic movement malfunction while and the sun roof can be moved manually proceeding opening/closing or after an emergency manoeuvre SAFETYas described below: (see description in the previous paragraph), the ❒ automatic operation of the sun roof must be STARTING ANDSun blind movement: remove protective cap A DRIVINGfig. 73 on the internal trim; initialised again. WARNING LIGHTS❒ Proceed as follows: AND MESSAGESSun roof movement: remove protective cap B on the internal trim; ❒ press button A fig. 72 in closing position; IN AN EMERGENCY❒ take Allen key C provided and located in the tool ❒ turn the ignition key to STOP and keep it there for
SERVICING ANDbox or, depending on the version, in the Fix&Go 10 seconds; MAINTENANCE Automatic container located in the luggage ❒ turn the ignition key to the MAR-ON position; compartment; TECHNICAL ❒ SPECIFICATIONS❒ hold down button A: after approximately 10 insert key C in housing A (for blind movement) or seconds the roof moves jerkily to closing position. INDEXB (for sun roof movement) and turn it clockwise When the movement stops (closed roof), release to open the roof (or the blind) or anticlockwise to button A (if the roof is already closed, you will close the roof (or the blind). hear the mechanical lock only); ❒ press button A again within 3 seconds from the conclusion of the initialisation procedure; ❒ hold down button A: the roof will perform an automatic opening and closing cycle. Should this not occur, repeat the operation from the beginning; ❒ keeping button A held down, wait until the roof is completely closed; ❒ the initialisation procedure is over.
fig. 73 F0Y0234 86 DOORS Locking/unlocking the doors from inside
GETTING TO Press button . The button has an LED that KNOW YOUR CAR DOOR CENTRAL LOCKING/UNLOCKING indicates whether the doors are locked or unlocked. SAFETY Locking the doors from outside LED on: doors locked. Press button once again to centrally unlock all doors. The LED will switch off. STARTING AND DRIVING With doors closed, press the button on the LED off: doors unlocked. Press the button again remote control or turn the metal insert (located WARNING LIGHTS to centrally lock all doors. The doors will be locked AND MESSAGES inside the key) in the driver side door lock. only if all the doors are properly shut. The LED above the fig. 74 button switches on to Once the doors have been locked via the remote IN AN EMERGENCY indicate that the doors have been locked. control or the key pawl, it will no longer be possible SERVICING AND Door locking is carried out with all doors shut, to unlock them by pressing button . MAINTENANCE irrespective of the luggage compartment open/closed TECHNICAL In the absence of electrical power supply (blown SPECIFICATIONS status. fuse, battery disconnected, etc.) it is still possible to lock the doors manually. INDEX Unlocking the doors from outside Press button on the remote control or turn the IMPORTANT With central locking active, pulling the metal insert (located inside the key) in the driver's internal opening lever of the passenger side door side door lock. unlocks the door (the LED stays on). Pulling the internal opening lever of the driver side door activates central unlocking. IMPORTANT The rear doors cannot be opened from the inside when the child-lock system is engaged (see the description in the following paragraph).
fig. 74 F0Y0039 87 CHILD-LOCKS ❒ position1-device engaged (door locked);
GETTING TO ❒ position2-device not engaged (door may be KNOW YOURThis CAR system prevents the rear doors from being opened from the inside. opened from the inside). SAFETYThis device A fig. 75 can only be engaged with the The device remains on even if the doors are
STARTINGdoors AND open: unlocked electrically. DRIVING IMPORTANT The rear doors cannot be opened WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES from the inside when the child-lock system is engaged. IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WARNING
TECHNICAL Always use this device when carrying SPECIFICATIONS children.After engaging the child lock on
INDEX both rear doors, check for effective engagement by trying to open a door with the internal handle.
fig. 75 F0Y0111 88 PASSENGER SIDE FRONT DOOR AND ❒ press the door locking/unlocking button on the
REAR DOOR EMERGENCY LOCKING dashboard; GETTING TO DEVICE or KNOW YOUR CAR The passenger side front door and the rear doors ❒ introduce the metal insert of the ignition key in SAFETY have a device to lock them when there is no the front door pawl; STARTING AND electrical power supply. DRIVING or In this case proceed as follows: WARNING LIGHTS ❒ pull the internal door handle. AND MESSAGES ❒ engage the metal insert of the ignition key in position Afig. 76 (passenger side front door) or B IN AN EMERGENCY fig. 75 (rear doors); If the child lock was engaged and the SERVICING AND ❒ turn the key clockwise and then remove it from previously described locking procedure MAINTENANCE housing A or B. carried out, operating the internal TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS To restore the starting condition of the door locks opening handle will not open the door: in this (only if battery charge restored), proceed as follows: case, to open the door, the outside handle must INDEX ❒ be used.The door central locking/unlocking press the button on the remote control; button is not disabled by the engagement of or the emergency lock.
Door opening/closing mechanism initialisation If the battery is disconnected or the protective fuse blows, the door opening/closing mechanism must be reinitialised as follows: ❒ close all the doors; ❒ press button on the remote control or button for locking/unlocking the doors on the instrument panel; ❒ press button on the remote control or button for locking/unlocking the doors on the instrument panel.
fig. 76 F0Y0110 89 ELECTRIC WINDOWS CONTROLS
GETTING TO KNOW YOURThese CAR operate when the ignition key is turned to Driver's side front door MAR-ON and for about three minutes after the (versions with 2 electric windows) SAFETYignition key is turned to STOP or removed unless A fig. 77: front left window opening/closing. STARTINGone AND of the front doors is opened. DRIVINGThe buttons are located on the door panel trim (for "Automatic continuous" operation during window opening/closing, while ignition key is in MAR-ON WARNING LIGHTSversions/markets, where provided). All windows AND MESSAGEScan be controlled from the driver side door panel. position;
IN AN EMERGENCY B: front right window opening/closing. "Automatic continuous" operation during window opening/ SERVICING AND WARNING MAINTENANCE closing, "manual" operation only during window Improper use of the electric windows closing. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS can be dangerous. Before and during operation, always check that passengers are not INDEXexposed to the risk of being injured either directly by the moving windows or through objects getting caught or struck by them.When leaving the car, always remove the ignition key to avoid the risk of injury of people still on board due to accidental operation of the electric windows.
fig. 77 F0Y0268 90 Driver's side front door Use the buttons to open/close the desired window. (versions with 4 electric windows) When one of the two buttons is pressed briefly, GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR A fig. 78: front left window opening/closing. the window moves in stages; if the button is held "Continuous automatic" operation during window down, "continuous automatic" operation is activated SAFETY opening/closing stage and anti-pinch system activated. both for closing and opening. STARTING AND B: front right window opening/closing. "Continuous If the button is pressed again, the window will stop in DRIVING automatic" operation during window opening/closing the desired position. WARNING LIGHTS stage and anti-pinch system activated. AND MESSAGES Front and rear passenger doors C: enabling/disabling of rear door electric window IN AN EMERGENCY controls (for versions/markets, where provided) SERVICING AND D: rear left window opening/closing (for versions/ On the passenger side front door panel trim, and on MAINTENANCE some versions also on the rear doors, buttons are markets, where provided). "Continuous automatic" TECHNICAL operation during window opening/closing stage provided to control the associated windows. SPECIFICATIONS and anti-pinch system activated: Anti-crush safety device INDEX E: rear right window opening/closing (for versions/ (for versions/markets, where provided) markets, where provided). "Continuous automatic" operation during window opening/closing stage The car is equipped with an anti-crush safety device and anti-pinch system activated. for the raising of the front and rear windows. This safety system detects the presence of an obstacle during the window closing travel and intervenes by stopping and reversing the window travel, depending on its position. This device is also useful if the windows are activated accidentally by children on board the car. The anti-pinch function is active both during manual and automatic operation of the electric windows. Following the intervention of the anti-pinch system, the window travel is immediately interrupted and subsequently reversed until the lower end of travel is reached. The window cannot be operated in any way during this time. fig. 78 F0Y0240 91 IMPORTANT If the anti-crush protection intervenes MANUAL REAR WINDOW WINDERS
GETTING3 consecutiveTO times within 1 minute or is faulty, (for versions/markets, where provided) KNOW YOURthe CAR automatic closing operation of the window is inhibited, only allowing it in steps of half a second; To open and to close the window, use the relevant SAFETYthe button is released for the subsequent handle fig. 79. STARTINGmanoeuvre. AND In order to restore the correct DRIVINGoperation of the system, the relevant window must WARNING LIGHTSbe lowered. AND MESSAGES Electric window system initialisation IN AN EMERGENCY If power supply is interrupted when the window is SERVICINGmoving, AND the electric window automatic operation MAINTENANCEmust be reinitialised. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSThe initialisation procedure must be carried out with the doors closed and for each door, as described INDEXbelow: ❒ fully close the window to be initialised, with manual operation; ❒ after the window has reached the upper end of travel, hold the up button pressed for at least one second.
fig. 79 F0Y0267 92 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT WARNING GETTING TO Luggage compartment unlocking is electrically Be careful not to hit objects on the KNOW YOUR CAR operated and is deactivated when the car is storage shelf when you open the SAFETY in motion. tailgate.
STARTING AND OPENING DRIVING Emergency opening from inside WARNING LIGHTS When unlocked, the luggage compartment can be AND MESSAGES opened from outside the car using the electric Proceed as follows: IN AN EMERGENCY opening handle A fig. 80 located under the handle ❒ remove the rear head restraints and completely until the unlocking click is heard or by pressing SERVICING AND fold back the seats (see the paragraph "Extending MAINTENANCE the button on the remote control. the luggage compartment"); The direction indicators will flash twice and an TECHNICAL ❒ take the screwdriver provided from the tool box SPECIFICATIONS internal light will switch on when the luggage or the Fix&Go Automatic container, depending compartment is opened: the light switches off on the version; INDEX automatically when the luggage compartment is closed. The light switches off automatically after a few minutes if the luggage compartment is left open.
fig. 80 F0Y0146 fig. 81 F0Y0172 93 ❒ use the screwdriver to remove the yellow tab A LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
GETTING TOfig. 81; INITIALISATION KNOW YOUR❒ CAR then insert the screwdriver in housing B fig. 82 in IMPORTANT If the battery is disconnected or the SAFETYorder to activate the luggage compartment release protection fuse blows, the luggage compartment tab. STARTING AND opening/closing mechanism must be reinitialised as DRIVING follows: CLOSING WARNING LIGHTS ❒ close all the doors and the luggage compartment; AND MESSAGESGrip handle A fig. 83 and lower the tailgate, pressing ❒ press the button on the remote control; IN AN EMERGENCYnext to the lock until it clicks. ❒ press the button on the remote control. SERVICINGIMPORTANT AND Before closing the luggage MAINTENANCE compartment make sure that you have the keys, EXTENDINGTHE LUGGAGE TECHNICALsince the luggage compartment is automatically COMPARTMENT SPECIFICATIONSlocked. See the descriptions in "Removing the parcel shelf" INDEX and "Folding the seats" paragraphs for how to extend the luggage compartment.
fig. 82 F0Y0173 fig. 83 F0Y0227 94 Removing the parcel shelf
GETTING TO Proceed as follows: KNOW YOUR CAR ❒ free the ends of the two parcel shelf B mounting links A fig. 84 by removing the eyelets C from the SAFETY
mounting pins; STARTING AND DRIVING ❒ raise the rear part of the parcel shelf, operating as WARNING LIGHTS illustrated in fig. 85; AND MESSAGES ❒ free the pins D fig. 86 outside the shelf, then remove the parcel shelf B, pulling it upwards; IN AN EMERGENCY
❒ SERVICING AND after removal, the parcel shelf can be loaded MAINTENANCE sideways into the luggage compartment or placed TECHNICAL between the front seat backrests and the SPECIFICATIONS folded-back rear seat cushions (with the luggage compartment completely extended). INDEX
fig. 85 F0Y0067
fig. 84 F0Y0065 fig. 86 F0Y0068 95 Backrest folding (partial extension) WARNING GETTINGProceed TO as follows: KNOW YOUR CAR Make sure the backrest is properly ❒ completely lower the rear seat head restraints; SAFETY secured at both sides to prevent it ❒ move the seat belts to the side, making sure that moving forward in the event of sharp braking STARTING AND with possible impacts on possible occupants. DRIVINGthey are correctly extended and not twisted; ❒ using lever A fig. 87, adjust the seat into the WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESdesired position; ❒ IN AN EMERGENCYraise lever B fig. 88 to fold the backrest (see fig. 89). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCENote It is advisable to carry out this procedure from TECHNICALthe outside, with the left hand. SPECIFICATIONS
INDEXRepositioning the backrest To bring the backrest back to normal usage position, lift lever B fig. 88 and then raise the backrest.
fig. 88 F0Y0259
fig. 87 F0Y0074 fig. 89 F0Y0075 96 Backrest and seat folding (total extension) Before tilting the seat backrest fully, GETTING TO Proceed as follows: remove any objects laid on it. KNOW YOUR CAR ❒ completely lower the rear seat head restraints; SAFETY ❒ move the seat belts to the side, making sure that WARNING they are correctly extended and not twisted; STARTING AND Do not move the seat if a child is seated DRIVING ❒ using lever A fig. 87, adjust the seat to "completely on the same or sitting in the suitable WARNING LIGHTS forward" position to achieve maximum luggage child restraint system. AND MESSAGES compartment extension (depending on the desired position of the fronts seats); IN AN EMERGENCY
❒ SERVICING AND lift the release lever B fig. 90 to fold the left or Repositioning the rear seat MAINTENANCE right section of the backrest: the backrest and To reposition the rear seat, push the backrest TECHNICAL cushion will be folded forwards automatically (see SPECIFICATIONS fig. 91). If necessary, accompany the backrest backwards as shown in fig. 92 and secure it (when it during the initial stage of folding. clicks into place, this indicates correct positioning). INDEX Note It is advisable to carry out this procedure from the outside, with the left hand.
fig. 90 F0Y0073 fig. 91 F0Y0076 97 WARNING "CARGO MAGIC SPACE" GETTING TO (for versions/markets, where provided) KNOW YOUR CAR Make sure the backrest is properly The car features a load platform which can be SAFETY secured at both sides to prevent it moving forward in the event of sharp braking adjusted to three different heights, called "Cargo Magic Space", permitting modular luggage STARTING ANDwith possible impacts on possible occupants. DRIVING compartment volume:
WARNING LIGHTS ❒ Position 0 (platform completely lowered): AND MESSAGES Repositioning the backrest permits maximum luggage compartment capacity; ❒ IN AN EMERGENCYTo bring the backrest back to normal usage position, Position 1 (platform at threshold level): lift lever B fig. 88 and then raise the backrest until permits a level load threshold to facilitate SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEvertical engagement position is reached. loading/unloading of objects in the luggage compartment. It also allows the space underneath TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS to be used as a further compartment for stowing objects which are more fragile or small; INDEX ❒ Position 2 (platform completely raised):in conjunction with the lowering of the rear seat and front passenger side seat backrests, permits long objects to be loaded. It is advisable to use this position only for the actual period in which the objects are transported, then return the platform to position 0 or 1.
The dimensions of the platform permit a maximum capacity of distributed weight of 70 kg (in position 1) or 40 kg (in position 2): do not load objects with a higher weight.
fig. 92 F0Y0077 98 Access to double load compartment Moving the load platform
GETTING TO To access the double load compartment, proceed as To move the load platform from lower to upper KNOW YOUR CAR follows: position, proceed as follows: ❒ grip handle A fig. 93 and raise platform B, holding ❒ grip handle A fig. 93 and raise platform B, holding SAFETY
it with one hand; it with one hand; STARTING AND DRIVING ❒ place the desired objects in compartment C WARNING LIGHTS fig. 94; AND MESSAGES ❒ then reposition platform B correctly in the housings D fig. 95 on the side panels and IN AN EMERGENCY
rear crossmember E. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE IMPORTANT Movements of the load platform must TECHNICAL take place in a central position relative to the luggage SPECIFICATIONS compartment. INDEX
fig. 94 F0Y0080
fig. 93 F0Y0079 fig. 95 F0Y0081 99 ❒ position platform B correctly on housings C and D A further two hooks are located on the rear
GETTING TOfig. 96 on the side panels. crossmember. KNOW YOUR CAR Two hooks are also available on the side panels to fix SAFETYAccess to "Fix&Go Automatic" kit loads which are not excessively heavy (e.g. bags). (or removal of space-saver wheel) STARTING AND To use the hooks, press button A fig. 99. DRIVINGTo access the "Fix&Go Automatic" quick tyre inflation kit (for use, see contents of the "In an WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESemergency" chapter) or to remove the space-saver wheel (for versions/markets, where provided) and its IN AN EMERGENCYtoolbox, proceed as follows:
SERVICING❒ AND MAINTENANCEgrip handle A fig. 93 and remove platform B; ❒ pull tab A fig. 97 and raise carpet B. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECURINGYOUR LOAD INDEX There are two hooks A fig. 98 inside the luggage compartment for attaching cables which can secure the load carried.
fig. 97 F0Y0083
fig. 96 F0Y0082 fig. 98 F0Y0063 100 IMPORTANT Do not apply, on a single hook, a load There is also a storage container inside the luggage greater than 10 kg. compartment A fig. 101. GETTING TO To remove the container, pull it upwards out of the KNOW YOUR CAR STORAGE COMPARTMENTS dedicated housings. SAFETY There are two storage compartments on the side To reposition the container, reinsert the tabs in the STARTING AND panels fig. 100. housings on the side trim, taking care to position the DRIVING
container with the three straps facing the luggage WARNING LIGHTS compartment. AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 99 F0Y0062
fig. 100 F0Y0078 fig. 101 F0Y0084 101 BONNET CLOSING
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR Lower the bonnet to approximately 20 centimetres OPENING from the engine compartment and let it drop. Make SAFETYProceed as follows: sure that the bonnet is completely closed and not only fastened by the locking device by trying to open STARTING❒ ANDpull lever A fig. 102 in the direction indicated by DRIVING it. the arrow; WARNING LIGHTS❒ If it is not perfectly closed, do not try to press the AND MESSAGESoperate lever B fig. 103, in the direction indicated bonnet down but open it and repeat the procedure. by the arrow, and raise the bonnet. IN AN EMERGENCY IMPORTANT Two side gas shock absorbers are SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEprovided to assist in opening the bonnet. Do not tamper with these shock absorbers and accompany TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSthe bonnet when raising.
INDEXIMPORTANT Before raising the bonnet, make sure that the arms of the wipers are not raised from the windscreen and that the wiper is not operational. The following plate is applied inside the engine compartment fig. 104:
fig. 103 F0Y0115
fig. 102 F0Y0228 fig. 104 F0Y1100 102 WARNING ROOF RACK/SKI RACK GETTING TO For safety reasons, the bonnet must The attachments provided A fig. 105 are located KNOW YOUR CAR above the front door and rear door and are only always be properly closed while driving. SAFETY Therefore, make sure that the bonnet is accessible with the doors open. Lineaccessori Fiat has a dedicated roof rack/ski rack for this car. properly closed and that the lock is engaged. If STARTING AND you discover during travel that the lock is not DRIVING fully engaged, stop immediately and close WARNING WARNING LIGHTS the bonnet in the correct manner. AND MESSAGES
After travelling for a few kilometres, IN AN EMERGENCY check to ensure that the fixing screws for the attachments are well tightened. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WARNING INDEX Never exceed the maximum permitted loads (see chapter "Technical specifications").
fig. 105 F0Y0131 103 WARNING HEADLIGHTS GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR Evenly distribute the load and take into LIGHT BEAM DIRECTION
SAFETY account, when driving, the increased responsiveness of the car to side wind. The correct alignment of the headlights is important
STARTING AND for the comfort and safety of not only the driver DRIVING but all other road users. This is also covered by
WARNING LIGHTS a specific rule of the highway code. AND MESSAGES Fully comply with the regulations in force The headlights must be correctly aligned to concerning maximum clearance. IN AN EMERGENCY guarantee the best visibility conditions for all drivers while travelling with headlights on. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the headlights
TECHNICAL checked and adjusted, if necessary. SPECIFICATIONS Check beam alignment every time the load or its INDEX distribution changes.
HEADLAMP ALIGNMENT CORRECTOR This device works with the ignition key in the MAR position and the dipped headlights on.
104 Headlight alignment adjustment FOG LIGHT ALIGNMENT
(for versions/markets, where provided) GETTING TO Press the or buttons to adjustfig. 106. The KNOW YOUR CAR adjustment position is shown on the display. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the headlights Position 0 - one or two persons on the front seats checked and adjusted, if necessary. SAFETY
STARTING AND Position1-4persons DRIVING Position2-4persons + load in the luggage WARNING LIGHTS compartment AND MESSAGES
Position 3 - driver + maximum admissible load IN AN EMERGENCY stowed only in the luggage compartment SERVICING AND IMPORTANT Check the headlight alignment each MAINTENANCE time the weight of the load transported changes. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 106 F0Y0046 105 ADJUSTINGTHE HEADLIGHTS WHEN ABS
GETTINGABROAD TO KNOW YOUR CAR ABS is an integral part of the braking system which Dipped headlights are adjusted for driving in the prevents, whatever the road conditions and force SAFETYcountry where the vehicle was originally purchased. applied to the brake pedal, one or more wheels from When travelling in countries with opposite driving STARTING AND locking and consequently slipping, thus ensuring DRIVINGdirection, to avoid dazzling the drivers on the other that the car remains under control even during side of the road, you need to cover areas of the WARNING LIGHTS emergency braking. AND MESSAGESheadlight according to the Highway Code of the country you are travelling in: fig. 107 (front right The EBD system (Electronic Braking Force IN AN EMERGENCYheadlight), fig. 108 (front left headlight). Distribution) completes the system allowing the brake force to be distributed between the front and SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE rear wheels.
TECHNICAL IMPORTANT To obtain the maximum efficiency of SPECIFICATIONS the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 500 INDEX km is needed: during this period it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.
fig. 107 F0Y0187 fig. 108 F0Y0188 106 WARNING MSR SYSTEM (Motor Schleppmoment Regelung) GETTING TO The ABS gets the most from the KNOW YOUR CAR This system is an integral part of the ABS, that available grip, but it cannot improve it; SAFETY you should therefore take every care when intervenes, if there is sudden downshifting, restoring torque to the engine, thereby preventing excessive driving on slippery surfaces and not take STARTING AND unnecessary risks. drive at the drive wheels which, especially in poor DRIVING grip conditions, could lead to a loss in stability of the WARNING LIGHTS car. AND MESSAGES
SYSTEM INTERVENTION IN AN EMERGENCY
The driver can feel that the ABS system has come SERVICING AND into action because the brake pedal pulsates slightly MAINTENANCE and the system gets noisier: it means that the speed TECHNICAL should be altered to suit the type of road surface. SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX WARNING When the ABS cuts in and you feel the brake pedal pulsating, do not raise your foot, but keep it pressed; in doing so you will stop in the shortest amount of space possible depending on the current road conditions.
WARNING If the ABS system intervenes, this indicates that the traction of the tyres on the road is nearing its limit.You must slow down to a speed compatible with the available traction.
107 ESC SYSTEM HILL HOLDER SYSTEM GETTING(Electronic TO Stability Control) KNOW YOUR CAR This system is an integral part of the ESC system and facilitates starting on slopes. SAFETYThis is an electronic system that controls car stability in the event of tyre grip loss, helping maintain It is activated automatically in the following instances: STARTING AND ❒ DRIVINGdirectional control. uphill: car stationary on a road with a gradient The system is capable of recognising potentially higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed and WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESdangerous situations in terms of the stability and gearbox in neutral or gear (other than reverse) intervenes automatically on the brakes in a engaged; IN AN EMERGENCYdifferentiated manner for the four wheels in order to ❒ downhill: car stationary on a road with a gradient
SERVICINGprovide AND a stabilising torque. higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed and MAINTENANCEThe ESC system also includes the following reverse gear engaged. TECHNICALsubsystems: SPECIFICATIONS When setting off, the ESC system control unit ❒ Hill Holder maintains braking pressure on the wheels until the INDEX❒ torque required for starting is reach or, in any case, ASR for a maximum of 2 seconds so that the right foot ❒ HBA can be moved easily from the brake pedal to the ❒ DST accelerator pedal. ❒ ERM When 2 seconds have elapsed, without any departure having taken place, the system is SYSTEM INTERVENTION automatically deactivated, gradually releasing the braking pressure. During this release stage, a typical It is signalled by the flashing of the ESC warning light mechanical brake release noise can be heard, on the instrument panel, to inform the driver that indicating that the car is about to move. the car is in critical stability and grip conditions. IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system is not a parking SYSTEM ACTIVATION brake; therefore, never leave the vehicle without having engaged the handbrake, turned the engine off The ESC system switches on automatically when the and engaged the 1st gear, so that the vehicle is parked engine is started and cannot be switched off. in safe conditions (for further information read paragraph "When parked" in the chapter "Starting and driving").
108 ASR SYSTEM (AntiSlip Regulation) conditions, slipping of the drive wheels when moving
off makes it possible to obtain better traction. GETTING TO It is an integral part of the ESC system. It KNOW YOUR CAR automatically operates in the event of one or both drive wheels slipping, loss of grip on wet roads WARNING SAFETY (aquaplaning) and acceleration on slippery, snowy or For the ESC and ASR systems to operate STARTING AND icy roads, etc… DRIVING correctly, all four tyres must, above all, Depending on the slipping conditions, two different be the prescribed brand and type, they must be WARNING LIGHTS control systems are activated: in excellent condition and feature the AND MESSAGES ❒ if the slipping involves both drive wheels, the ASR prescribed type and size. IN AN EMERGENCY intervenes reducing the power transmitted by the SERVICING AND engine; MAINTENANCE ❒ if the slipping only involves one of the drive WARNING TECHNICAL wheels, it intervenes automatically braking the SPECIFICATIONS wheel that is slipping. The ESC functions even when the space-saver wheel is being used.Always INDEX Activation/deactivation of the ASR system remember that the space-saver wheel, being The ASR system activates automatically each time smaller than the original wheel, provides less the engine is started. grip. Whilst driving, the ASR can be deactivated and subsequently activated again by pressing the ASR OFF button fig. 109. On some versions, the intervention of the system is indicated by a message shown on the display. When the system is deactivated, the LED on the button ASR OFF turns on and, on some versions, a message appears on the display. If the ASR is disengaged during driving, this is automatically reactivated at the following car starting. When travelling on snowy roads with snow chains, it may be helpful to turn the ASR off: in fact, in these
fig. 109 F0Y0164 109 WARNING WARNING GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR Do not take unnecessary risks, even if The DST is a driving aid system and does
SAFETY your vehicle is fitted with the ESC and not replace the driver's actions while ASR systems.Your driving style must always be driving the car. STARTING ANDsuited to the road conditions, visibility and DRIVINGtraffic.The driver is always responsible for road WARNING LIGHTSsafety. AND MESSAGES ERM ELECTRONIC ROLLOVER MITIGATION SYSTEM IN AN EMERGENCY (Electronic Rollover Mitigation) HBA SYSTEM SERVICING AND The system monitors the raising tendency of the MAINTENANCEThe system, which cannot be turned off, recognises wheels from the ground if the driver performs
TECHNICALemergency braking (on the basis of the brake pedal extreme manoeuvres like quick steering to avoid an SPECIFICATIONSoperating speed) and speeds up the response of obstacle, especially in poor road conditions. the braking system. If the ESC system is faulty, the INDEX If such conditions occur the system intervenes on system is disabled. brakes and engine power to reduce the possibility for the wheels to be raised from the ground. DST SYSTEM (Dynamic SteeringTorque) It is not possible to avoid tendency to roll over if the phenomenon is due to reasons such as driving on The DST function uses the integration of the ESC high side gradients, collision with objects or other system with the electric power steering to increase vehicles. the safety level of the whole car. In critical situations (understeering, oversteering, WARNING braking with different grip conditions), through the DST function the ESC system controls the steering The performance of a car with ERM to implement an additional torque contribution must never be tested in imprudent on the steering wheel, to suggest the most correct or dangerous ways, with the possibility of manoeuvre to the driver. putting the safety of the driver or other people at risk. The coordinated action of brakes and steering increases the safety and car control feeling.
110 START&STOP SYSTEM MANUAL SYSTEM ACTIVATION/
DEACTIVATION GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR INTRODUCTION To activate/deactivate the system manually, press the The Start&Stop system automatically stops the fig. 110 button (located on the dashboard control SAFETY trim). engine each time the car is stationary and starts it STARTING AND again when the driver wants to move off. DRIVING Start&Stop system activation WARNING LIGHTS In this way, the efficiency of the car is increased, by AND MESSAGES reducing consumption, emissions of harmful gases Start&Stop system activation is signalled by a and noise pollution. message on the display. In this condition, the LED on IN AN EMERGENCY the button is off. SERVICING AND OPERATING MODES MAINTENANCE Start&Stop system deactivation TECHNICAL Engine stopping mode Versions with multifunction display: a message appears SPECIFICATIONS
With the car stopped, the engine stops with gearbox on the display when the Start&Stop system is INDEX in neutral and clutch pedal released. deactivated. Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display: the Note The engine can only be stopped automatically symbol and a dedicated message appear on the after exceeding a speed of about 10 km/h, to prevent display when the Start&Stop system is deactivated. the engine from being repeatedly stopped when driving at walking pace. The symbol appears on the display when the engine stops.
Restarting the engine Press the clutch pedal to restart the engine.
fig. 110 F0Y0040 111 The LED above the button is on when the system ENGINE RESTARTING CONDITIONS
GETTINGisTO deactivated. KNOW YOUR CAR For reasons of comfort, limiting harmful emissions and safety purposes, the power unit can restart ENGINE STOPPING FAILURE CONDITIONS SAFETY automatically without any action on behalf of the When the system is operating, due to comfort, driver if certain conditions are met, including: STARTING AND DRIVINGemission control and safety reasons, the engine does ❒ battery not sufficiently charged; not stop in some conditions, among which: WARNING LIGHTS ❒ AND MESSAGES reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. if the brake ❒ engine still cold; pedal is pressed repeatedly); IN AN EMERGENCY❒ especially cold outside temperature; ❒ car moving (e.g. when driving on roads with a ❒ SERVICING ANDbattery not sufficiently charged; gradient); MAINTENANCE ❒ particulate filter regeneration (DPF) in progress ❒ engine stopping by Start&Stop system for over 3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS(diesel engines only); minutes; ❒ driver's door not shut; ❒ for versions equipped with automatic climate INDEX ❒ driver's seat belt not fastened; control (for versions/markets, where provided), if an adequate level of thermal comfort has not ❒ reverse gear engaged (for example, for parking been reached or with MAX-DEF mode active. manoeuvres); ❒ With gear engaged, automatic engine restarting is for versions equipped with automatic climate possible only by fully depressing the clutch pedal. The control (for versions/markets, where provided), if operation is signalled to the driver with a message an adequate level of thermal comfort has not shown on the display. been reached or with MAX-DEF mode active; ❒ during the first period of use, to initialise the Notes system. If the clutch is not pressed, about 3 minutes after the engine stops, the engine can be restarted only using the ignition key. If climate comfort is to be favoured, the Start&Stop system can be disabled, for In cases of unwanted engine stop, due for example to a continuous operation of the climate the clutch pedal being released sharply with a gear control system. engaged, if the Start&Stop system is active, the engine can be restarted by fully depressing the clutch pedal or by placing the gear lever in neutral.
112 SAFETY FUNCTIONS In the event of a Start&Stop system failure, contact a
Fiat Dealership. GETTING TO When the engine is stopped by the Start&Stop KNOW YOUR CAR system, if the driver releases his/her seat belt and CAR INACTIVITY opens the driver's or passenger's door, the engine SAFETY can be restarted only using the ignition key. In the event of car inactivity (or if the battery is STARTING AND This condition is signalled to the driver with an replaced), special attention must be paid to the DRIVING disconnection of the battery electrical system. acoustic signal. WARNING LIGHTS Press button A fig. 111 to detach connector B from AND MESSAGES
"ENERGY SAVING" FUNCTION sensor C, which monitors battery status and is IN AN EMERGENCY (for versions/markets, where provided) located on the negative terminal of the battery itself. SERVICING AND If, following automatic engine restarting, the driver MAINTENANCE does not carry out any action on the car for over WARNING TECHNICAL 3 minutes, the Start&Stop system stops the engine SPECIFICATIONS once and for all, to prevent fuel consumption. If the battery needs to be replaced, always contact a Fiat Dealership. INDEX In these cases, the engine can only be restarted using Replace the battery with one of the same type the ignition key. (HEAVY DUTY) and with the same specifications. Note In any case, it is possible to keep the engine running by deactivating the Start&Stop system.
IRREGULAR OPERATION In the event of malfunction, the Start&Stop system is deactivated. Versions with multifunction display:a Start&Stop system failure is indicated by the switching on of the warning light on the instrument panel and a message on the display. Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display: The symbol and a dedicated message appear on the display when a failure in the
Start&Stop system is detected. fig. 111 F0Y0095 113 IMPORTANT After turning the ignition key to STOP, IMPORTANT
GETTINGwait TO at least 1 minute before disconnecting the KNOW YOURelectrical CAR supply to the battery. WARNING SAFETY JUMP STARTING Before opening the bonnet, make sure STARTING AND the engine is off and the ignition key DRIVINGWhen jump starting, never connect the negative lead is in the STOP position.Always refer to the (–) of the auxiliary battery to the negative pole A WARNING LIGHTS plate fig. 113 inside the bonnet.We recommend AND MESSAGESfig. 112 of the car battery, but rather to an that you remove the key from the ignition if engine/gearbox earth point. IN AN EMERGENCY other people remain in the vehicle. Exit from the car only after having removed the ignition SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE key or having rotated it to the STOP position. During refuelling, make sure that the engine TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS is off and that the ignition key is in the STOP position. INDEX
fig. 112 F0Y0141 fig. 113 F0Y0094 114 CITY BRAKE CONTROL - Versions equipped with manual gearbox:atthe end of the automatic braking the engine may stall "Collision Mitigation" SYSTEM GETTING TO (for versions/markets, where provided) and turn off, unless the driver presses the clutch KNOW YOUR CAR pedal. SAFETY This is a driving assistance system that can detect the Versions equipped with automatic presence of cars before the vehicle at a close STARTING AND transmission (for versions/markets, where DRIVING distance and, in case of imminent collision, provided): at the end of braking the last gear stored intervenes automatically braking the car to prevent WARNING LIGHTS remains engaged. AND MESSAGES the impact or lower its effects. The system only works if: IMPORTANT Both on versions equipped with IN AN EMERGENCY manual gearbox and on those with automatic ❒ the ignition key is in MAR-ON, SERVICING AND transmission (for versions/markets, where provided), MAINTENANCE ❒ the car speed is between 5 and 30 km/h; after the car is stopped the brake calipers may be TECHNICAL ❒ the front seat belts are fastened. stuck for about 2 seconds for safety reasons. Make SPECIFICATIONS sure you press the brake pedal if the car moves The system can be deactivated (and then reactivated) slightly forwards. INDEX with the display setup menu (see paragraph “Menu items” in this chapter). IMPORTANT The system is only active with a car The system activates if there is risk of imminent speed between 5 and 30 km/h. collision and the driver does not press the brake pedal promptly. IMPORTANT The system does NOT activate engaging the reverse. The system does NOT activate Versions equipped with Start&Stop system:at if the front seat belts are not fastened. the end of the automatic braking, the Start&Stop system will activate as described in paragraph "Start&Stop system" of this chapter.
115 LASER SENSOR WARNING GETTINGThe TO system includes a laser sensor, located in the KNOW YOUR CAR If the driver depresses the brake pedal upper part of the windscreen fig. 114. SAFETY fully or carries out a fast steering during system operation, the automatic braking IMPORTANT STARTING AND function may stop (e.g. to allow a possible DRIVING manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle). WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES WARNING The system is an aid for the driver who IN AN EMERGENCY must never reduce attention while The laser sensor may have limited or SERVICING ANDdriving.The responsibility always rests with the MAINTENANCEdriver, who must take into account the traffic absent operation due to weather conditions such as: heavy rain, hail, thick TECHNICALconditions for driving in complete safety.The SPECIFICATIONSdriver must always maintain a safe distance fog, heavy snow, formation of ice layers on the windscreen. INDEXfrom the vehicle in front.
Sensor operation may also be compromised by the presence of dust, condensation, dirt or ice on the windscreen, by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are driving not aligned with you car, vehicle driving in a transverse or opposite way on the same lane, bend with a small radius of curvature), by road surface conditions and by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving). Make sure the windscreen is always clean. Use specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching the windscreen.The sensor operation may also be limited or absent in some driving, traffic and road surface conditions.
fig. 114 F0Y0200 116 Projecting loads on the roof of the car Do not cover the operating range of the GETTING TO may interfere with the correct operation sensor with stickers or other objects. KNOW YOUR CAR of the sensor. Before starting make sure Also pay attention to other objects on the the load is correctly positioned, in order not to bonnet (e.g. a layer of snow) and make sure they SAFETY cover the sensor operating range. do not interfere with the light emitted by the STARTING AND laser. DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES If the windscreen must be replaced due to WARNING scratches, chipping or breakage, contact IN AN EMERGENCY exclusively a Fiat Dealership. Do not The laser beam is not visible at the SERVICING AND replace the windscreen on your own, risk of naked eye. Do not look directly, or with MAINTENANCE malfunction! It is advisable to replace the optical instruments (e.g. lenses), at the laser TECHNICAL windscreen if it is damaged in the laser sensor beam from a distance lower than 10 cm: this SPECIFICATIONS area. may cause damage to the sight.The laser beam is also present when the key is at MAR-ON INDEX but its operation is off, not available or manually deactivated with the display Setup Do not tamper nor operate on the laser Menu (see paragraph “Menu items” in this sensor. Do not close the openings in the chapter). aesthetic cover located under the interior rear view mirror. In the event of a sensor failure, contact a Fiat Dealership. WARNING IMPORTANT If you are driving on roads close to The system intervenes on vehicles trees with protruding branches it is advisable to travelling in the same lane. Small sized deactivate the system to prevent the branches at the vehicles (e.g. bicycles or motorbikes) or people, height of the bonnet or the windscreen from animals and things (e.g. pushchairs) and more in interfering with the system. general all those obstacles with a low reflection of the light emitted by the laser (e.g. vehicles soiled with mud) are not taken into consideration.
117 EOBD SYSTEM If a trailer or a car is towed the system GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR must be deactivated with the display The EOBD system (European On Board Diagnosis) Setup Menu (see paragraph "Menu carries out a continuous diagnosis of the SAFETYitems" in this chapter). components of the car related to emissions. It also STARTING AND alerts the driver, by turning on warning light on DRIVING the instrument panel (together with a message WARNING WARNING LIGHTS on the display on some versions), when these AND MESSAGES If the car must be placed on a roller components are no longer in peak condition (see
IN AN EMERGENCY bench (at a speed within 5 and 30 km/h) section “Warning lights and messages”). for maintenance interventions or if it is washed The aim of the EOBD system (European On Board SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEin an automatic roller washing tunnel with an Diagnosis) is to: obstacle in the front part (e.g. another car, a TECHNICAL ❒ monitor the system efficiency; SPECIFICATIONSwall or another obstacle), the system may detect its presence and activate. In this case the ❒ indicate an increase in emissions; INDEXsystem must be deactivated with the display ❒ indicate the need to replace damaged components. setup menu (see paragraph “Menu items” in this chapter). The system also has a diagnosis connector that can be interfaced to suitable instruments, to read the error codes stored in the control unit together with a series of specific parameters for engine operation and diagnosis. IMPORTANT After eliminating the failure, to check the system completely, Fiat Dealerships run a bench test and, if necessary, road tests which may also call for a long journey.
118 DUALDRIVE ELECTRIC POWER When the CITY function is on, the steering wheel effort is lighter, parking operations are easier: STEERING GETTING TO therefore this function is particularly useful for KNOW YOUR CAR driving in city centres. This only operates with the key turned to MAR and SAFETY the engine started. The steering allows the force required at the steering wheel to be adjusted to suit STARTING AND WARNING DRIVING driving conditions. It is absolutely forbidden to carry out WARNING LIGHTS IMPORTANT When turning the ignition key quickly, any after-market operation involving AND MESSAGES full power steering functionality can be achieved after steering system or steering column IN AN EMERGENCY a few seconds. modifications (e.g.: installation of anti-theft SERVICING AND device) that could badly affect performance and MAINTENANCE CITY FUNCTION ACTIVATION/ safety, invalidate warranty and also result in TECHNICAL DEACTIVATION non-compliance of the car with type approval SPECIFICATIONS requirements. Press the CITY button fig. 115 to activate/deactivate INDEX the function. Activation of this function is signalled by the appearance of the word CITY (versions with multifunction display) or activation of the CITY IMPORTANT During parking manoeuvres requiring a warning light on the instrument panel (versions lot of steering, the steering may become harder; with reconfigurable multifunction display). this is normal and is due to the intervention of the system to protect the electric steering motor from overheating. No repair intervention is needed in this case. When the car is used again, the power steering will work normally again.
fig. 115 F0Y0036 119 WARNING RADIO SETUP SYSTEM GETTING TO (for versions/markets, where provided) KNOW YOUR CAR Before performing any maintenance The car may be equipped with a dual storage SAFETY operations, always turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition to lock compartment fig. 116 on the dashboard. . STARTING ANDthe steering column (especially when the car The radio setup system is composed of: DRIVING wheels are not touching the ground). If this ❒ radio supply leads; WARNING LIGHTSis not possible (for example if the key needs to AND MESSAGESbe turned to MAR-ON or the engine must be ❒ no. 2 front tweeters 38 mm, located on the door handle; IN AN EMERGENCYrunning), remove the main fuse that protects the electric power steering. ❒ no. 2 mid-woofers 165 mm, located on the door SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE panel; ❒ TECHNICAL no. 2 full-range speakers 165 mm, located on SPECIFICATIONS the door panel;
INDEX ❒ radio housing; ❒ aerial (on car roof).
120 The radio can be installed in place of compartment A PREPARATION TO INSTALL A fig. 116, which snaps into place and can be removed PORTABLE NAVIGATION SYSTEM GETTING TO by pulling it outwards. Having done this, the cables KNOW YOUR CAR provided are accessible. Install the portable navigation system by fitting the SAFETY specific mounting bracket in the housing shown in fig. 117. STARTING AND For connection to the radio system set-up, DRIVING
contact a Fiat Dealership to prevent any WARNING LIGHTS problem that could impair car safety. AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 116 F0Y0139 fig. 117 F0Y0132 121 ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE INSTALLING ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC DEVICES GETTINGOWNER TO KNOW YOUR CAR If after buying the car, you decide to install electrical Electrical and electronic devices installed after buying SAFETYaccessories that require a permanent electric supply the car in the context of after-sales service must carry the label (see fig. 118): STARTING(radio, AND satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories DRIVINGthat in any case burden the electric supply, contact Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. authorises the
WARNING LIGHTSa Fiat Dealership, whose qualified personnel, besides installation of transceiver devices on condition that AND MESSAGESsuggesting the most suitable devices from such installations are carried out in a workmanlike
IN AN EMERGENCYLineaccessori Fiat, will also evaluate the overall fashion, following the manufacturer’s instructions, at electric consumption, checking whether the car's a specialised centre. SERVICINGelectrical AND system is able to withstand the load MAINTENANCErequired, or whether it needs to be integrated with a IMPORTANT Traffic police may not allow the car on TECHNICALmore powerful battery. the road if devices have been installed which modify SPECIFICATIONS the features of the car. This may also cause
INDEX invalidation of warranty in relation to faults caused WARNING by the change either directly or indirectly related Take care when fitting additional to it. spoilers, alloy wheels or non-standard Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. shall not be liable for wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of damage caused by the installation of accessories the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp, either not supplied or recommended by Fiat Group repeated braking or on long descents. Make Automobiles S.p.A. and/or not installed in sure that nothing obstructs the pedal stroke compliance with the provided instructions. (mats, etc.)
fig. 118 DISPOSITIVI-ELETTRONICI 122 RADIOTRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE PARKING SENSORS
PHONES (for versions/markets, where provided) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, They are located in the rear bumper fig. 119 and CB radios etc.) cannot be used inside the car unless their function is to detect the presence of any SAFETY a separate aerial is mounted externally. obstacles near the rear part of the car; they STARTING AND consequently inform the driver, through an DRIVING IMPORTANT The use of these devices inside the intermittent acoustic signal. WARNING LIGHTS passenger compartment (without an external aerial) AND MESSAGES may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION This could compromise the safety of the car in IN AN EMERGENCY addition to constituting a potential hazard for The sensors are automatically activated when reverse SERVICING AND passengers' health. gear is engaged. As the obstacle behind the vehicle MAINTENANCE gets closer to the car, the acoustic signal becomes In addition, transmission and reception of these TECHNICAL devices may be negatively affected by the shielding more frequent. SPECIFICATIONS effect of the car body. As far as the use of INDEX EC-approved mobile phones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS), follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone manufacturer.
fig. 119 F0Y0140 123 ACOUSTIC SIGNAL FAULT INDICATION
GETTING TO KNOW YOURWhen CAR reverse gear is engaged and there is an Any parking sensor faults will be indicated when obstacle behind the vehicle, an acoustic signal is reverse is engaged by the warning light on the SAFETYemitted which varies according to the distance of the instrument panel together with the message in the bumper from the obstacle. multifunction display (for versions/markets, where STARTING AND DRIVINGThe frequency of the acoustic signal: provided) (see “Warning lights and messages” section). WARNING LIGHTS❒ AND MESSAGESincreases as the distance between car and obstacle decreases, culminating in a continuous acoustic OPERATIONWITHTRAILER IN AN EMERGENCYsignal, when the distance is less than approximately 30 cm; Sensor operation is deactivated automatically when SERVICING AND the trailer's electric cable plug is fitted into the MAINTENANCE❒ decreases if the distance from the obstacle car's tow hook socket. TECHNICALincreases, until the signal ceases entirely; SPECIFICATIONS ❒ remains constant if the distance between car and The sensors are automatically reactivated when the trailer's cable plug is removed. INDEXobstacle remains unchanged; if this situation concerns the side sensors, the signal will stop after approximately 3 seconds to avoid, for example, For correct operation, sensors must always indications in the event of manoeuvres along be clean from mud, dirt, snow or ice. Be a wall. careful not to scratch or damage the If several obstacles are detected by the sensors, only sensors while cleaning them.Avoid using dry, the nearest one is considered. rough or hard cloths.The sensors should be washed using clean water with the addition of car shampoo if necessary.When using special washing equipment such as high pressure jets or steam cleaning, clean the sensors very quickly keeping the jet more than 10 cm away.Also, do not apply stickers to the sensors.
124 GENERAL WARNINGS WARNING When parking, take the utmost care over obstacles GETTING TO that may be above or below the sensors. The driver is always responsible for KNOW YOUR CAR parking manoeuvres however.When SAFETY Under certain circumstances, objects close to the making these manoeuvres, always make sure vehicle are not detected by the system and could that no people (especially children) or animals STARTING AND therefore cause damage to the car or be damaged are present in your manoeuvring area.The DRIVING themselves. parking sensors are an aid for the driver, but WARNING LIGHTS Some conditions may influence the performance of must never allow their attention to lapse during AND MESSAGES the parking sensors: potentially dangerous manoeuvres, even those IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ the presence of ice, snow, mud or think paint on executed at low speeds. SERVICING AND the sensor surface may cause reduced sensitivity MAINTENANCE of the sensor itself and therefore reduce the TECHNICAL system performance. SPECIFICATIONS ❒ mechanical interference (e.g. washing the car, rain, INDEX strong wind, hail) may cause the sensor to detect a non-existent obstacle ("echo interference"); ❒ the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the car could alter the signals sent by the sensor; ❒ the variation in sensor position, caused by variation in ride (due to suspension component wear), changing tyres, overloaded car, or tuning that lowers the car, for example, may affect parking sensor system performance.
125 REFUELLING THE CAR If refuelling with diesel fuel whose specifications are
GETTING TO not suitable for the usage temperature, it is advisable KNOW YOURBefore CAR refuelling, make sure that the fuel type is to mix TUTELA DIESEL ART additive in the correct. Also stop the engine before refuelling. proportions shown on the container with the diesel SAFETY fuel. Pour the additive into the tank before the STARTINGPETROL AND ENGINES diesel fuel. DRIVING Use unleaded petrol only, with octane number When using or parking the car for a long time in the WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES(RON) no lower than 95. mountains or cold areas, it is advisable to refuel using locally available diesel. In this case, it is also IN AN EMERGENCYIMPORTANT An inefficient catalytic converter leads advisable to keep the tank over 50% full. to harmful exhaust emissions, thus contributing to SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEair pollution. For diesel engines, use only diesel fuel for TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSIMPORTANT Never use leaded petrol, even in small motor vehicles in accordance with EN590 amounts or in an emergency, as this would damage European specifications.The use of other INDEXthe catalytic converter beyond repair. products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the DIESEL ENGINES warranty, depending on the damage caused. If you accidentally refuel with another type of Operation at low temperatures fuel, do not start the engine, and drain the fuel tank. If the engine has been run, even for only If the outside temperature is very low, diesel a very short time, you will need to have the entire thickens due to the formation of paraffin clots with fuel system emptied in addition to the tank. consequent defective operation of the fuel supply system. REFUELLING CAPACITY In order to avoid these problems, different types of diesel fuel are distributed according to the season: To fill the tank completely, top up twice after the summer type, winter type and arctic type pump switches off. (cold/mountain areas). Further top-ups could cause faults in the fuel supply system.
126 REFUELLING PROCEDURE
GETTING TO "Smart Fuel" is a device at the opening for the fuel KNOW YOUR CAR tank which opens and recloses automatically when the fuel delivery gun is introduced/removed. SAFETY
"Smart Fuel" is provided with an inhibitor which STARTING AND prevents refuelling with incorrect fuel. DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS The refuelling procedure described below is AND MESSAGES illustrated on label B fig. 120, which is applied inside the fuel flap. The label also indicates the fuel type IN AN EMERGENCY (UNLEADED FUEL=petrol, DIESEL=diesel fuel). SERVICING AND To refuel proceed as follows: MAINTENANCE
❒ TECHNICAL open the flap A fig. 120 pulling it outwards; SPECIFICATIONS ❒ introduce the dispenser in the filler and refuel; INDEX ❒ at the end of refuelling, before removing the dispenser, wait for at least 10 in order for the fuel to flow inside the tank; ❒ then remove the dispenser from the filler and close the flap A. Flap A fig. 120 is provided with a dust cowl C which prevents deposits of impurities and dust at the end of the filler when the flap is closed.
fig. 120 F0Y0229 127 Emergency refuelling ❒ after refuelling, remove the adapter and close the
GETTING TO flap; KNOW YOURIf CAR there is no fuel in the car or the supply circuit is completely empty, proceed as follows to reintroduce ❒ reintroduce the adapter in the box and put this SAFETYfuel to the tank: back in the luggage compartment. ❒ STARTING ANDopen the luggage compartment and take adapter A DRIVINGlocated in the tool box (versions equipped with
WARNING LIGHTSspace-saver wheel - for versions/markets, where AND MESSAGESprovided) fig. 121 or in the Fix&Go Automatic
IN AN EMERGENCYcontainer (versions equipped with Fix&Go Automatic) fig. 122; SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE❒ open the flap A fig. 120 pulling it outwards; ❒ TECHNICALinsert the adapter in the filler as shown in fig. 123 SPECIFICATIONSand refuel;
INDEX
fig. 122 F0Y0232
fig. 121 F0Y0230 fig. 123 F0Y0231 128 IMPORTANT PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
GETTING TO The following devices are used for reducing petrol KNOW YOUR CAR WARNING fuel engine emissions: catalytic converter, oxygen SAFETY Do not apply any object/plug to the end sensors and evaporation control system of the filler which is not provided for Do not let the engine run, even for a test, with one STARTING AND the car.The use of non-compliant objects/plugs or more spark plugs disconnected. DRIVING could cause a pressure increase inside the WARNING LIGHTS The following devices are used for reducing diesel AND MESSAGES tank, resulting in dangerous situations. fuel engine emissions: oxidising catalytic converter, exhaust gas recirculation system (EGR) and IN AN EMERGENCY particulate filter (DPF). SERVICING AND WARNING MAINTENANCE
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER TECHNICAL Do not bring naked flames or lit (for versions/markets, where provided) SPECIFICATIONS cigarettes near to the fuel filler: fire risk. Keep your face away from the fuel filler to The Diesel Particulate Filter is a mechanical filter, INDEX prevent breathing in harmful vapours. integral with the exhaust system, that physically traps particulates present in the exhaust gases of Diesel engines. IMPORTANT If the filler compartment is washed The diesel particulate filter is needed to eliminate with a high pressure jet, keep it at a distance of almost all particulates in compliance with at least 20 cm. current / future legislation. During normal use of the vehicle, the engine control WARNING unit records a set of data (e.g. travel time, type of route, temperatures, etc.) and it will then calculate Do not use a mobile phone near the how much particulate has been trapped by the filter. refuelling pump: risk of fire. Since this filter physically traps particulate, it should be regenerated (cleaned) at regular intervals by burning the carbon particles.
129 The regeneration procedure is controlled WARNING GETTINGautomatically TO by the engine management control unit KNOW YOURaccording CAR to the filter conditions and car use The catalytic converter and particulate conditions. SAFETY filter (DPF) reach very high During the regeneration there may be a limited temperatures during operation.Therefore, do STARTING AND not park the car on flammable materials (grass, DRIVINGincrease in the engine idle speed, fan activation, a limited increase in fumes and high temperatures at dry leaves, pine needles etc.) to avoid the risk WARNING LIGHTS of fire. AND MESSAGESthe exhaust. These are not faults; they do not impair normal car IN AN EMERGENCYperformance or damage the environment. If the
SERVICINGdedicated AND message is displayed, see contents of MAINTENANCE"Warning lights and messages" chapter.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
130 SAFETY
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SAFETY SEAT BELTS WARNING STARTING AND USINGTHE SEAT BELTS Never press button C fig. 124 when DRIVING
travelling. WARNING LIGHTS The seat belt should be worn keeping the torso AND MESSAGES straight and rested against the backrest. IN AN EMERGENCY To fasten the seat belts, hold the tongue A fig. 124 The retractor may lock when the car is parked on a and insert it into the buckle B, until it clicks into steep slope: this is normal. Furthermore, the SERVICING AND place. retractor mechanism locks the belt if it is pulled MAINTENANCE sharply or in the event of sudden braking, collisions TECHNICAL If the seat belt jams during removal, let it rewind for SPECIFICATIONS a short stretch, then pull it out again without jerking. or high-speed bends. To unfasten the seat belt, press button C. Guide The rear seat is fitted with inertial seat belts with INDEX the seat belt while it is rewinding, to prevent it from three anchor points and a retractor. Wear the rear twisting. Through the retractor, the belt seat belts as shown in fig. 125. automatically adapts to the body of the occupant wearing it, allowing freedom of movement.
fig. 124 F0Y0085 fig. 125 F0Y0086 131 WARNING S.B.R. SYSTEM (Seat Belt Reminder) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARRemember that in the event of a violent This system consists of a device which, in impact the rear seat passengers not conjunction with the fig. 126 warning light coming SAFETYwearing seat belts are exposed to a very serious on (initially in fixed mode with continuous acoustic signal and then in flashing mode with intermittent STARTINGrisk AND and also represent a serious danger for DRIVINGthe front seat occupants. acoustic signal), warns the driver and front passenger WARNING LIGHTS that their seat belts have not been fastened. AND MESSAGES For long-term deactivation of the SBR system, IN AN EMERGENCYIMPORTANT When putting the back seats back to contact a Fiat Dealership. The SBR system can be their normal position, make sure the seat belts reactivated at any time through the display Setup SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEare positioned so they are ready to use. Menu (see “Knowing your car” section).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 126 F0Y0116 132 DRIVER PRETENSIONERS GETTING TO KNOW If the driver is the only occupant and the seat belt is YOUR CAR not fastened, when 20 km/h is exceeded or when The car is equipped with front seat belts pretensioners, that reduce slack in the belts in the travelling at a speed from 10 to 20 km/h for longer SAFETY than 5 seconds, an acoustic signal sequence will event of a severe frontal impact. This guarantees the perfect adherence of the seat belts to the occupants' STARTING AND be started (front seats) consisting of a tone for 6 DRIVING seconds followed by a 90 second beep. The bodies before the restraining action begins. WARNING LIGHTS warning light will flash. It is evident that the pretensioners have been AND MESSAGES The warning light will stay on constantly at the end activated when the belt withdraws toward the of the cycle until the engine is stopped. The acoustic retractor. IN AN EMERGENCY signal will be interrupted immediately when the This car is also equipped with a second pretensioner SERVICING AND driver's seat belt is fastened and the warning light will (in the kick plate area). Its activation is signalled by MAINTENANCE switch off. the shortening of the metal cable. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS The reminder cycle (acoustic and visual) will be A slight discharge of smoke may be produced during repeated as described above if the seat belt is the activation of the pretensioner which is not INDEX unfastened while travelling. harmful and does not involve any fire hazard.
PASSENGER IMPORTANT To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioner, wear A similar solution applies for the passenger, but the the seat belt tight to the chest and pelvis. indication is interrupted also when the passenger leaves the car. The pretensioner does not require any maintenance or lubrication: any changes to its original conditions If both the front seat belts are unfastened with car in will invalidate its efficiency. If, due to unusual natural motion and within a few seconds one from the events (floods, sea storms, etc.), the device has other, the acoustic signal and activation of the been affected by water and mud, it must be replaced. warning light will refer to the most recent event.
133 WARNING Seat belts must also be worn by pregnant women: GETTING TO KNOW the risk of injury in the event of an accident is greatly YOUR CARThe pretensioner may be used only reduced for them and the unborn child if they are once. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have wearing a seat belt. SAFETY it replaced after it has been deployed. Pregnant women must position the lower part of the STARTINGPretensioner AND validity is indicated on the label DRIVING belt very low down so that it passes over the pelvis located on the door contour sheet metal. and under the abdomen (see fig. 127). The best WARNINGPretensioners LIGHTS should be replaced at a Fiat AND MESSAGES way to protect the unborn child is to protect the Dealership as this date approaches. mother. When a safety belt is worn correctly, it IN AN EMERGENCY is more likely that the unborn child will not be injured in an accident. For pregnant women, as for SERVICING ANDOperations which lead to knocks, MAINTENANCEvibrations or localised heating (over 100°C anyone, it is important to wear the seat belts correctly. TECHNICALfor a maximum of 6 hours) in the area SPECIFICATIONSaround the pretensioner may cause damage or
triggerINDEX it erroneously.This device is not affected by vibrations caused by irregularities of the road surface or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc. Contact a Fiat Dealership for any assistance.
LOAD LIMITERS To increase occupant safety, the retractors contain a load limiter to dose the force acting on the chest and shoulders during the belt restraining action in the case of frontal collisions.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING THE SEAT BELTS The driver is responsible for respecting, and ensuring that all the other occupants of the car also respect, the local laws in force in relation to the use of the seat belts. Always fasten the seat belts before setting
off. fig. 127 F0Y0283 134 WARNING Each seat belt must be used by only one person. Never travel with a child sitting on the passenger's GETTING TO KNOW For maximum safety, keep the back of lap and a single belt to protect them both fig. 129. YOUR CAR your seat upright, lean back into it In general, do not place any objects between the and make sure the seat belt fits closely across person and the belt. SAFETY your chest and pelvis.Always fasten the seat STARTING AND belts on both the front and the rear seats! DRIVING Travelling without wearing seat belts will WARNING LIGHTS increase the risk of serious injury and even AND MESSAGES death in the event of an accident. IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Removing or otherwise tampering with seat belt and pretensioner components INDEX is strictly prohibited.Any operations on these components must be performed by qualified and authorised technicians.Always contact a Fiat Dealership. fig. 128 F0Y0015
The belt must not be twisted. The upper part must pass over the shoulder and cross the chest diagonally. The lower part must adhere to the pelvis (as shown in fig. 128) rather than the abdomen of the occupant. Never use devices (clips, clamps, etc.) to hold the seat belt away from your body.
fig. 129 F0Y0016 135 ❒ WARNING prevent the retractors from getting wet: their GETTING TO KNOW correct operation is only guaranteed if water does YOUR CARIf the belt has been subjected to a high not get inside; level of stress, for example after an SAFETY ❒ replace the seat belt when it shows wear or cuts. accident, it must be completely replaced STARTINGtogether AND with the attachments, attachment DRIVINGfixing screws and the pretensioner. In fact, even WARNINGif LIGHTS the belt has no visible defects, it could have AND MESSAGESlost its resilience.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCESEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
TECHNICALFor keeping the seat belts in efficient conditions, SPECIFICATIONScarefully observe the following:
❒ alwaysINDEX use the seat belt with the strap well stretched and not twisted; make sure that it is free to run without obstructions; ❒ check seat belt operation as follows: attach the seat belt and pull it hard; ❒ replace the belt after an accident of a certain severity even if it does not appear to be damaged. Always replace the seat belt if the pretensioners were deployed; ❒ to clean the seat belts, wash by hand with water and neutral soap, rinse and leave to dry in the shade. Do not use strong detergents, bleach, colourants or any other substance which could damage the belt fibres;
136 CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY When over 1.50 m in height, from the point of view of restraint systems, children are considered as GETTING TO KNOW For optimal protection in the event of an impact, all adults and wear seat belts normally. YOUR CAR occupants must be seated and wearing adequate In Europe the characteristics of children restraint SAFETY restraint systems, including infants and other systems are ruled by the regulation ECE-R44, dividing children! STARTING AND them into five weight groups: DRIVING This prescription is compulsory in all EC countries Group Weight groups WARNING LIGHTS according to EC Directive 2003/20/EC. AND MESSAGES Group0 upto10kg Compared with an adult, a child's head is larger and heavier in proportion to his/her body and the child's Group 0+ up to 13 kg IN AN EMERGENCY muscular and bone structures are not fully SERVICING AND developed. Therefore, correct restraint systems Group 1 9-18 kg MAINTENANCE other than adult seat belts are necessary to reduce Group 2 15-25 kg TECHNICAL as much as possible the risk of injuries in case of SPECIFICATIONS Group 3 22-36 kg accident, braking or sudden manoeuvre. INDEX Children must be seated safely and comfortably. As All restraint devices must bear the type-approval far as the characteristics of the child restraint data along with the control mark on a label firmly systems used, you are advised to keep children in secured to the child restraint system which must rearward facing restraint systems for as long as never be removed. possible (at least until 3–4 years old); this is the most protected position in the event of an impact. The choice of the most suitable child restraint device depends on the weight of the child; there are various types of child restraint systems and you are advised always to choose the one that is most suitable for the child.
137 Lineaccessori Fiat offers child restraint systems for WARNING GETTING TOeach KNOW weight group. These devices are recommended YOURhaving CAR been specifically designed for Fiat cars. Should it be necessary to carry a child on the passenger side front seat in a SAFETY rearward facing child restraint system, the WARNING STARTING AND passenger side front airbag and side bag (for DRIVINGExtreme Hazard! Do not place rearward versions/markets, where provided) must be WARNING LIGHTSfacing infant seat in front of an active deactivated through the Setup menu. AND MESSAGESair bag. Deployment of the air bag in an Deactivation should be verified by checking IN AN EMERGENCYaccident could cause fatal injuries to the baby whether the warning light is switched on in regardless of the severity of the collision. It the instrument panel.The passenger seat must SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEis advisable to always carry children in a child also be positioned back as far as possible in restraint system on the rear seat, which is order to avoid the child restraint system from TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSthe most protected position in the event of a coming into contact with the dashboard. collision. INDEX WARNING Do not adjust the front or rear seat if a child is seated on it or on the dedicated child restraint system.
138 FITTING "UNIVERSAL" CHILD Children of weight from 9 to 18 kg may be carried in forward facing seat fig. 131. GETTING TO KNOW RESTRAINT SYSTEM YOUR CAR (with seat belts) SAFETY GROUP 0 and 0+ STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS WARNING AND MESSAGES The figure is indicative and for assembly purposes only. Fit the child restraint IN AN EMERGENCY system according to the instructions, which must SERVICING AND be included with this type of restraint system. MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Infants up to 13 kg must be carried with rearward INDEX facing seat of a type as shown in fig. 130 which, supporting the head, does not induce stress on the neck in the event of sudden decelerations. The rearward facing infant seat is restrained by the car seat belts, as shown in fig. 130 and it must fig. 130 F0Y0202 restrain the child in turn with its own belts.
GROUP 1
WARNING The figure is indicative and for assembly purposes only. Fit the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included with this type of restraint system.
fig. 131 F0Y0203 139 WARNING Children from 15 to 25 kg may use the car seat belts GETTING TO KNOW directly fig. 132. YOUR CAR Child restraint systems with Isofix In this case, the child restraint system is used to anchorages are available for safe fixing SAFETY position the child correctly with respect to the seat of the child restraint system to the seat without belts so that the diagonal belt section crosses the STARTINGusing AND the car seat belts. DRIVING child’s chest and not the neck, and the lower part is snug on the pelvis not the abdomen. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES GROUP 2 IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND WARNING MAINTENANCE The figure is indicative and for assembly TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSpurposes only. Fit the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must beINDEX included with this type of restraint system.
fig. 132 F0Y0204 140 GROUP 3 The fig. 133 shows an example of correct child
restraint system positioning on the rear seat. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR WARNING Children over 1.50 m in height can wear seat belts like adults. SAFETY The figure is indicative and for assembly purposes only. Fit the child restraint STARTING AND system according to the instructions, which must DRIVING be included with this type of restraint system. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY For children between 22 kg and 36 kg, there are SERVICING AND dedicated restraint systems that allow the seat belt MAINTENANCE to be worn correctly. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 133 F0Y0205 141 SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR UNIVERSAL CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM USE
GETTING TO KNOW YOURAccording CAR to the European Directive 2000/3/EC the suitability of each passenger seat position for the fixing of universal child restraint systems is shown in the following table: SAFETY Rear outer Group Weight groups Front passenger Rear central passenger STARTING AND passengers DRIVING Group 0, 0+ up to 13 kg UXU WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESGroup 1 9-18 kg UXU IN AN EMERGENCYGroup 2 15-25 kg UXU
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEGroup 3 22-36 kg UXU U= suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category, according to European Regulation EEC-R44 for the specified TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS"Groups". X= seat position not suitable for children in this weight category. INDEX
142 ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IMPORTANT The central rear seat (for versions/ markets, where provided) is not approved for any GETTING TO KNOW The car is equipped with ISOFIX anchorages, a new type of Isofix child restraint systems. YOUR CAR standard which makes fitting a child restraint system quick, simple and safe. SAFETY
STARTING AND Isofix systems can be fitted alongside Universal DRIVING child restraint systems to different seats of the same WARNING LIGHTS vehicle. AND MESSAGES
An example of a Universal Isofix child restraint IN AN EMERGENCY system for weight group 1 is shown in fig. 134.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WARNING TECHNICAL The figure is indicative and for assembly SPECIFICATIONS
purposes only. Secure the child restraint INDEX system according to the instructions, which must be included with this type of restraint system.
The other weight groups are covered by specific Isofix child restraint systems, which can be used only if specifically approved for this car (see list of cars provided with the child restraint system).
fig. 134 F0Y0201 143 INSTALLINGA UNIVERSAL ISOFIX CHILD For any further details on installation and/or use,
GETTING TORESTRAINT KNOW SYSTEM refer to the instructions provided with the child YOUR CAR restraint system. Attach the restraint system to the two metal SAFETYanchorages A fig. 135 located where the rear seat cushion meets the backrest, then fix the upper strap WARNING STARTING AND DRIVING(available together with the child restraint system) to the dedicated anchorage B fig. 136 located at the Fit the child restraint system when the WARNING LIGHTS car is stationary.The child restraint AND MESSAGESbottom behind the backrest. system is correctly fixed to the brackets when IN AN EMERGENCYRemember that when using a Universal Isofix child you hear the click. Follow the instructions restraint system, you can only use approved child for assembly, disassembly and positioning that SERVICINGrestraint AND systems with the marking ECE R44 (release MAINTENANCE the manufacturer must supply with the child R44/03 or superior) “Universal Isofix”. restraint system. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WARNING INDEXIf a Universal ISOFIX child restraint is not fixed to all anchorages, the child restraint system will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed.
fig. 135 F0Y0088 fig. 136 F0Y0089 144 SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM USE
GETTING TO KNOW The table below shows the various installation possibilities for Isofix child restraint systems on seats fitted YOUR CAR with Isofix anchorages in accordance with European standard ECE 16. SAFETY Weight group Child seat position Isofix size class Rear side passengers STARTING AND Group0–upto10kg Rearwardfacing E IL DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS Rearward facing E IL AND MESSAGES
Group0+–upto13kg Rearward facing D IL IN AN EMERGENCY Rearward facing C IL (*) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Rearward facing D IL TECHNICAL Rearward facing C IL (*) SPECIFICATIONS Group1–from9upto18 Forward facing B IUF INDEX kg Forward facing BI IUF Forward facing A IUF IL : suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems of the categories for "specific vehicles", "restricted", or "semiuniversal", approved for this type of vehicle. (*) : the Isofix child restraint system can be installed by adjusting the front seat. IUF: suitable for forward facing Isofix child restraint systems in the Universal category and type-approved for the use in the weight group.
145 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS FORYOUR 500L
GETTING TO KNOW YOURLineaccessori CAR Fiat includes and Fiat reccomendes a complete range of child restraint systems to be fixed to the vehicle through the three point adult seat belt or the Isofix anchorages. SAFETY Child restraint Type of child restraint Weight group Child restraint system installation system system STARTING AND DRIVING It must be fitted rearward facing with the WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES three-point seat belt only. If it is installed Britax Baby Safe plus on the front passenger seat, first remember to deactivate the airbag. IN AN EMERGENCY Approval number: E1 04301146 Adjust the rear seat as far forward as the SERVICING AND position of the front seat allows. MAINTENANCE Fiat order code: 71806415
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX It must be fitted rearward facing using car's adult seat belts and the reccomended Britax Baby Safe plus Isofix base. It must be fitted in the rear Approval number: outer seats. Group 0+ – from 0 E1 04301146 Adjust the rear seat as far forward as the to 13 kg Fiat order code: 71806415 position of the front seat allows.
++ Britax Baby Safe ISOFIX base Fiat order code: 71806416
146 Child restraint Type of child restraint Weight group Child restraint system installation system system GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR Fair G0/1S ISOFIX It must be fitted rearward facing using Approval number: the Isofix platform "L" type, specific for SAFETY E4 04443718 500L, the car's Isofix anchorages and the STARTING AND Fiat order code for Central recommended CRS head restraint shown DRIVING and Southern Europe: on the left. WARNING LIGHTS 71806647 It must be fitted in the rear outer seats. AND MESSAGES Fiat order code for Adjust the rear seat as far forward as the Northern Europe: position of the front seat allows. IN AN EMERGENCY 71806649 SERVICING AND Fiat order code for Eastern MAINTENANCE Europe: 71806650 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ++ Fair ISOFIX RWF INDEX platform, "L" type for Group1–from9 G0/1S up to 18 kg Fiat order code: 71806634
++ Fair head restraint Fiat order code for Central and Southern Europe: 71806648 Fiat order code for Northern Europe: 71806652 Fiat order code for Eastern Europe: 71806653 147 Child restraint Type of child restraint Weight group Child restraint system installation GETTING TO KNOW system system YOUR CAR Child restraint system, Isofix universal SAFETY with Top Tether
STARTING AND Britax SafefixTT It must be fitted forward facing, using DRIVING Approval number: Isofix anchorages and the upper belt, provided with the child restraint system. WARNING LIGHTS E1 04301199 AND MESSAGES Fiat order code: 71805956 It must be fitted in the rear outer seats. For optimum protection please adjust IN AN EMERGENCY the rear seat as far back as possible.
SERVICINGGroup1–from9 AND MAINTENANCE up to 18 kg Britax Roemer Duo Child restraint system, Isofix universal TECHNICAL Plus with Top Tether SPECIFICATIONS Approval number: It must be fitted forward facing, using
INDEX E1 04301133 Isofix anchorages and the upper belt, Fiat order code: 71803161 provided with the child restraint system. It must be fitted in the rear outer seats. For optimum protection please adjust the rear seat as far back as possible.
It must be installed forward facing only, using the three-point seat belt. Fair Junior For optimum protection Fiat suggests Group2–from15 Approval number: adjusting the rearseat as far kg to 36 kg E4 04443721 back as possible Fiat order code: 71805371
148 ❒ WARNING Only one child is to be strapped into each restraint system; never carry two children using GETTING TO KNOW Fit the child seat according to the one child restraint system. YOUR CAR instructions, which must be included ❒ Always check that the seat belts do not interfere SAFETY with this type of restraint system. with the child's throat. STARTING AND ❒ Always check that the seat belt is well fastened by DRIVING
pulling on it. WARNING LIGHTS Main recommendations to carry children AND MESSAGES safely: ❒ While travelling, do not let the child sit incorrectly ❒ Install the child seats on the rear seat, which is the or unfasten the belts. IN AN EMERGENCY most protected position in the event of an ❒ Never allow a child to put the belt's diagonal SERVICING AND accident. section under an arm or behind their back. MAINTENANCE
❒ Keep children in rearward facing restraint systems ❒ Never carry children on your lap, even newborns. TECHNICAL for as long as possible, until 3–4 years old. No-one can restrain a child in the event of an SPECIFICATIONS accident. ❒ Should a rearward facing restraint system be INDEX installed on the rear seats, it is advisable to ❒ In the event of an accident, replace the child position it as far forward as the position of the restraint system with a new one. front seat allows. ❒ If the passenger's front airbag is deactivated always check the warning light on the instrument panel to make sure that it has actually been deactivated. ❒ Carefully follow the instructions supplied with the child restraint system itself. Keep the instructions in the car along with the other documents and this handbook. Do not use second-hand child restraint systems without instructions.
149 AIRBAG In the event of impact, those not wearing a seat belt GETTING TO KNOW are projected forwards and may come into contact YOURThe carCAR is equipped with front airbags for driver and with the bag which is still inflating. The protection passenger, driver's knee bag (for versions/markets, offered by the bag is compromised in these whereSAFETY provided), seat-mounted side airbags for circumstances.
STARTINGdriver's AND and passenger pelvis-chest-shoulder DRIVINGprotection (for versions/markets, where provided), Front airbags may not activate in the following situations: WARNINGand LIGHTS window airbags for protecting the heads of front AND MESSAGESand rear outer occupants. ❒ frontal impacts against highly deformable objects not involving the front surface of the car (e.g. IN AN EMERGENCYThe location of the airbags on the car is marked by the writing "AIRBAG" in the middle of the steering wing collision against guard rail, etc.); SERVICING AND ❒ MAINTENANCEwheel, on the dashboard, on the side trim or on underride impacts with other vehicles or wedging a label placed next to the airbag deployment area. under protective barriers (e.g. trucks or guard TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS rails). FRONT AIRBAGS Failure to activate in the conditions described above INDEX The front driver/passenger airbags and the driver's is due to the fact that they may not provide any knee bag (for versions/markets, where provided) additional protection compared with seat belts, so protect the front seat occupants in the event of their activation would be inappropriate. frontal impacts of medium/high severity, by placing In these cases, non-deployment of the airbag does the bag between the occupant and the steering not necessarily indicate a system malfunction. wheel or dashboard. Therefore non-deployment in other types of impacts WARNING (side impacts, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) does not indicate a system malfunction. Do not apply stickers or other objects on the steering wheel, on the dashboard Front (driver and passenger) airbags are not a in the passenger airbag area, on roof side trims replacement for, but are complementary to, the seat or on the seats. Never put objects (e.g. mobile belts, which you are recommended to always wear, phones) on the passenger side of the dashboard as specified by law in Europe and most non-European since they could interfere with correct inflation countries. of the passenger airbag and also cause serious injury to the passengers.
150 Front driver airbag WARNING GETTING TO KNOW This consists of an instantly inflating bag contained in SERIOUS DANGER: Do not place YOUR CAR a special compartment in the centre of the steering rearward facing child restraint systems wheel fig. 137. in front of an active passenger airbag on SAFETY the front seat. Deployment of the STARTING AND WARNING airbag following an impact could cause fatal DRIVING injuries to the child.Always deactivate the WARNING LIGHTS Always drive with your hands on the rim passenger side airbag if arranging a child AND MESSAGES of the steering wheel so that the airbag restraint system on the front seat is necessary. IN AN EMERGENCY can inflate freely if required. Do not drive with Slide the passenger seat back as far as possible your body bent forward. Keep your back SERVICING AND to avoid contact between the child restraint MAINTENANCE straight against the backrest. system and the dashboard.Although this is not TECHNICAL mandatory by law, the airbag should be SPECIFICATIONS immediately reactivated when children are no Front passenger airbag longer transported to ensure better protection INDEX This consists of an instantly-inflating bag contained in for adults. a special compartment in the dashboard fig. 138: this bag has a larger volume than that on the driver's side.
fig. 137 F0Y0112 fig. 138 F0Y0113 151 Driver knee airbag Deactivation of passenger airbags: front airbag
GETTING TO(for KNOW versions/markets, where provided) and seat-mounted side airbag for pelvis-chest- YOUR CAR shoulder protection It is located in a special compartment under the (for versions/markets, where provided) dashboardSAFETY and has a dedicated cover fig. 139. It provides additional protection in the event of If a child must be carried on the front seat in STARTING AND DRIVINGa frontal impact. rearward facing child restrain system, deactivate the passenger front airbag and the seat-mounted bag WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES for pelvis, chest and shoulder protection (for versions/markets, where provided). IN AN EMERGENCY With the airbags deactivated, the warning light
SERVICING AND switches on in the instrument panel. MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL IMPORTANT To deactivate the airbags see the SPECIFICATIONS description in the "Getting to know your car" chapter, "Menu Options" paragraph. INDEX
fig. 139 F0Y0207 152 SIDE AIRBAGS: SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE IMPORTANT Do not affix rigid objects to the
AIRBAG (for versions/markets, where garment hooks or support handles. GETTING TO KNOW provided) AND WINDOW AIRBAG YOUR CAR IMPORTANT Do not rest your head, arms or elbows To help increase occupants protection in the event on the door, windows or the area in which the SAFETY of certain side impact collisions, the car is equipped window bag is located to avoid possible injury during STARTING AND with seat-mounted side airbags (for versions/ airbag inflation. DRIVING markets, where provided) and window airbag. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Seat-mounted side airbag (for versions/markets, where provided) IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND These comprise two types of bags located in the MAINTENANCE front seat backrests fig. 140 which protect the pelvis, TECHNICAL chest and shoulder area of the occupants in the SPECIFICATIONS event of a side impact of medium/high severity. INDEX Window bag This comprises a "curtain" bag located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors fig. 141 covered by special trims. It is designed to protect the head of front and rear occupants in the event of a side impact, thanks to the wide cushion inflation surface. The deployment of seat-mounted side airbags in the event of side impacts of low severity is not required. In the event of a side impact, the system provides best protection if the passenger sits on the seat in a correct position, thus allowing correct window bag deployment.
fig. 140 F0Y0090 153 IMPORTANT Never lean your head, arms or elbows When the airbag deploys it emits a small amount of
GETTING TOout KNOW of the window. dust: the dust is harmless and does not indicate YOUR CAR the beginning of a fire. The dust may irritate the skin IMPORTANT and eyes however: in this case, wash with neutral SAFETY soap and water. Do not wash the seats with water or pressurised STARTING AND DRIVINGsteam (by hand or at automatic seat washing Airbag checking, repair and replacement must be carried out at a Fiat Dealership. WARNINGstations). LIGHTS AND MESSAGESThe front airbags and/or seat-mounted side airbags If the car is scrapped, have the airbag system deactivated at a Fiat Dealership. IN AN EMERGENCYmay be deployed if the car is subject to violent impacts involving the underbody area (e.g. violent Pretensioners and airbags are deployed in different SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEimpacts against steps or kerbs, big holes or dips ways, according to the type of impact. Failure to in the road etc.). deploy of one or more of the devices does not TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS indicate a system malfunction.
INDEX WARNING If, when the key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning light does not switch on or stays on whilst driving, a fault may have occurred in the restraint systems. In this case the airbags or pretensioners may not be deployed in an impact or, in a lower number of cases, they may be deployed accidentally. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked.
fig. 141 F0Y0206 154 WARNING WARNING GETTING TO KNOW For versions/markets where provided, in The expiry dates of the pyrotechnic YOUR CAR the event of warning light failure, charge and the clock spring are shown the warning light switches on and the on a specific label contained in the lower glove SAFETY explosive charges of the passenger airbag are box. Contact a Fiat Dealership when these dates STARTING AND deactivated. approach. DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
WARNING WARNING IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND On cars with seat-mounted side airbags, If the car has been stolen or in the case MAINTENANCE do not cover the front seat backrests of attempt to steal it, if it has been TECHNICAL with extra covers. subjected to vandalism or floods, have the SPECIFICATIONS airbag system checked by a Fiat Dealership. INDEX WARNING Do not travel carrying objects in your lap, in front of your chest or between your lips (pipe, pencils, etc.).They could cause severe injury if the airbag is deployed.
155 WARNING WARNING GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARThe airbags may also be deployed when When the ignition key is turned to the car is not moving, if the key is in MAR-ON, the warning light switches SAFETYthe ignition and turned to MAR-ON or when on for a few seconds to remind you that the STARTINGtheengineisoff,ifthecarishitbyanother AND passenger airbag will be deployed in an impact, DRIVINGmoving vehicle. For this reason, children must after which, with airbag active, it should switch WARNINGnever LIGHTS occupy the front seat in a rearward facing off. AND MESSAGESseat even if the car is not moving. Deployment
IN AN EMERGENCYof the airbag following an impact could cause fatal injuries to the child. Should it be SERVICING AND WARNING MAINTENANCEabsolutely necessary to carry a child on the passenger side front seat in a rearward facing The flashing light flashes to indicate a TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSchild restraint system, the passenger airbags failure of the warning light: in this (pelvis-chest-shoulder protection front and side case, the pyrotechnic charges of the passenger bags)INDEX must be deactivated.The passenger seat airbag are deactivated. Contact a Fiat must also be positioned back as far as possible Dealership immediately to have the system in order to avoid the child restraint system from checked. coming into contact with the dashboard. Although this is not mandatory by law, the air bag should be immediately reactivated when children are no longer transported to ensure better protection for adults. On the other hand, if the key is turned to STOP, none of the safety devices (airbags or pretensioners) will be deployed in the event of collision. Non- deployment of these devices does not indicate a system malfunction.
156 WARNING GETTING TO KNOW The airbag deployment threshold is YOUR CAR higher than that of the pretensioners. For collisions in the range between the two SAFETY thresholds, it is normal for only the STARTING AND pretensioners to be activated. DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
WARNING IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND The airbag does not replace seat belts MAINTENANCE but increases their efficiency. Because TECHNICAL front airbags are not deployed for low-speed SPECIFICATIONS crashes, side collisions, rear-end shunts or rollovers, occupants are protected, in addition INDEX to any seat-mounted side airbags, only by their seat belts, which must therefore always be fastened.
157 STARTING AND DRIVING
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
STARTINGSAFETY THE ENGINE Engine starting for 0.9TwinAir 105 HP versions STARTING AND DRIVINGPROCEDURE FOR PETROLVERSIONS Proceed as follows: WARNING(0.9TwinAir LIGHTS 105 HP versions excluded) AND MESSAGES ❒ engage the handbrake and place the gear lever in Proceed as follows: neutral or fully press the clutch pedal if a gear IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ engage the handbrake and place the gearbox lever other than neutral is engaged; SERVICINGin AND neutral; ❒ turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon MAINTENANCE ❒ fully press the clutch pedal without touching the as the engine starts. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSaccelerator; Note If the vehicle does not start at the first ❒ turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon INDEX attempt, return the ignition key to STOP and repeat as the engine starts. the starting procedure placing the gear lever in If the engine does not start at the first attempt, neutral and fully pressing the clutch pedal. return the ignition key to STOP before repeating the If, when the ignition key is at MAR-ON, the procedure. instrument panel warning light remains on If, when the ignition key is at MAR-ON, the together with the warning light , turn the key to instrument panel warning light remains on STOP and then back to MAR-ON. If the warning together with the warning light , turn the key to light remains on, try the other keys provided with STOP and then back to MAR-ON. If the warning the vehicle. light remains on, try the other keys provided with Contact a Fiat Dealership if you still cannot start the the vehicle. engine. Contact a Fiat Dealership if you still cannot start the Never leave the ignition key in MAR-ON position engine. when the engine is stopped. Never leave the ignition key in MAR-ON position when the engine is stopped.
158 PROCEDURE FOR DIESELVERSIONS Warning light flashing for 60 seconds GETTING TO KNOW Proceed as follows: after starting or during prolonged YOUR CAR ❒ engage the handbrake and place the gearbox lever cranking of the engine indicates a fault in neutral; with the glow plug heating system.You can use SAFETY the car as usual if the engine starts but you ❒ turn the ignition key to MAR-ON: the warning STARTING AND should contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as DRIVING lights and on the instrument panel will possible. WARNING LIGHTS turn on; AND MESSAGES ❒ wait for the warning lights and to switch off; WARNING IN AN EMERGENCY
❒ SERVICING AND fully press the clutch pedal without touching the It is dangerous to run the engine in MAINTENANCE accelerator; enclosed areas.The engine takes TECHNICAL ❒ turn the ignition key to AVV as soon as warning in oxygen and releases carbon dioxide, carbon SPECIFICATIONS light switches off. Waiting too long will waste monoxide and other toxic gases. the heating work carried out by the plugs. Release INDEX the key as soon as the engine starts. IMPORTANT With cold engine, the accelerator must WARNING be entirely released when turning the ignition key Remember that the brake servo and to position AVV. power steering are not operational until If the engine does not start at the first attempt, the engine has been started, therefore much return the ignition key to STOP before repeating the effort than usual is required on the brake pedal procedure. and steering wheel. If, when the ignition key is at MAR-ON the warning light remains lit, turn the key to STOP and then back to MAR-ON. If the warning light remains lit, try with the other keys provided with the We recommend that during the initial car. period you do not demand to full performance from the car (e.g. excessive Contact the Fiat Dealership if the engine still will not acceleration, long journeys at top speed, sharp start. braking etc.).
159 ENGINE SWITCHING OFF When the engine is switched off never GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARleave the key turned to MAR-ON to Turn the ignition key to STOP while the engine is prevent useless current absorption from idling. drainingSAFETY the battery. IMPORTANT After a demanding drive, before STARTING AND DRIVING turning the engine off you should allow it to idle to allow the temperature in the engine compartment to WARNING LIGHTSNever jump start the engine by pushing, AND MESSAGEStowing or coasting downhill.This could decrease. cause fuel to flow into the catalytic IN AN EMERGENCY converter and damage it beyond repair. A quick burst on the accelerator before SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE turning off the engine serves absolutely no WARMING UPTHE ENGINE JUST AFTER IT practical purpose, it wastes fuel and is TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSHAS STARTED especially damaging to turbocharged engines.
ProceedINDEX as follows: ❒ drive off slowly, letting the engine turn at medium revs. Do not accelerate abruptly; ❒ do not demand full performance at first. Wait until the engine coolant temperature gauge starts moving.
160 PARKING Four or five clicks are generally enough when the car is on level ground, while ten or eleven may be GETTING TO KNOW Proceed as follows: required if the car is on a steep slope and laden. YOUR CAR ❒ stop the engine and engage the handbrake; SAFETY ❒ engage a gear (first gear if parked uphill or reverse WARNING if facing downhill) and leave the wheels turned. STARTING AND If this is not the case, contact a Fiat DRIVING If the car is parked on a steep slope, it is also Dealership for adjustment. WARNING LIGHTS advisable to block the wheels with a wedge or stone. AND MESSAGES
Do not leave the key in the ignition switch to IN AN EMERGENCY prevent the battery from running down. When the handbrake is engaged and the ignition key SERVICING AND is on MAR-ON, the instrument panel warning light MAINTENANCE will switch on. WARNING TECHNICAL Proceed as follows to release the handbrake: SPECIFICATIONS Never leave children unattended in the ❒ car.Always remove the key from the slightly lift the lever and press release button B; INDEX ignition when leaving the car and take it with ❒ hold button B down and lower the lever: the you. warning light on the instrument panel switches off.
HANDBRAKE The handbrake lever is located between the front seats. Pull lever A upwards to operate the handbrakefig. 142, until the car is braked.
fig. 142 F0Y0047 161 Press the brake pedal when carrying out this USING THE GEARBOX GETTING TOoperation KNOW to prevent the car from moving YOURaccidentally. CAR To engage the gears, fully depress the clutch pedal and put the gear lever into the required position (the IMPORTANTSAFETY For cars equipped with a front diagram is shown on the knob fig. 143). armrest, lift this up to ensure that it does not STARTING AND For 0.9 TwinAir Turbo 105 HP and 1.4 16V versions, DRIVINGinterfere with the action of the handbrake. to engage reverse R from neutral, lift the ring A WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES fig. 143 under the knob and shift the lever to the right and back. IN AN EMERGENCY For 1.3 16V MultiJet version: to engage reverse R
SERVICING AND from neutral position, shift the lever to the right and MAINTENANCE then back.
TECHNICAL th SPECIFICATIONS To engage 6 gear (for versions/markets where provided), push firmly to the right when operating th INDEX the lever in order to avoid selecting 4 gear by mistake. The same applies to the shift from 6th to 5th gear.
fig. 143 F0Y0136 162 IMPORTANT Reverse can only be engaged when the SAVING FUEL car is completely stationary. With the engine GETTING TO KNOW running, wait for at least 2 seconds with the clutch Here are some suggestions which can help you to YOUR CAR pedal fully pressed before engaging reverse to save fuel and lower harmful emissions. prevent damage to the gears and grating. SAFETY
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS STARTING AND IMPORTANT The clutch pedal should be used only DRIVING for gear changes. Do not drive with your foot resting Car maintenance WARNING LIGHTS on the clutch pedal, however lightly. For versions/ AND MESSAGES markets where provided, the electronic clutch Have checks and adjustments carried out in control could cut in, interpreting the incorrect accordance with the “Scheduled Servicing Plan”. IN AN EMERGENCY driving style as a fault. SERVICING AND Tyres MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL WARNING Check the tyre pressures at least once every 4 SPECIFICATIONS weeks: if the pressure is too low, consumption levels Depress the clutch pedal fully to change increase as resistance to rolling is higher. INDEX gear correctly. It is therefore essential that there is nothing under the pedals: make sure the mats are lying flat and do not get Unnecessary loads in the way of the pedals. Do not travel with an overloaded boot. The weight of the car and its arrangement greatly affect fuel consumption and stability.
Do not drive with your hand resting on Roof rack/ski rack the gear lever as the force exerted, even if slight, could lead over time to premature Remove the roof rack or ski rack from the roof if not wear of the gearbox internal components. in use. These accessories lower aerodynamic penetration and adversely affect consumption levels. When transporting particularly large objects, use a trailer if possible.
163 Electrical devices Unnecessary actions
GETTING TO KNOW YOUROnly CAR use electrical devices for the amount of time Avoid revving up when at traffic lights or before needed. The heated rear window, additional stopping the engine. This and also double declutching headlights,SAFETY windscreen/rear window wipers and is absolutely pointless on modern cars and also heater fan need a considerable amount of energy, increases consumption and pollution. STARTING AND DRIVINGtherefore increasing fuel consumption (by up to 25% in the urban cycle). Gear selection WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Climate control system Use a higher gear as soon as traffic and road IN AN EMERGENCY conditions allow. Using a low gear for faster The use of the climate control system leads to higher acceleration will increase consumption. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEfuel consumption. If the temperature outside In the same way improper use of a high gear permits, try to use ventilation only. TECHNICAL increases consumption, emissions and engine wear. SPECIFICATIONS Devices for aerodynamic control INDEX Maximum speed The use of non-certified devices for aerodynamic Fuel consumption increases considerably with speed. control may adversely affect air drag and fuel Keep speed as constant as possible, avoiding consumption. unnecessary braking and acceleration, which have a significant cost in terms of both fuel consumption DRIVING STYLE and emissions.
Starting Acceleration Do not warm up the engine at low or high revs when Sudden acceleration has a very negative effect on fuel the car is stationary; this causes the engine to warm consumption and emissions: accelerate gradually. up more slowly, thereby increasing fuel consumption and emissions. It is advisable to set off immediately and slowly, avoiding high revs: this allows the engine to warm up more quickly.
164 CONDITIONS OF USE TOWING TRAILERS GETTING TO KNOW Cold starting IMPORTANT NOTES YOUR CAR Short distances and frequent cold start-ups will For towing caravans or trailers the car must be fitted SAFETY prevent the engine from reaching optimal running with a type-approved tow hook and an adequate STARTING AND temperature. electrical system. Installation must be carried out by DRIVING
Consequently, both consumption (from +15 to +30% a specialist. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES on urban cycle ) and emissions will increase. Install any specific and/or additional rear view mirrors as specified by the Highway Code. IN AN EMERGENCY Traffic and road conditions Remember that when towing a trailer, steep hills are SERVICING AND Rather high fuel consumption is caused by heavy harder to climb, braking distances increase and MAINTENANCE traffic, for instance when travelling in a queue with overtaking takes longer depending on the overall TECHNICAL frequent use of low gears or in large towns with weight of the trail. SPECIFICATIONS many traffic lights. Engage a low gear when driving downhill, rather than INDEX Mountain and rough roads also have a negative effect constantly using the brake. on fuel consumption. The weight of the trailer on the car's tow hook will reduce the load capacity of the car by the same Stops in traffic amount. To make sure that the maximum towable During prolonged stops (e.g. level crossings) the weight is not exceeded (given in the car registration engine should be switched off. document) account should be taken of the fully laden trailer, including accessories and luggage. Respect the speed limits specific to each country for vehicles towing trailers. In any case, the top speed must not exceed 100 km/h.
165 Any electric brake or other device (winch etc.) SNOW TYRES GETTING TOshould KNOW be powered directly by the battery through a YOURcable CAR with a cross-section of no less than 2.5 mm2. Use snow tyres of the same size as the normal tyres provided with the car. InSAFETY addition to the electrical branches, the car's electrical system can be connected only to the supply A Fiat Dealership will be happy to provide advice STARTING AND DRIVINGcable for an electric brake and to the cable for an concerning the most suitable type of tyre for the internal trailer light, though not more than 15 W. To customer's requirements. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESconnect, use the preset control unit with a battery 2 For the type of tyre to be used, inflation pressures cable with cross-section no less than 2.5 mm . and the specifications of snow tyres, follow the IN AN EMERGENCY IMPORTANT The use of auxiliary loads other than instructions given in paragraph "Wheels" in section SERVICING AND "Technical specifications". MAINTENANCEexternal lights (electric brake, winch, etc.) must occur with engine running. The winter performance of these tyres is TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS considerably reduced when the tread thickness is less IMPORTANT To install a tow hook contact a Fiat than 4 mm. Replace them in this case. Dealership.INDEX Due to the specific characteristics of snow tyres, in normal weather conditions or on long motorway WARNING journeys, the performance of these tyres is lower than that of standard tyres. The ABS with which the car may be equipped will not control the braking Their usage should therefore be restricted in system of the trailer. Particular caution is accordance with their type-approval; always comply required on slippery roads. with specific local regulations relating to the use of snow tyres. All four tyres should be the same (brand and track) to ensure greater safety when driving and braking WARNING and better driveability. Remember that you should Never modify the braking system of the not change the rotation direction of the tyres. car to control the trailer brake.The trailer braking system must be fully independent of the car’s hydraulic system.
166 WARNING SNOW CHAINS GETTING TO KNOW The maximum speed for snow tyres The use of snow chains should be in compliance with YOUR CAR local regulations. marked "Q" is 160 km/h, while it is 190 SAFETY km/h for "T" tyres and 210 km/h for "H" tyres. Snow chains may be fitted to the tyres of the front The highway code speed limits must however wheels (drive wheels) only. STARTING AND always be complied with. DRIVING Check the tension of the snow chains after the first WARNING LIGHTS few metres have been driven. AND MESSAGES
17" tyres cannot be fitted with chains. For other IN AN EMERGENCY tyres (15" and 16") fit only reduced size snow chains SERVICING AND with a maximum projection of 9 mm beyond the MAINTENANCE tyre profile. TECHNICAL IMPORTANT Snow chains cannot be fitted to the SPECIFICATIONS space-saver wheel (for versions/markets, where INDEX provided). If a front tyre is punctured, replace a rear wheel with the space-saver wheel and move the rear wheel to the front axle. In this way, with two normal drive wheels at the front, snow chains can be fitted.
Keep your speed down when snow chains are fitted; do not exceed 50 km/h.Avoid potholes, steps and pavements and avoid driving for long distances on roads not covered with snow to prevent damaging the car and the roadbed.
167 STORING THE CAR ❒ cover the car with a cloth or perforated plastic GETTING TO KNOW sheet. Do not use sheets of non-perforated plastic YOURIf the CAR car is to be left inactive for longer than a as they do not allow moisture on the car body month, the following precautions should be followed: to evaporate; SAFETY ❒ park the car in covered, dry and if possible ❒ inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above the standard STARTING AND DRIVINGwell-ventilated premises and slightly open specified pressure and check it at intervals; the windows; ❒ WARNING LIGHTS do not drain the engine cooling system. AND MESSAGES❒ engage a gear and check that the handbrake is not engaged; IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ disconnect the negative battery terminal (for SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEversions with Start&Stop system refer to the paragraph "Start&Stop system" in the chapter TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS"Knowing your car"); If the battery is not disconnected the from the electrical system, check itsINDEX charge every thirty days; ❒ clean and protect the painted parts using protective wax; ❒ clean and protect the shiny metal parts using special compounds available commercially; ❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber windscreen and rear window wiper blades and lift them off the glass;
168 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES BRAKE FLUID LOW (red) / SAFETY HANDBRAKE ENGAGED (red) STARTING AND GENERAL WARNINGS DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS The warning light switches on together with a AND MESSAGES dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when Turning the key to the MAR-ON position illuminates the warning light, but it should switch off after a applicable. These indications are concise and IN AN EMERGENCY precautionary and, as such, must not be few seconds. SERVICING AND considered as exhaustive and/or an alternative to the MAINTENANCE LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL information contained in this Owner Handbook, TECHNICAL which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. In The warning light turns on when the level of the SPECIFICATIONS the event of a failure indication, always refer to brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the minimum INDEX the contents of this chapter. level due to a possible leak in the circuit. On some versions the display shows the dedicated message. IMPORTANT Failure indications displayed are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious failures. WARNING Very serious failures are indicated by a repeated If the warning light switches on while and prolonged warning “cycle”. driving, stop immediately and contact Less serious failures are indicated by a shorter a Fiat Dealership. warning “cycle”. The displaying cycle of both failure categories can be stopped by pressing the button . The control HANDBRAKE ENGAGED panel warning light will stay on until the cause of the When the key is turned to MAR position, the malfunction is eliminated. warning light switches on but should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light (or symbol on the display) switches on when the handbrake is engaged. If the car is moving the buzzer will also sound.
169 IMPORTANT If the warning light comes on when the Drive carefully and contact a Fiat Dealership as soon
GETTING TOcar KNOW is in motion, check that the handbrake is not as possible. YOURon. CAR
SAFETY AIRBAG FAILURE (red) EBD FAILURE (red) STARTING AND (amber) DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Turning the key to the MAR-ON position illuminates The simultaneous switching on of the (red), the warning light, but it should switch off after a IN AN EMERGENCY(amber) and ESC warning lights with the engine few seconds. on, indicates either a failure of the EBD system or SERVICING AND The warning light switches on constantly (on some MAINTENANCEthat the system is not available. versions, together with a message and a symbol TECHNICALIn this case, the rear wheels may suddenly lock and on the display) to indicate an airbag system fault. SPECIFICATIONSthe vehicle may swerve when braking sharply. A dedicatedINDEX message is displayed on certain versions. WARNING Drive very carefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership If the warning light does not come on to have the system inspected immediately. when the key is turned to the MAR-ON position or if it remains lit while driving, there ABS SYSTEM FAILURE (amber) may be a problem with the airbag restraint system. In this case, the airbags or pretensioners may not be activated in the event of an accident or, in a more limited number of cases, Turning the key to the MAR-ON position illuminates may be activated when not necessary. Before the warning light, but it should switch off after a continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership few seconds. immediately to have the system checked. The warning light switches on (on some versions, together with a message and a symbol on the display) when the system is not efficient. In this case the braking system maintains its efficiency unaltered but without the advantage of the ABS system.
170 WARNING WARNING GETTING TO KNOW Afaultwiththe warning light is A failure of the warning light is YOUR CAR
indicated by flashing of the warning indicated by warning light switching SAFETY light, which signals the deactivation of the on. In addition, the airbag system automatically passenger side front airbag. In addition, the disables the airbags on the passenger's side STARTING AND airbag system automatically disables the (both front and side airbags - for versions/ DRIVING airbags on the passenger's side (both front and markets where provided). Before continuing, WARNING LIGHTS side airbags - for versions/markets, where contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have AND MESSAGES provided). In this case, the warning light may the system checked. IN AN EMERGENCY not indicate a possible problem with the airbag SERVICING AND restraint system. Before continuing, contact a MAINTENANCE Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system UNFASTENED SEAT BELTS (red) checked. TECHNICAL (for versions/markets, where provided) SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX PASSENGER/SIDE AIR BAGS The warning light switches on constantly with the DEACTIVATED (amber) car stationary and the driver's side or passenger side seat belt (when the passenger is present) not fastened. The warning light switches on when the front The warning light will flash and a buzzer will sound if passenger's airbag and side bag are disabled. the vehicle is in motion and the front seat belts are With key at MAR-ON, the warning light switches not correctly fastened. on constantly for a few seconds and switches off only For permanent deactivation of the SBR (Seat Belt if the front airbags/side bags are activated. Reminder) system buzzer, contact a Fiat Dealership. The system can be reactivated at any time using the Setup menu (see the description in the chapter "Knowing you car").
171 LOW BATTERY CHARGE (red) WARNING GETTING TO KNOW (for versions/markets, where provided) YOUR CAR If the warning light turns on whilst
SAFETY driving (on certain versions together with the message on the display) stop the When the ignition key is moved to MAR, the warning STARTING AND engine immediately and contact a Fiat DRIVINGlight switches on but should switch off as soon as Dealership. the engine is started (with the engine idling, a brief WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESdelay can be expected).
IN AN EMERGENCYIf the warning light (or, on some versions, a message 2. Engine oil deteriorated and a symbol on the display) remains on constantly (only Diesel versions with DPF) SERVICINGor flashing, AND contact a Fiat Dealership. MAINTENANCE The warning light will flash and a dedicated message
TECHNICAL will appear on the display (for versions/markets, SPECIFICATIONS CONTINUOUSLY ON: LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE (red) where provided). INDEX The warning light may flash in the following ways, depending on the version: ON FLASHING: ENGINE OIL ❒ 1 minute every two hours; DETERIORATED ❒ cycles of 3 minutes with intervals with the warning (only Diesel versions with DPF - red) light off for 5 seconds until the oil is changed. When the ignition key is moved to MAR, the warning After the first indication, at each engine start-up the light switches on but should switch off as soon as warning light will continue flashing as described the engine is started. above until the oil is changed. On some versions, the display shows a dedicated message together with 1. Insufficient engine oil pressure the warning light. The warning light switches on constantly together The flashing of the warning light should not be (for versions/markets, where provided) with a considered as a fault, it simply informs the customer message on the display when the system detects that that the oil needs to be changed following normal car the engine oil pressure is too low. use.
172 Remember that the deterioration of the engine oil is The warning light switches on (on some versions accelerated by: together with a message and a symbol on the display) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR ❒ mainly town use of the car which makes the DPF when the engine is overheated. regeneration process more frequent; If the warning light comes on when driving, proceed SAFETY ❒ as follows: use of the car for short drives, in which the engine STARTING AND does not have time to reach its regular operating ❒ when driving normally: stop the car, switch off DRIVING temperature; the engine and check that the water level in the WARNING LIGHTS ❒ repeated interruption of the regeneration process, reservoir is not below the MIN mark. If it is, wait AND MESSAGES for a few minutes for the engine to cool down signalled by the DPF warning light coming on. IN AN EMERGENCY then slowly and carefully open the cap, top up with
coolant and check that the level is between the SERVICING AND WARNING MIN and MAX marks. Also check visually for any MAINTENANCE
fluid leaks. If, when restarting, the warning light TECHNICAL If the warning light switches on, the SPECIFICATIONS deteriorated engine oil must be changed should come on again, contact a Fiat Dealership; as soon as possible, and never more than 500 ❒ if the vehicle is used under demanding INDEX km from the first time that the warning light conditions (e.g. towing trailers uphill or fully switches on. Failure to observe the above may loaded): slow down and, if the light stays on, stop result in severe damage to the engine and the car. Wait for 2 or 3 minutes with the engine invalidate the warranty.The activation of this running and slightly accelerated to further favour warning light is not related to the amount of oil the coolant circulation. Then stop the engine. in the engine.Therefore, never top up with oil Check the correct coolant level as described when the warning light starts flashing. above. Should the level of fluid be too low, top up (for the quantity and type of fluid to use, see the description in the "Refuelling" paragraph in the HOT ENGINE COOLANT "Technical specifications" chapter). (red) IMPORTANT Over demanding routes, it is advisable to keep the engine on and slightly accelerated for a few minutes before switching it off. Turning the key to the MAR-ON position illuminates the warning light, but it should switch off after a few seconds.
173 FUEL RESERVE – LIMITED Under these conditions, you may continue travelling
GETTING TO KNOW RANGE (amber) at moderate speed without demanding excessive YOUR CAR effort from the engine. Prolonged use of the car with the warning light on constantly may cause damage: SAFETY This warning light comes on when about 6 to 8 litres contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. STARTING AND DRIVINGof fuel are left in the tank. When the remaining The warning light goes out after the fault disappears, range is lower to approx. 50 km (or equivalent value but the notification is stored in the system. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESin miles), on some versions, the display will show a warning message. NOTE (valid only for petrol engines) IN AN EMERGENCY IMPORTANT The warning light will flash to indicate If the warning light is flashing, the catalytic converter SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEa system failure. If this is the case, go to a Fiat could be damaged. Dealership to have the system checked. In this case, it is necessary to release the accelerator TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS pedal to lower the speed of the engine until the EOBD/INJECTION SYSTEM warning light stops flashing. INDEX FAILURE (amber) Continue the journey at moderate speed, trying to avoid driving conditions that may cause further flashing and contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as In normal conditions, the warning light switches on possible. when the key is turned to MAR (on some versions, with a message on the display), but should switch off as soon as the engine is started. Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as If the warning light remains on or switches on whilst possible if warning light either does driving, the injection system is not working properly; not light up when the key is turned to in particular, if the warning light switches on MAR-ON or if while travelling the warning light constantly, this indicates a malfunction in the switches on or flashes (along with a message and supply/ignition system that could cause excessive a symbol on the display on some versions).The exhaust emissions, a possible loss of performance, exhaust emission levels may be checked by the poor driveability and high fuel consumption. traffic control authorities using the appropriate equipment. Comply with the laws and regulations of the country where you are driving.
174 ESC SYSTEM FAILURE (amber) GLOW PLUG HEATING/GLOW (for versions/markets, where provided) PLUG HEATING FAILURE (Diesel GETTING TO KNOW versions) (amber) YOUR CAR
SAFETY Turning the key to the MAR-ON position illuminates GLOW PLUG HEATING the warning light, but it should switch off after a STARTING AND This warning light switches on when the key is DRIVING few seconds. turned to MAR-ON. It will switch off as soon as the WARNING LIGHTS If the warning light does not switch off or remains on heater plugs have reached the preset temperature. AND MESSAGES (together with a message and a symbol on the The engine can be started as soon as the warning IN AN EMERGENCY display on some versions) whilst driving, contact a light switches off. Fiat Dealership. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Flashing of the warning light whilst driving indicates IMPORTANT At high ambient temperatures the TECHNICAL the action of the ESC system. warning light may stay on for an extremely short SPECIFICATIONS time. Hill Holder failure INDEX GLOW PLUG HEATING FAILURE This warning light comes on, on some versions together with the symbol and a message in the The warning light will flash (on some versions, display, in the event of a fault with the Hill Holder together with a message and a symbol on the display) system. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership. to indicate a fault in the plug preheating system. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the fault fixed as FIAT CODE SYSTEM FAILURE (amber) soon as possible. (for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light switches on (on some versions, together with a message and a symbol on the display) to indicate a Fiat CODE system failure: in this case contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
175 “DUALDRIVE” ELECTRIC POWER IMPORTANT In some circumstances, factors
GETTING TO KNOW STEERING FAILURE (red) independent of the electric power steering could YOUR CAR cause the warning light on the instrument panel to switch on. In this case, stop the car immediately SAFETY During the engine start (should it be in motion), stop the engine for about STARTING AND 20 seconds and then restart the engine. If the DRIVINGWhen the key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning warning light (or, on some versions, a message and a
WARNINGlight LIGHTS switches on, but it should switch off after a few symbol on the display) remains on constantly, AND MESSAGESseconds. If the warning light stays on, turn the contact a Fiat Dealership.
IN AN EMERGENCYignition key to STOP position and start the engine again. IMPORTANT After the battery is disconnected, the SERVICING AND steering must be initialised. The warning light MAINTENANCEIf the warning light stays on (on some versions, together with a message and a symbol on the switches on to indicate this. To carry out this TECHNICAL procedure, simply turn the steering wheel all the way SPECIFICATIONSdisplay), the effort to operate the steering wheel could be increased; steering is, however, possible. from one end to the other or drive in a straight line INDEX for about a hundred metres. In this case, contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. CRUISE CONTROL (green) (for versions/markets, where provided) While driving If the warning light switches on whilst driving (on some versions, together with a message and a This warning light switches on when the ignition key symbol on the display) you may not have steering is turned to MAR, but it should switch off after a assistance. few seconds, if the Cruise Control is deactivated. Although it will still be possible to steer the car, the The warning light switches on when the Cruise effort needed to operate the steering wheel could be Control ring nut is turned to position (see the increased: contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as “Cruise Control” paragraph in the "Knowing your possible. car" chapter). A specific message is displayed on certain versions.
176 SPEED LIMITER (green) DPF (PARTICULATE FILTER) BEING
(for versions/markets, where provided) CLEANED GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SAFETY This warning light switches on when the key is (only Diesel versions with DPF) (amber) STARTING AND turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off after a Turning the key to the MAR-ON position illuminates DRIVING few seconds, if the "Speed limiter" is deactivated. the warning light, but it should switch off after a WARNING LIGHTS few seconds. AND MESSAGES Activation The warning light (on some versions, together with a IN AN EMERGENCY The warning light switches on when the Cruise message and a symbol on the display) switches on SERVICING AND Control ring nut is turned to position (see the constantly to notify the driver that the DPF system MAINTENANCE “Cruise Control” paragraph in the "Knowing your needs to eliminate captured pollutants (particulate) TECHNICAL car" chapter). through the regeneration process. SPECIFICATIONS On some versions, the intervention of the system is The warning light does not come on during every INDEX indicated by a message and a symbol shown on the DPF regeneration, but only when driving conditions display and by the last stored car speed. require that the driver is notified. To switch the warning light off, the car must be kept Deactivation moving until the regeneration process is completed. The deactivation of the system is indicated by the As an average, the process lasts fifteen minutes. warning light switching off on the display and, on The best conditions to complete the regeneration some version, by the display of a message and process are reached driving the car at about 60 km/h symbol. with engine speed over 2000 rpm. When this warning light switches on, it does not indicate a car failure and thus it should not be taken to a workshop. On some versions, together with the warning light switching on, the display shows a dedicated message.
177 WARNING When the car exceeds this value, on some versions a GETTING TO KNOW message and a symbol are shown on the display and YOUR CARVehicle travel speed should always be an acoustic signal is emitted.
SAFETYadapted to the traffic and weather conditions, and must always comply with traffic Fuel cut-off system intervention/fault STARTINGregulations.The AND engine can be stopped even if (for versions/markets, where provided) DRIVINGthe DPF warning light is on: however, repeated The warning light switches on (together with a WARNING LIGHTSinterruptions of the regeneration process could AND MESSAGEScause premature deterioration of the engine oil. message on the display) in the event of fuel cut-off system intervention/fault. IN AN EMERGENCYFor this reason, it is always advisable to wait for the warning light to go off before turning SERVICING AND Exterior lights failure MAINTENANCEthe engine off, following the instructions appearing above. Do not complete the DPF The warning light will come on when a fault to one TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSregeneration process when the vehicle is of the following lights is detected: stopped. ❒ INDEX daytime running lights (DRLs) (for versions/ markets, where provided); GENERIC FAILURE INDICATION ❒ side lights; (amber) ❒ direction indicators; (for versions/markets, where provided) ❒ rear fog light; ❒ reversing light; The warning light switches on in the following ❒ circumstances. In these cases contact a Fiat number plate lights; Dealership to have the fault fixed as soon as possible. ❒ brake lights (for versions with multifunction display only). Speed limit exceeded The failure relating to these lights could be: one or (for versions/markets, where provided) more blown bulbs, a blown protection fuse or a The warning light switches on when the speed limit break in the electrical connection. set in the Setup menu is exceeded.
178 DST system failure Rain sensor failure
(for versions/markets, where provided) GETTING TO KNOW The warning light switches on (together with a YOUR CAR message on the display) when a DST system failure is The warning light switches on (together with a detected. message on the display) when a rain sensor failure is SAFETY detected. Water in diesel filter STARTING AND The warning light switches on (together with a DRIVING Park Assist failure message on the display) to indicate the presence of WARNING LIGHTS water in the diesel filter. (for versions/markets, where provided) AND MESSAGES The warning light switches on (together with a IN AN EMERGENCY Start&Stop failure message on the display) when a Park Assist system SERVICING AND (for versions/markets, where provided) failure is detected. MAINTENANCE
The warning light switches on (together with a TECHNICAL message on the display) when a Start&Stop system Dusk sensor failure SPECIFICATIONS (for versions/markets, where provided) failure is detected. INDEX The warning light switches on (together with a LPG/methane level sensor failure message on the display) when a dusk sensor failure is (for versions/markets, where provided) detected. The warning light switches on (together with a message on the display) when an LPG/methane level Engine oil pressure sensor failure sensor failure is detected. Versions with multifunction display: engine oil pressure sensor failure is indicated by the activation of the Temporary or permanent City Brake Control warning light on the instrument panel. - "Collision Mitigation" system failure Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display: the (for versions/markets, where provided) engine oil pressure sensor failure is indicated by the The warning light switches on (together with a display icon switching on. message on the display) when a temporary or permanent City Brake Control - "Collision Mitigation" system failure is detected.
179 HEATED REAR WINDOW (amber) MAIN BEAMS (blue)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SAFETY The warning light turns on when switching the The warning light switches on when the main beams STARTING AND DRIVINGheated rear window on. are turned on.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES HEATEDWINDSCREEN (amber) LEFT-HAND DIRECTION (for versions/markets where provided) INDICATOR (green) (intermittent) IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEThe warning light switches on by activating the The warning light switches on when the direction TECHNICAL indicator control stalk is moved downwards or, SPECIFICATIONSheated windscreen (see "Automatic dual-zone climate control system" paragraph in "Knowing your together with the right indicator, when the hazard car"INDEX chapter). warning light button is pressed.
SIDE LIGHTS AND DIPPED RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION HEADLAMPS (green)/FOLLOW ME INDICATOR (green) (intermittent) HOME (green)
SIDE LIGHTS AND DIPPED HEADLAMPS The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved upwards or, together The warning light comes on when side/tail lights or with the left indicator, when the hazard warning dipped headlamps are turned on. light button is pressed. FOLLOW ME HOME The warning light switches on (on some versions, together with a message and a symbol in the display) when this device is used (see the "Follow Me Home" paragraph in the "Knowing your car" chapter).
180 “DUALDRIVE” ELECTRIC POWER City Brake Control - "Collision
STEERING ON (green) Mitigation" SYSTEM DEACTIVATED GETTING TO KNOW (amber) YOUR CAR
(for versions/markets where provided) SAFETY The CITY indication appears (an icon appears on the The warning light switches on when the City Brake STARTING AND display on some versions) when "Dualdrive" electric DRIVING power steering is activated by pressing the Control - "Collision Mitigation" system is deactivated through the Setup Menu (see paragraph "Menu WARNING LIGHTS corresponding button (see the "Dualdrive electric AND MESSAGES power steering" paragraph in "Knowing your car" Items", chapter "Knowing your car). chapter). IN AN EMERGENCY START&STOP SYSTEM ACTIVATION/ The indication CITY (or the symbol on the display) DEACTIVATION SERVICING AND disappears when the button is pressed again. MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL Start&Stop system activation SPECIFICATIONS DOORS/BONNET/LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT OPEN (red) A message will appear on the display when the INDEX Start&Stop system is activated. In this condition the LED on the button on the The warning light switches on (on some versions dashboard control panel (see "Start&Stop" paragraph together with a message and a symbol on the display) in "Knowing your car" chapter) is off. when one or more doors, the bonnet or the tailgate are not properly closed. Turning the Start&Stop off An acoustic signal is emitted with the doors open ❒ Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display: a and the car moving. message appears on the display when the Start&Stop system is deactivated. ❒ Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display: the symbol and a dedicated message appear on the display when the Start&Stop system is deactivated. The LED above the button is on when the system is deactivated.
181 START&STOP SYSTEM FAILURE
GETTING TO KNOW YOURVersions CAR with multifunction display Start&StopSAFETY system failure is indicated by the switching on of the warning light (for versions/ STARTING AND DRIVINGmarkets, where provided) on the instrument panel and a message on the display. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Versions with reconfigurable multifunction IN AN EMERGENCYdisplay
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEThe symbol and a dedicated message appear on the display when a failure in the Start&Stop system is TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSdetected.
InINDEX the event of a Start&Stop system failure, contact a Fiat Dealership.
182 IN AN EMERGENCY
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
In an emergency we recommend that you call the free-phone number found on the Warranty SAFETY
Booklet.You can also go to the www.fiat.com website to find your nearest Fiat Dealership. STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING THE ENGINE Proceed as follows to start the car: WARNING LIGHTS ❒ connect the positive terminals (+ near the AND MESSAGES Contact to a Fiat Dealership immediately if terminal) of the two batteries with a jump lead IN AN instrument panel warning light comes on fig. 144; EMERGENCY constantly. SERVICING AND ❒ with a second lead, connect the negative terminal MAINTENANCE – of the auxiliary battery to an earth point on JUMP STARTING TECHNICAL the engine or the gearbox of the car to be started; SPECIFICATIONS If the battery is flat, the engine may be started using ❒ start the engine; an auxiliary battery with the same capacity or a INDEX little higher than the flat one. ❒ when the engine has been started, remove the leads reversing the order above. For versions with Start&Stop system, to carry out the jump starting procedure, refer to the paragraph “Start&Stop system” in the “Getting to know your car” section. If after a few attempts the engine does not start, do not persist but contact a Fiat Dealership. IMPORTANT Do not directly connect the negative terminals of the two batteries: sparks could ignite explosive gas released from the battery. If the auxiliary battery is installed on another car, prevent accidental contact between metallic parts of the two cars.
fig. 144 F0Y0137 183 REPLACING A WHEEL Never use a fast battery-charger to start GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARthe engine as this could damage the electronic systems of your car, particularly GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS theSAFETY ignition and fuel supply control units. The car is equipped with the "Fix&Go Automatic
STARTING AND Kit": see the paragraph “Fix&Go Automatic Kit” for DRIVING how to use this device. WARNING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES As an alternative to the “Fix&Go Automatic Kit” the This procedure must be performed by car may be equipped with a space-saver wheel: see IN ANexpert personnel because incorrect EMERGENCY the instructions on the following pages for changing actions could cause electrical discharge of the wheel. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEconsiderable intensity. Furthermore, battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive: avoid contact TECHNICAL WARNING SPECIFICATIONSwith skin and eyes. Keep naked flames and lighted cigarettes away from the battery and do The space-saver wheel (for versions/ notINDEX cause sparks. markets where provided) is specific to your car, do not use it on other models, or use the space-saver wheel of other models on your BUMP STARTING car.The space-saver wheel must only be used Never jump start the engine by pushing, towing or in case of emergency. It must only be used coasting downhill. for the distance necessary to reach a service point and the car speed must not exceed 80 IMPORTANT Remember that the brake servo and km/h.The space-saver wheel has an orange electrical power steering system are not active until sticker that summarises the main cautions for the engine is started. A much greater effort will use and limitations. Never remove or cover therefore be required to use the brake pedal or turn the label.The following information is provided the steering wheel. in four languages on the label: "Important! For temporary use only! 80 km/h max! Replace with a standard tyre as soon as possible. Never cover this indication." Never apply a hub cap on a space-saver wheel.
184 WARNING WARNING GETTING TO KNOW Alert other drivers that the car is The jack shall only be used for raising YOUR CAR
stationary in compliance with local the car model it has been supplied with. SAFETY regulations: hazard warning lights, warning Never use the jack for other purposes, such as triangle, etc.Any passengers on board should raising other car models. Never use the jack for STARTING AND leave the car, especially if it is heavily laden. repair operations under the vehicle. Incorrectly DRIVING Passengers should stay away from on-coming positioning the jack may cause the vehicle to WARNING LIGHTS traffic while the wheel is being changed. If you fall. Do not use the jack for loads higher than AND MESSAGES are on a slope or uneven surface, place the the one shown on its label.The space-saver IN AN wedge provided under the wheel (see the wheel cannot be fitted with snow chains. If a EMERGENCY SERVICING AND instructions on the next pages). front (drive) tyre is punctured and chains are MAINTENANCE needed, use a standard wheel from the rear TECHNICAL axle and install the space-saver wheel on the SPECIFICATIONS rear axle. In this way, with two normal drive WARNING wheels at the front axle, it is possible to use INDEX The vehicle's driving characteristics will snow chains. be modified with the space-saver wheel fitted.Avoid sudden starting or stopping, sharp or fast turns.The overall duration of the WARNING space-saver spare wheel is of about 3000 km, after which the relevant tyre must be replaced Incorrectly fitting the wheel cap may with another one of the same type. Never cause it to fall off when the vehicle is in install a standard tyre on a rim that is designed motion. Never tamper with the inflating valve. for use with a space-saver wheel. Have the Never introduce tools of any kind between wheel repaired and refitted as soon as possible. rim and tyre. Check tyre and space-saver wheel Two or more space-saver wheels should never pressures regularly, complying with the values be used together. Do not grease the threads given in the "Technical specifications" chapter. of wheel studs before fitting them: they might slip out.
185 JACK ❒ using the wrench A fig. 146 located in the tool
GETTING TO KNOW box, loosen the locking device, take the tool box B YOURPlease CAR note that: and place it close to the wheel to be replaced. ❒ the jack weight is 1,76 kg; Then take the space-saver wheel C; SAFETY ❒ the jack requires no adjustment; STARTING AND DRIVING❒ the jack cannot be repaired and in the event of a fault it must be replaced by another original one; WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES❒ no tool other than its cranking device may be INfitted AN on the jack. EMERGENCY To change a wheel, proceed as follows: SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE❒ Stop the car in a position that is not dangerous for
TECHNICALoncoming traffic where you can change the wheel SPECIFICATIONSsafely. The ground must be flat and sufficiently
compact;INDEX ❒ switch off the engine, pull up the handbrake and engage the 1st gear or reverse. Wear the reflective safety jacket (compulsory by law) before getting out of the car; ❒ open the luggage compartment, pull tab A fig. 145 fig. 145 F0Y0083 and lift up the mat B;
fig. 146 F0Y0096 186 ❒ take the wrench A fig. 147 and loosen the fixing ❒ place the wedge behind the wheel diagonally
studs by about one turn. For versions with alloy opposite the one to be replaced (see fig. 149) to GETTING TO KNOW rims, shake the car to facilitate detachment of the prevent the car from moving when it is raised; YOUR CAR rim from the wheel hub; ❒ position the jack under the car, near the wheel to SAFETY ❒ take the wedge A from the tool box and open it as be changed; STARTING AND shown in the diagram in fig. 148; ❒ insert the wrench A fig. 147 to extend the jack DRIVING
until the top of the jack B fits correctly into the WARNING LIGHTS sidemember C (next to the mark on the AND MESSAGES
sidemember itself); IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 147 F0Y0093
fig. 148 F0Y0211 fig. 149 F0Y0212 187 ❒ alert other passengers that the car is about to be ❒ take the wrench A fig. 147 and fully tighten the
GETTING TO KNOWraised; all persons should be kept away from the fixing studs; YOUR CAR car until it has been lowered; ❒ operate the jack handle D to lower the car. Then ❒SAFETYfit handle D fig. 150 into the housing in device A, extract the jack; operate the jack and raise the car until the wheel ❒ STARTING AND use the wrench A to fully tighten the studs in a DRIVINGis a few centimetres from the ground; criss-cross fashion as per the numerical sequence ❒ WARNING LIGHTSremove the wheel cap after loosening the 4 fixing illustrated in fig. 151; AND MESSAGESstuds and finally loosen the fifth stud and extract ❒ when replacing a wheel with alloy rim it is the wheel (only for versions with wheel caps fixed IN AN advisable to place it with the aesthetic part facing EMERGENCYby studs); upwards. SERVICING❒ make AND sure the contact surfaces between MAINTENANCE Restore the standard wheel as soon as possible, space-saver wheel and hub are clean so that the because, once placed in the associated compartment, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSfixing studs will not come loose; the luggage compartment load platform is rendered ❒ fit the space-saver wheel by inserting the first stud uneven as the standard wheel is larger than the forINDEX two threads into the hole closest to the valve; space-saver wheel. ❒ tighten the stud by some threads and proceed in the same way for the others;
B
fig. 150 F0Y0014 fig. 151 F0Y0013 188 REFITTINGTHE STANDARD WHEEL Versions with alloy wheels
GETTING TO KNOW Following the procedure described previously, raise Proceed as follows: YOUR CAR the car and remove the space-saver wheel. ❒ insert the wheel on the hub and using the wrench provided tighten the studs; SAFETY Versions with steel rims ❒ STARTING AND lower the car and remove the jack; DRIVING Proceed as follows: ❒ using the wrench provided, fully tighten the 5 studs WARNING LIGHTS ❒ make sure the contact surfaces between standard in the sequence shown; AND MESSAGES wheel and hub are clean so that the fixing studs ❒ reinstall the hub cap, taking care to position the 3 IN AN will not come loose; plastic pins in the dedicated seats on the wheel. EMERGENCY ❒ fit the standard wheel inserting the 5 studs into SERVICING AND Slightly press the cap to prevent any damage to the MAINTENANCE the holes; plastic pins. TECHNICAL ❒ press-fit the hub cap, aligning the special splining SPECIFICATIONS (on the cap) with the inflation valve; IMPORTANT If it is not fitted properly, the hub cap may detach itself when the car is running. INDEX ❒ using the wrench provided, tighten the fixing studs; ❒ lower the car and remove the jack; After tyre replacement ❒ using the wrench provided, fully tighten the studs ❒ stow the space-saver wheel in the compartment in the sequence shown previously. provided in the boot; ❒ insert the jack and the other tools in the container; ❒ arrange the container and tools on the space-saver wheel; ❒ correctly reposition the boot stiff cover.
189 "Fix&Go Automatic" kit ❒ instruction brochure (see fig. 155), to be used for GETTING TO KNOW prompt and correct use of the tyre quick repair YOURThere CAR is a dedicated container fig. 152 (versions kit and then to be handed to the personnel without subwoofer) or fig. 153 (versions with charged with handling the treated tyre; SAFETY subwoofer - for versions/markets, where provided) ❒ a pair of protective gloves located in the side STARTINGlocated AND in the luggage compartment. The container DRIVING compartment of the compressor; also contains a screwdriver and the tow hook. ❒ adapters for inflating different elements. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESThe kit also contains: ❒ INa cylinder AN A fig. 154 containing sealer and fitted EMERGENCYwith: SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE❒ filling pipe B; ❒ TECHNICALsticker C bearing the notice “max. 80 km/h”, to be SPECIFICATIONSplaced in a position visible to the driver (on the
instrumentINDEX panel) after fixing the tyre; ❒ a compressor D including a pressure gauge and connections, found in the compartment;
fig. 153 F0Y0176
fig. 152 F0Y0135 fig. 154 F0Y0012 190 WARNING WARNING GETTING TO KNOW Give the instructions brochure to the Holes and damage on the tyre side walls YOUR CAR
technicians who will be handling the cannot be repaired. Do not use the SAFETY tyre that was repaired using the tyre quick tyre quick repair kit if the tyre is damaged as a repair kit. result of driving with it deflated. STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES WARNING In the event of a puncture caused by IN AN foreign bodies, the kit may be used to Repairs are not possible in the case of EMERGENCY repair tyres showing damages on the SERVICING AND damage to the wheel rim (bad groove MAINTENANCE track or shoulder up to max 4 mm diameter. distortion causing air loss). Do not remove the TECHNICAL foreign body (screw or nail) from the tyre. SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX WARNING Do not operate the compressor for longer than 20 consecutive minutes. Risk of overheating.Tyres repaired with the quick tyre repair kit must only be used temporarily.
fig. 155 F0Y0011 191 WARNING Proceed as follows: GETTING TO KNOW ❒ YOUR CAR Pull up the handbrake. Unscrew the tyre valve The cylinder contains ethyl glycol. cap, take out the flexible filler pipe A fig. 156 and Contains latex: may cause an allergic SAFETY tighten the ring nut B on the tyre valve; reaction. Harmful if swallowed. Eye irritant. ❒ make sure that the compressor switch A fig. 157 is STARTINGMay AND cause irritation if inhaled or on contact. DRIVINGAvoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. In the in position 0 (off), start the engine, plug into the WARNINGevent LIGHTS of contact, wash immediately with plenty power socket in the central tunnel or the luggage AND MESSAGESof water. If ingested, do not induce vomiting. compartment fig. 158 and operate the compressor, turning switch A to position I (on). Inflate the RinseIN AN out your mouth, drink large quantities of EMERGENCYwater and seek immediate medical attention. tyre to the pressure specified in the "Inflation SERVICING AND pressure" paragraph in the "Technical MAINTENANCEKeep away from children.The product must not be used by asthmatics. Do not inhale the specifications" section. Check tyre pressure on TECHNICAL gauge B with compressor off to obtain a more SPECIFICATIONSvapours during insertion and suction. Call a doctor immediately if allergic reactions are precise reading; noted.INDEX Store the canister in its proper compartment, away from sources of heat.The sealant fluid has an expiry date. Replace the bottle containing out-of-date sealant fluid.
Dispose of the bottle and the sealant liquid properly. Have the sealing fluid and the cylinder disposed of in compliance with national and local regulations.
INFLATING PROCEDURE
WARNING Put on the protective gloves provided together with quick tyre repair kit. fig. 156 F0Y0010 192 ❒ if after five minutes it is still impossible to reach at ❒ if after this operation you still cannot reach at least
least 1.8 bar, disengage the compressor from the 1.8 bar after 5 minutes from switching on the GETTING TO KNOW valve and power socket, then move the car compressor, do not resume driving but contact a YOUR CAR forwards by approx. ten metres in order Fiat Dealership; to distribute the sealing fluid inside the tyre evenly, SAFETY then repeat the inflation operation; STARTING AND WARNING DRIVING
Apply the adhesive label where it can be WARNING LIGHTS easily seen by the driver as a reminder AND MESSAGES that the tyre has been treated with the tyre IN AN quick repair kit. Drive carefully, particularly on EMERGENCY SERVICING AND bends. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Do not MAINTENANCE accelerate or brake suddenly. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
❒ after driving for about 10 minutes stop and check INDEX the tyre pressure again; pull up the handbrake; For the safety of the car when it is parked, follow the indication in the paragraph "When parked" in the chapter "Starting up and driving" . fig. 157 F0Y0009
fig. 158 F0Y0092 193 WARNING CHECKING AND RESTORINGTYRE GETTING TO KNOW PRESSURE YOUR CARIf the pressure has fallen below 1.8 bar, The compressor can also be used to check and, if SAFETYdo not drive any further: the automatic tyre quick repair kit cannot guarantee the necessary, adjust the tyre pressure. Release quick connector A fig. 159 and connect it directly to the STARTINGcorrect AND hold because the tyre is too damaged. DRIVINGContact a Fiat Dealership. valve of the tyre to be inflated. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
❒INif a AN pressure value of at least 1.8 bar is detected, EMERGENCYrestore the correct pressure (with the engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCErunning and the handbrake engaged), resume driving and drive with great care to the nearest TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFiat Dealership.
INDEX WARNING Inform the dealership that the tyre has been repaired using the tyre quick repair kit. Give the instruction booklet to the personnel charged with handling the treated tyre.
fig. 159 F0Y0008 194 REPLACINGTHE BOTTLE CHANGING A BULB GETTING TO KNOW Proceed as follows: YOUR CAR GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ❒ disconnect connection A fig. 160; ❒ SAFETY ❒ Before changing a bulb check the contacts for turn the cylinder to be replaced anticlockwise and oxidation; raise it; STARTING AND ❒ burnt bulbs must be replaced by others of the DRIVING ❒ fit the new cylinder and turn it clockwise; same type and power; WARNING LIGHTS ❒ AND MESSAGES connect connection A to the cylinder and insert ❒ after replacing a headlight bulb, always check the the transparent pipe B into its housing. IN AN correct alignment of the light beam; EMERGENCY ❒ when a light is not working, check that the SERVICING AND corresponding fuse is intact before changing a bulb. MAINTENANCE
For the location of fuses, refer to the paragraph TECHNICAL “If a fuse blows” in this section; SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX WARNING Modifications or repairs to the electric system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system technical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.
WARNING Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas, in the case of breakage they may burst causing glass fragments to be projected outwards.
fig. 160 F0Y0007 195 IMPORTANT When the weather is cold or damp or Halogen bulbs must be handled holding GETTING TO KNOW after heavy rain or washing, the surface of headlights YOUR CARthe metal part only.Touching the or rear lights, may steam up and/or form drops of transparent part of the bulb with your condensation on the inside. This is a natural fingersSAFETY may reduce the intensity of the emitted phenomenon due to the difference in temperature light and even reduce the lifespan of the bulb. In STARTING AND and humidity between the inside and the outside DRIVINGthe event of accidental contact, wipe the bulb of the glass which does not indicate a fault and does WARNINGwith LIGHTS a cloth moistened with alcohol and let the not compromise the normal operation of lighting AND MESSAGESbulb dry. devices. The mist disappears quickly when the lights IN AN are turned on, starting from the centre of the EMERGENCY diffuser, extending progressively towards the edges. SERVICING ANDWhere possible, it is advisable to have MAINTENANCEbulbs changed at a Fiat Dealership.The TECHNICALcorrect operation and direction of the SPECIFICATIONSexternal lights are absolutely essential for the
safetyINDEX of the car and of compliance with the law.
196 TYPES OF BULBS Various types of bulbs are fitted to your car: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SAFETY (type A) press-fitted. Pull to remove. All-glass bulbs: STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY Bayonet type bulbs: (type B) to remove them press the SERVICING AND bulb and turn it anticlockwise. MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX Tubular bulbs: (type C) release them from their contacts to remove.
Halogen bulbs: (type D) to remove the bulb, release the clip holding the bulb in place.
Halogen bulbs: (type E) to remove the bulb, release the clip holding the bulb in place.
197 Lights GETTING TOUse KNOW Type Power Ref. Figure YOUR CAR Dipped/main beam headlights H7 55W D SAFETY Front side lights/Day lights (DRL) W21/5W 21W/5W B STARTING AND DRIVINGRear side lights/Brake lights P21/5 W 21W/5W B
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESFront direction indicators WY21W 21 W B
SideIN direction AN indicators WY5W 5 W A EMERGENCY Rear direction indicators P21W 21 W B SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 3° Stop LED – – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFog lights H11 55W E
ReverseINDEX W16W 16 W B Rear fog lights W16W 16 W B Number plate C5W 5 W C Front roof light C5W 5 W C Front roof lights (sun visors) C5W 5 W C Luggage compartment roof light W5W 5 W A Glove compartment light C5W 5 W C Rear courtesy lights C5W 5 W C
198 REPLACING EXTERIOR BULBS DIRECTION INDICATORS GETTING TO KNOW For the type of bulb and power rating, see “Changing To change the bulb, proceed as follows: YOUR CAR a bulb" paragraph. ❒ remove cover A fig. 161; SAFETY ❒ turn bulb holder B fig. 162 clockwise, extract bulb FRONT UPPER LIGHT CLUSTER STARTING AND C and replace it; DRIVING This contains the bulbs for direction indicators and ❒ refit the new bulb on the bulb holder, making sure WARNING LIGHTS dipped beams. it is correctly locked; AND MESSAGES
The bulbs are arranged as follows fig. 161: ❒ refit the bulb holder in its housing and turn it IN AN EMERGENCY A Direction indicators clockwise, until the locking click is heard; ❒ SERVICING AND B Dipped beam headlights then refit the cover A fig. 161. MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 161 F0Y0021 fig. 162 F0Y0022 199 DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS FRONT LOWER LIGHT CLUSTER
GETTING TO KNOW YOURTo change CAR the bulb, proceed as follows: This contains the bulbs for the main beams and side ❒ remove cover B fig. 161; lights/daytime running lights (DRL). SAFETY ❒ remove the connector + bulb holder C fig. 163 The bulbs are arranged as follows fig. 164: STARTING AND DRIVINGunit, releasing it outwards; C Main beam headlights ❒ remove bulb D from connector E and replace it; D Side lights/daytime running lights (DRL) WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES❒ refit the new bulb on the connector, making sure it INis correctly AN locked; EMERGENCY ❒ refit the connector + bulb holder C unit in its SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEhousing;
TECHNICAL❒ then refit the cover B fig. 161. SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 163 F0Y0023 fig. 164 F0Y0024 200 MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS SIDE LIGHTS/DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
(DRL) GETTING TO KNOW To change the bulb, proceed as follows: YOUR CAR ❒ steer the wheel completely inwards; To change the bulb, proceed as follows: ❒ SAFETY ❒ undo the screws A fig. 165 and remove the flap B; steer the wheel completely inwards; ❒ undo the screws A fig. 165 and remove the flap B; STARTING AND ❒ remove cover C fig. 164; DRIVING ❒ remove cover D fig. 164; ❒ remove the connector + bulb holder D fig. 166 WARNING LIGHTS unit, releasing it outwards; ❒ turn bulb holder E fig. 167 clockwise, extract bulb AND MESSAGES ❒ F from connector G and replace it; IN AN remove the bulb E from connector F and replace EMERGENCY it; ❒ refit the new bulb on the connector, making sure it SERVICING AND ❒ refit the new bulb on the connector, making sure it is correctly locked; MAINTENANCE
is correctly locked; ❒ refit the bulb holder unit E in its housing and turn TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ❒ refit the connector + bulb holder D unit in its it clockwise, until the locking click is heard; housing; ❒ finally refit cover D fig. 164. INDEX ❒ finally refit cover C fig. 164.
fig. 165 F0Y0145 fig. 166 F0Y0025 201 SIDE DIRECTION INDICATORS ❒ turn the bulb holder C anticlockwise, extract bulb
GETTING TO KNOW D and replace it; YOURTo change CAR the bulb, proceed as follows: ❒ refit the bulb holder C in the lens A and turn it ❒ adjust the lens A fig. 168 to compress in the SAFETY clockwise; internal catch B fig. 169, then pull the cluster ❒ STARTINGoutwards; AND refit the cluster making sure that the internal catch DRIVING B clips into position.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 167 F0Y0026
fig. 168 F0Y0147 fig. 169 F0Y0171 202 FOG LIGHTS To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
(for versions/markets, where provided) ❒ GETTING TO KNOW take the Allen key A fig. 172 provided; YOUR CAR To change the bulb, proceed as follows: ❒ operate tab B fig. 173 and remove protective cover ❒ steer the wheel completely inwards; C (located in the side area of the luggage SAFETY compartment); ❒ STARTING AND undo the screws A fig. 170 and remove the flap B; DRIVING ❒ adjust the catch C fig. 171 and disconnect the WARNING LIGHTS electrical connector D; AND MESSAGES
❒ turn and remove the bulb holder E; IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ release the bulb and replace it; SERVICING AND ❒ refit the new lamp and carry out the procedure MAINTENANCE
described previously in reverse. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS INDEX These contain the bulbs for the side lights, brake lights and direction indicators.
fig. 171 F0Y0033
fig. 170 F0Y0148 fig. 172 F0Y0149 203 ❒ use Allen key A to unscrew fixing devices D ❒ disconnect the electrical connector, undo the
GETTING TO KNOWfig. 174 of the rear light cluster; fixing screws E fig. 176 and remove the bulb holder YOUR CAR ❒ extract the light cluster by removing it with both assembly; SAFETYhands in the direction indicated by the arrows ❒ replace the concerned bulb: F = direction fig. 175; indicators, G = side lights/brake lights fig. 177. STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 173 F0Y0150 fig. 175 F0Y0151
fig. 174 F0Y0258 fig. 176 F0Y0027 204 FIXED REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS ❒ refit bulb holder C in the lens turning it clockwise
and reconnect the electrical connector; GETTING TO KNOW They contain the rear fog light bulbs (left side) and YOUR CAR reverse light bulbs (right side). ❒ refit the light cluster B fig. 178 correctly by tightening the four fixing screws A, then close the SAFETY To change the bulb, proceed as follows: luggage compartment. ❒ STARTING AND open the luggage compartment, remove the trim DRIVING frame, undo the four fixing screws A fig. 178 and WARNING LIGHTS remove light cluster B; AND MESSAGES ❒ disconnect the electrical connector and rotate IN AN bulb holder C anticlockwise fig. 179; EMERGENCY
❒ SERVICING AND remove bulb D from the bulb holder and replace MAINTENANCE it; TECHNICAL ❒ refit the new bulb on the bulb holder, making sure SPECIFICATIONS it is correctly locked; INDEX
fig. 178 F0Y0032
fig. 177 F0Y0028 fig. 179 F0Y0029 205 THIRD BRAKE LIGHTS ❒ Insert the new bulb B and make sure that it is
GETTING TO KNOW correctly clamped between the contacts; YOURThese CAR are located in the tailgate and are LED lights. For replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. ❒ finally refit lens A fig. 180. SAFETY NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS STARTING AND DRIVING To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES❒ remove lens A fig. 180; ❒ INreplace AN the bulb B fig. 181 releasing it from the EMERGENCYside contacts; SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 180 F0Y0030 fig. 181 F0Y0031 206 REPLACING INTERIOR BULBS ❒ correctly fit the new bulbs in the relevant housings B; GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR FRONT ROOF LIGHT ❒ fit roof light A fig. 182 in its housing making sure it is locked. SAFETY Versions without rear seat surveillance mirror STARTING AND To change the bulbs, proceed as follows: DRIVING ❒ WARNING LIGHTS remove the roof light A fig. 182 working at the AND MESSAGES points indicated by the arrows; IN AN ❒ undo the bulb housings B fig. 183 and remove EMERGENCY
them by extracting outwards, then replace bulbs SERVICING AND C; MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 182 F0Y0193 fig. 183 F0Y0192 207 Versions with rear seat surveillance mirror Versions with fixed glass roof or electric
GETTING TO(for KNOW versions/markets, where provided) sun roof YOUR CAR To change the bulbs, proceed as follows: To remove the roof light and replace the bulbs go to ❒SAFETYwork in area A and bring mirror B in operating a Fiat Dealership.
STARTINGposition; AND DRIVING REAR ROOF LIGHT ❒ undo the screw and remove fixing covering cap C WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESfig. 184; Versions without sun roof ❒ working from the rear area pull the roof light To change the bulbs, proceed as follows: IN AN EMERGENCYdownwards and release it ❒ operate in the point shown by the arrows and SERVICING AND remove roof light A fig. 185; MAINTENANCEFor refitting carry out the operations reversing the order above. ❒ open the flap C fig. 186 and replace the bulb B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFor bulb replacement refer to paragraph "Versions releasing it from the side contacts; without rear seat surveillance mirror". ❒ INDEX Insert the new bulb and make sure that it is correctly clamped between the contacts. ❒ refit the roof light A fig. 185 by inserting it in its correct position firstly on one side and then pressing on the other until it clicks into place.
fig. 184 F0Y0224 fig. 185 F0Y0103 208 Versions with sun roof ❒ refit the roof light A fig. 187 by inserting it in its
(for versions/markets, where provided) correct position firstly on one side and then GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR To change the bulbs, proceed as follows: pressing on the other until it clicks into place. ❒ operate in the point shown by the arrow and SAFETY
remove roof light A fig. 187; STARTING AND DRIVING ❒ replace the bulb B fig. 188 releasing it from the WARNING LIGHTS side contacts; AND MESSAGES ❒ Insert the new bulb and make sure that it is IN AN correctly clamped between the contacts. EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 187 F0Y0261
fig. 186 F0Y0104 fig. 188 F0Y0194 209 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOF LIGHT GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
GETTING TO KNOW YOURTo replace CAR the bulb, proceed as follows: To change the bulbs, proceed as follows: ❒ open the luggage compartment and extract the ❒ open the glove compartment and extract the roof SAFETYroof light A fig. 189 working in the point shown light A fig. 190; STARTINGby AND the arrow; ❒ open the protection B and replace the bulb; DRIVING❒ open the protection B and replace the bulb; ❒ re-close the protection B on the lens; WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES❒ re-close the protection B on the lens; ❒ refit the roof light A by inserting it in its correct ❒INrefit AN the roof light A by inserting it in its correct position firstly on one side and then pressing on EMERGENCYposition firstly on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEthe other side until it clicks into place.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 189 F0Y0105 fig. 190 F0Y0106 210 REPLACING FUSES WARNING GETTING TO KNOW GENERAL INFORMATION If the replaced fuse blows again, contact YOUR CAR a Fiat Dealership. Fuses protect the electrical system: they intervene SAFETY
(blow) in the event of a failure or improper STARTING AND intervention on the system. DRIVING WARNING WARNING LIGHTS When a device does not work, check the condition AND MESSAGES of its protective fuse: the conductor element A Never replace a fuse with metal wires or anything else. IN AN fig. 191 must be intact. If it is not, replace the blown EMERGENCY fuse with another with the same amperage (same SERVICING AND colour). MAINTENANCE
B = intact fuse; WARNING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS C = fuse with damaged conductor element. Never replace a fuse with another with To replace a fuse, use the pliers D hooked inside the a higher amp rating; DANGER OF FIRE. INDEX engine compartment fuse box cover. Refer to the tables on the following pages to identify the specific protective fuse. WARNING If a general fuse (MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE, MAXI-FUSE) blows contact a Fiat Dealership.
fig. 191 F0Y0091 211 WARNING IMPORTANT Before removing cover B press and GETTING TO KNOW turn the two bayonet screws A slowly anticlockwise YOUR CARBefore replacing a fuse, make sure that (using the flat tip screwdriver provided) until unlocking them. This is shown by the screw heads SAFETYthe ignition key has been removed and that all the other services are switched off lifting. STARTINGand/or AND disengaged. DRIVING The number identifying the electrical component corresponding to each fuse is shown on the cover. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES After replacing the fuse, make sure you close cover B WARNING on the fusebox. IN AN EMERGENCYIf a general protection fuse for safety SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEsystems (airbag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, transmission TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSsystem) or steering system is triggered, contact a Fiat Dealership. INDEX
FUSE LOCATION
Engine compartment fuse box This is located by the side of the battery fig. 193. To access the fuses, proceed as follows: ❒ undo the two screws A fig. 192; ❒ remove cover B in the direction indicated by the arrow.
fig. 192 F0Y0071 212 If it is necessary to wash the engine GETTING TO KNOW compartment, take care not to directly hit YOUR CAR the fuse box and the window wiper motors with the water jet. SAFETY
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 193 F0Y0072 213 Dashboard fuse box
GETTING TO KNOW YOURThe fusesCAR are located in the fuse box shown in fig. 194. To access the fuses, remove flap A.
SAFETY
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 194 F0Y0280
214 Luggage compartment fuse box
GETTING TO KNOW The fuses are in the fuse box shown in fig. 195, located on the left side of the luggage compartment. YOUR CAR To access the fuses operate in the point shown by the arrow and remove flap A. SAFETY
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 195 F0Y0177
215 ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX
GETTING TOfig. KNOW 193 YOUR CAR USERS FUSE AMPERE HornSAFETY F10 15
STARTING AND DRIVINGHeated rear window F20 30
WARNINGCigar LIGHTS lighter/Front power socket F85 15 AND MESSAGES Luggage compartment power socket F86 15 IN AN EMERGENCYExternal mirror defrosters F88 7,5 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
216 DASHBOARD FUSE BOX fig. 194 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR USERS FUSE AMPERE Rear electric window (left side) F33 20 SAFETY
STARTING AND Rear electric window (right side) F34 20 DRIVING
+30 Radio, UConnect®, rear courtesy lights WARNING LIGHTS F36 10 AND MESSAGES (right and left)
IN AN Central locking F38 20 EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND Two-way windscreen washer pump F43 20 MAINTENANCE
Front electric window (driver side) F47 20 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Front electric window (passenger side) F48 20 INDEX Main beam headlight (left side) F90 7,5 Main beam headlight (right side) F91 7,5 Fog light (left side) F92 7,5 Fog light (right side) F93 7,5
217 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX
GETTING TOfig. KNOW 195 YOUR CAR USERS FUSE AMPERE SAFETY Front seat electric lumbar regulator F1 15 STARTING AND DRIVINGFront seat electrical heater F2 15
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESHI-FI system F3 20
ElectricIN AN sun roof blind F5 20 EMERGENCY Electric sun roof F6 20 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
218 BATTERY RECHARGING ❒ connect the negative cable (–) of the battery charger to the pin D of the negative battery GETTING TO KNOW IMPORTANT The battery recharging procedure is terminal (–); YOUR CAR given as information only. You are advised to contact ❒ turn on the battery charger. When it is recharged, SAFETY a Fiat Dealership to have this operation carried turn the charger off before disconnecting it from out. STARTING AND the battery; DRIVING ❒ Low amperage slow recharging for approximately 24 reconnect the connector A fig. 196 to the sensor WARNING LIGHTS hours is advised. Charging for a longer time may C of the battery. AND MESSAGES damage the battery. IN AN EMERGENCY WARNING VERSIONS WITHOUT Start&Stop SYSTEM SERVICING AND (for versions/markets, where provided) Battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive: MAINTENANCE avoid contact with your skin and eyes. TECHNICAL Charge the battery as follows: The battery should be charged in a well SPECIFICATIONS ❒ disconnect the negative battery terminal; ventilated place, away from naked flames or INDEX ❒ connect the charger cables to the battery possible sources of sparks: danger of explosion terminals, observing the polarity; and fire. ❒ turn on the charger; ❒ when finished, turn the charger off before disconnecting the battery; ❒ reconnect the negative battery terminal.
VERSIONS WITH Start&Stop SYSTEM (for versions/markets, where provided) Charge the battery as follows: ❒ disconnect connector A fig. 196 (pressing button B) from battery status monitoring sensor C (fitted on the negative battery terminal D); ❒ connect the positive cable (+) of the battery charger to the battery positive terminal (+); fig. 196 F0Y0153 219 WARNING RAISING THE CAR GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARDo not try to recharge a frozen battery; If the car needs to be jacked up, go to a Fiat Dealership which is equipped with shop jacks and SAFETYdefrost it first to prevent the risk of explosion. If the battery was frozen, have it jack arms. STARTINGinspected AND by specialised technicians before DRIVINGrecharging to check that the internal elements WARNING WARNINGare LIGHTS not damaged and that the casing is not AND MESSAGEScracked, which could cause poisonous, corrosive Lift the car exclusively by positioning acidIN AN to leak. the jack arms or the shop jack in the EMERGENCY points illustrated fig. 197. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 197 F0Y0266 220 TOWING THE CAR WARNING GETTING TO KNOW The tow hook, which is supplied with the car, is Before towing, turn the ignition key to YOUR CAR housed in the tool box, under the mat in the luggage MAR and then to STOP without SAFETY compartment. removing it.The steering column will automatically lock when the key is removed and STARTING AND ATTACHINGTHETOW HOOK the wheels cannot be steered. DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS Manually remove cap A fig. 198 (front bumper) or A AND MESSAGES fig. 199 (rear bumper) pressing the lower part; IN AN take the tow hook B fig. 198 (front bumper) or B WARNING EMERGENCY fig. 199 (rear bumper) from its housing in the tool Before tightening the hook clean the SERVICING AND box and tighten it completely on the front or rear MAINTENANCE threaded housing thoroughly. Make sure threaded pin. TECHNICAL that the hook is fully fastened in the housing SPECIFICATIONS before towing the car. INDEX
fig. 198 F0Y0143 fig. 199 F0Y0144 221 WARNING WARNING GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWhilst towing, remember that the The front and rear tow hooks should be
SAFETYassistance of the brake servo and the used only for emergencies on the road. electric power steering is not available, You are allowed to tow the vehicle for short STARTINGtherefore AND greater force needs to be exerted on distances using an appropriate device in DRIVINGthe brake pedal and more effort is required accordance with the highway code (a rigid bar), WARNINGon LIGHTS the steering wheel. Do not use flexible cables to move the vehicle on the road in readiness AND MESSAGESwhen towing and avoid jerky movements. Make for towing or transport via a breakdown vehicle. sureIN AN not to damage parts in contact with the Tow hooks MUST NOT be used to tow vehicles EMERGENCYcar while towing.When towing the vehicle, you off the road or where there are obstacles and/or SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEmust comply with all specific traffic regulations for towing operations using cables or other and adopt an appropriate driving behaviour. non-rigid devices. In compliance with the above TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSDo not start the engine while towing the car. conditions, towing must take place with the two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) INDEX aligned as much as possible along the same centre line.
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SCHEDULED SERVICING Scheduled Servicing is offered by all Fiat Dealerships SAFETY according to a set time schedule. If, during each STARTING AND Correct servicing is essential in guaranteeing a long operation, in addition to the ones scheduled, the DRIVING life for the car under the best conditions. need arises for further replacements or repairs, WARNING LIGHTS Fiat has therefore arranged a series of checks and these may be carried out only with the explicit AND MESSAGES agreement of the Customer. If your car is maintenance operations to be carried out every IN AN EMERGENCY 30,000 kilometres (for petrol versions) or every used frequently for towing, the interval between one service operation and the next should be reduced. 35,000 kilometres (for diesel versions). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Check the items on the Scheduled Servicing Plan WARNING TECHNICAL (e.g. periodically check level of liquids, tyre pressure, SPECIFICATIONS etc.) before 30,000/35,000 km and between these At 2000 km from the next service operation the services deadlines. display will show a message. INDEX The Scheduled Servicing intervals are set out by the Manufacturer. Failure to comply with the schedule may invalidate the warranty. It is advisable to inform a Fiat Dealership of any small operating irregularities without waiting for the next service.
223 SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN GETTING TO KNOW YOURPETROLVERSIONS CAR
ServicingSAFETY must be performed every 30,000 km or 24 months.
STARTINGThousands AND of miles 18 36 54 72 90 108 DRIVING Thousands of kilometres 30 60 90 120 150 180 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESMonths 24 48 72 96 120 144 IN AN EMERGENCYCheck battery charge status and recharge if necessary ●●●●●●
SERVICINGCheck AND tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure, if required ●●●●●● MAINTENANCE Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSwarning lights, luggage compartment, passenger compartment, glove ●●●●●● compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.) INDEX Check operation of windscreen washer system and adjust jets if necessary ●●●●●● Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rear window wiper blades ●●●●●●
Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment locks, as well as ●●●●●● cleanliness and lubrication of linkages Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, ●●●●●● bushes, etc.)
Check condition and wear of front disc brake pads and operation of pad wear ●●●●●● indicator
Check condition and wear of rear disc brake pads and operation of pad wear ●●●●●● indicator
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (engine cooling, hydraulic clutch/ ●●●●●● brakes, windscreen washer, battery, etc.)
224 Thousands of miles 18 36 54 72 90 108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR Thousands of kilometres 30 60 90 120 150 180 Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 SAFETY
●●STARTING AND Visual check of accessory drive belt(s) (versions without automatic tensioner) DRIVING
Check tensioning of accessory drive belt (versions without automatic tensioner) ●●WARNING LIGHTS (or every 24 months) AND MESSAGES
Check toothed timing belt conditions (excluding 0.9 TwinAir Turbo 105 HP ●●IN AN EMERGENCY engine) SERVICING AND Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if required ●●●●●● MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL Check exhaust emissions/smokiness ●●●●●● SPECIFICATIONS
Check engine control system operation (through diagnosis socket) ●●●●●● INDEX Check manual gearbox oil level ●● Change spark plugs (*) ●●●●●● Replace accessory drive belt(s) ● Replace toothed timing belt (excluding 0.9 TwinAir Turbo 105 HP engine) (**) ● (*) For 0.9 TwinAir Turbo 105 HP versions, in order to guarantee correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine, it is essential to observe the following: (*) - only use spark plugs specifically certified for these engines; all spark plugs should be of the same type and brand (see the "Engine" paragraph in the "Technical Specifications" chapter); (*) - strictly comply with the spark plug replacement intervals detailed in the Scheduled Servicing Plan; (*) - it is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership for plug replacement. (**) Regardless of the distance covered, the timing belt must be changed every four years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, city driving, long periods of idling) or at least every five years in all other cases.
225 Thousands of miles 18 36 54 72 90 108 GETTING TO KNOW YOURThousands CAR of kilometres 30 60 90 120 150 180 MonthsSAFETY 24 48 72 96 120 144
STARTING AND DRIVINGChange air cleaner cartridge (every 30,000 km for 0.9 TwinAir Turbo 105 HP ●●● versions) WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESChange engine oil and replace oil filter (***) ●●●●●● IN AN EMERGENCYChange brake fluid (or every 24 months) ●●●
SERVICINGReplace AND pollen filter (or every 24 months) ●●●●●● MAINTENANCE (***) If the car’s annual mileage is less than 10,000 km, the engine oil and filter must be replaced every 12 months. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
226 DIESELVERSIONS
GETTING TO KNOW Servicing must be carried out every 35,000 km or 24 months. YOUR CAR
Thousands of miles 21 42 63 84 105 SAFETY Thousands of kilometres 35 70 105 140 175 STARTING AND DRIVING Months 24 48 72 96 120 WARNING LIGHTS Check battery charge status and recharge if necessary ●●●●●AND MESSAGES
Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure, if required ●●●●●IN AN EMERGENCY
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard SERVICING AND warning lights, luggage compartment, passenger compartment, glove ●●●●●MAINTENANCE compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Check operation of windscreen wiper/washer system and adjust jets, if ●●●●● necessary INDEX Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rear window wiper blades ●●●●●
Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment locks, as well as ●●●●● cleanliness and lubrication of linkages Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, ●●●●● bushes, etc.)
Check condition and wear of front disc brake pads and operation of pad wear ●●●●● indicator
Check condition and wear of rear disc brake pads and operation of pad wear ●●●●● indicator
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (engine cooling, hydraulic clutch/ ●●●●● brakes, windscreen washer, battery, etc.) Visual check of accessory drive belt(s) (versions without automatic tensioner) ●
227 Thousands of miles 21 42 63 84 105 GETTING TO KNOW YOURThousands CAR of kilometres 35 70 105 140 175 MonthsSAFETY 24 48 72 96 120
STARTINGCheck AND tensioning of accessory drive belt (versions without automatic tensioner) DRIVING ●● (or every 24 months) WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESCheck handbrake lever travel and adjust, if required ●●●●●
IN AN EMERGENCYCheck exhaust emissions/smokiness ●●●●●
SERVICINGCheck AND engine control system operation (through diagnosis socket) ●●●●● MAINTENANCE Check manual gearbox oil level ● TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Replace fuel filter cartridge ●● ReplaceINDEX accessory drive belt(s) ● Replace air cleaner cartridge ●●●●● Change engine oil and replace oil filter (*) (**) Change brake fluid (or every 24 months) ●● Replace pollen filter (or every 24 months) ●●●●● (*) If the car is used mainly for town driving, the engine oil and filter should be changed every 12 months. (**) The actual interval for changing the oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the car usage conditions and is signalled by the warning light or message (if present) in the instrument panel and must never exceed 24 months.
228 PERIODIC CHECKS HEAVY-DUTY USE OF THE CAR GETTING TO KNOW Every 1,000 km or before long journeys, check and, if If the car is mainly used in one of the following YOUR CAR necessary, restore the following: conditions: SAFETY ❒ engine coolant, brake fluid and windscreen washer ❒ towing a trailer or caravan; STARTING AND fluid level; ❒ dusty roads; DRIVING ❒ tyre inflation pressure and condition; ❒ short, repeated journeys (less than 7-8 km) at WARNING LIGHTS ❒ operation of lighting system (headlights, direction sub-zero outside temperatures; AND MESSAGES indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.); ❒ engine often idling or driving long distances at low IN AN EMERGENCY ❒ operation of screen washer/wiper system and speeds or long periods of idleness; SERVICING AND positioning/wear of windscreen/rear window wiper the following checks must be performed more MAINTENANCE blades. frequently than prescribed in the Scheduled Servicing TECHNICAL Every 3,000 km, check and top up, if required, the Plan: SPECIFICATIONS engine oil level. ❒ check front disc brake pad conditions and wear; INDEX ❒ check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage; ❒ visually inspect conditions of: engine, gearbox, transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and rubber elements (boots - sleeves - bushes - etc.); ❒ check battery charge and battery fluid level (electrolyte); ❒ visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belts; ❒ check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter; ❒ check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter; ❒ check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner.
229 CHECKING LEVELS When topping up, take care not to mix up GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR the various types of fluids: they are not WARNING compatible with each other and could SAFETY seriously damage the car. Never smoke while working in the STARTING AND DRIVINGengine compartment: gas and inflammable vapours may be present, with the WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESrisk of fire.
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND WARNING MAINTENANCE Be very careful when working in the TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSengine compartment when the engine is hot: you may get burned. Remember that the fanINDEX may start up if the engine is hot: this could injure you. Scarves, ties and other loose clothing might be pulled by moving parts.
230 0.9TwinAirTurbo 105 HP versions
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 200 F0Y0180 A. Engine oil plug/filler B. Engine oil dipstick C. Engine coolant D. Windscreen/rear window washer fluid E. Brake fluid F.Battery
231 1.4 16V versions
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 201 F0Y0181 A. Engine oil dipstick B. Engine oil plug/filler C. Engine coolant D. Windscreen/rear window washer fluid E. Brake fluid F.Battery
232 1.3 16V MultiJet versions
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 202 F0Y0182 A. Engine oil dipstick B. Engine oil plug/filler C. Engine coolant D. Windscreen/rear window washer fluid E. Brake fluid F.Battery
233 ENGINE OIL Engine oil consumption
GETTING TO KNOW YOURCheck CAR the oil level a few minutes (about 5) after the The maximum engine oil consumption is engine has stopped, with the vehicle parked on approximately 400 grams every 1,000 km. levelSAFETY ground. During the initial period of usage for the vehicle, the
STARTING AND engine is bedding in, therefore the engine oil DRIVINGFor 1.4 16V and 1.3 16V MultiJet versions consumption may settle down only after the first
WARNING LIGHTS 5,000 - 6,000 km. AND MESSAGESRemove the engine oil dipstick B, clean it with a lint-free cloth and reinsert it. Extract the engine oil IMPORTANT After adding or changing the oil, let the IN AN EMERGENCYdipstick again and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick. engine run for a few seconds and wait a few minutes SERVICING AND after switching it off before checking the level. MAINTENANCEThe range between the MIN and MAX marks
TECHNICALcorresponds to about 1 litre of oil. SPECIFICATIONS If the oil level is near or under the MIN line, add oil Do not add oil with characteristics that throughINDEX the filler A until it reaches the MAX line. are different from those of the oil currently in the engine. The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark. Used engine oil and oil filters contain substances which are harmful to the For 0.9TwinAir 105 HP versions environment.To change the oil and filters, The engine oil dipstick B is integral with plug A. we advise you to contact a Fiat Dealership. Loosen the plug, clean the dipstick with a lint-free cloth, reinsert the dipstick and re-tighten the plug. ENGINE COOLANT Unscrew the plug again and check that the engine oil The coolant level must be checked when the engine level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the is cold and must be between the MIN. and MAX. dipstick. marks on the reservoir. If the level is too low, undo the reservoir plug C (see previous pages) and add the fluid described in the chapter "Technical Specifications".
234 BRAKE FLUID PARAFLU UP anti-freeze is used in the GETTING TO KNOW engine cooling system. Use the same fluid Check that the liquid is at the maximum level (the YOUR CAR as in the cooling system when topping fluid level in the reservoir must not exceed the up. PARAFLU UP cannot be mixed with any other MAX. mark). SAFETY type of fluid. If this happens, do not start the If the fluid level in the tank is too low, undo the STARTING AND engine and contact a Fiat Dealership. reservoir plug E (see previous pages) and add the DRIVING
fluid described in the chapter "Technical WARNING LIGHTS Specifications". AND MESSAGES WARNING IN AN EMERGENCY The cooling system is pressurised. If Note Carefully clean the plug of the reservoir E and necessary, replace the plug with another the surrounding surface. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE of equivalent quality and the same When opening the plug, make sure that no dirt gets TECHNICAL specifications as the original, otherwise the into the reservoir. SPECIFICATIONS efficiency of the system may be adversely For topping-up, always use a funnel with integrated affected. Do not remove the reservoir plug when filter with mesh equal to or lower than 0.12 mm. INDEX the engine is hot: you risk scalding yourself. IMPORTANT Brake fluid is hygroscopic (i.e. it absorbs moisture). For this reason, if the car is WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW WASHER mainly used in areas with a high degree of FLUID atmospheric humidity, the fluid must be replaced at If the level is too low, raise the reservoir plug D (see more frequent intervals than specified in the previous pages) and add the fluid described in the “Scheduled Servicing Plan”. chapter "Technical Specifications". Prevent brake fluid, which is highly WARNING corrosive, from coming into contact with Do not travel with the windscreen painted parts. Should it happen, washer reservoir empty: the windscreen immediately wash with water. washer is essential for improving visibility. Some commercial windscreen washer additives are flammable.The engine compartment contains hot components which may set it on fire.
235 WARNING AIR CLEANER/POLLEN GETTING TO KNOW FILTER/DIESEL FILTER YOUR CARBrake fluid is poisonous and highly
SAFETYcorrosive. In the event of accidental For filter replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. contact, immediately wash the affected parts STARTINGwith AND water and neutral soap.Then rinse DRIVINGthoroughly. Call a doctor immediately if WARNINGswallowed. LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY WARNING SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE The symbol on the container indicates TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSa synthetic brake fluid, distinguishing it from the mineral type. Using a mineral-type fluidINDEX will damage the special rubber seals of the braking system beyond repair.
236 BATTERY IMPORTANT If the charge level remains under 50% for a long time, the battery is damaged by sulphation, GETTING TO KNOW The battery does not require the electrolyte to be reducing its capacity and efficiency at start-up. YOUR CAR topped up with distilled water. A periodic check, The battery will also be more at risk of freezing (this SAFETY which can be carried out at a Fiat Dealership is, can happen as early as -10°C). Refer to the paragraph however, necessary to check efficiency. STARTING AND "Car inactivity" in "Starting and driving" if the car is DRIVING left parked for a long time. REPLACINGTHE BATTERY WARNING LIGHTS If, after buying the car, you wish to install electrical AND MESSAGES If necessary, replace the battery with another of accessories which require permanent electrical equivalent quality and the same specifications as the supply (alarm, etc.) or accessories which influence IN AN EMERGENCY original. Follow the battery manufacturer’s the electrical supply requirements, contact a Fiat SERVICING AND instructions for maintenance. Dealership, whose qualified staff will evaluate the MAINTENANCE
overall electrical consumption. TECHNICAL USEFUL ADVICE FOR EXTENDINGTHE SPECIFICATIONS LIFE OFYOUR BATTERY WARNING INDEX To avoid draining your battery and make it last longer, observe the following instructions: Battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. ❒ when you park the car, ensure that the doors, Keep open flames away from the battery and tailgate and bonnet are closed properly, to prevent do not use objects that might create sparks: risk any roof lights from remaining on inside the of explosion and fire. passenger's compartment; ❒ switch off the internal roof lights. The car is, however, equipped with a system which switches WARNING the interior lights off automatically; ❒ do not keep accessories (e.g. sound system, hazard Using the battery with insufficient fluid lights, etc.) switched on for a long time when the irreparably damages the battery and engine is not running; may cause an explosion. ❒ before performing any operation on the electrical system, disconnect the negative battery cable; ❒ completely tighten the battery terminals.
237 BRAKES Incorrect installation of electrical and GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARelectronic devices may cause severe The car is equipped with 4 mechanical wear damage to your car.After purchasing your detection systems for brake pads: one for each wheel car,SAFETY if you wish to install any accessories assembly. (anti-theft, car phone, etc.), contact a Fiat STARTING AND When the brake linings are about to wear out, DRIVINGDealership, which will suggest the most pressing the brake pedal, a light hiss is heard: this appropriate devices for your vehicle, and will, WARNING LIGHTS indication lasts around 100 km (depending on the AND MESSAGESmost importantly, advise you if a higher capacity driving style and the route type). battery needs to be installed. IN AN EMERGENCY In these circumstances it is still possible, proceeding with caution, to carry on driving. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCEBatteries contain substances which are In any case, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as TECHNICALvery dangerous for the environment. For possible to have the worn brake pads replaced. SPECIFICATIONSbattery replacement, contact a Fiat
Dealership.INDEX
WARNING If the car will be unused for an extended period of time in extremely cold weather conditions, remove the battery and store it in a heated area to prevent it from freezing.
WARNING Always wear appropriate goggles when working on or near the battery.
238 WHEELS AND TYRES The tyres must be replaced when the tread is less than 1.6 mm thick. In any case, follow the laws GETTING TO KNOW Before long trips, and every two weeks, check the in force in the country where you are driving. YOUR CAR tyre and space-saver wheel inflation pressure (for SAFETY versions/markets, where provided). Check the tyres IMPORTANT when cold. STARTING AND Take the following precautions to prevent damage to DRIVING While driving the car, the pressure increases under the tyres: WARNING LIGHTS standard conditions: for the correct tyre inflation ❒ AND MESSAGES pressure, see "Wheels" paragraph in the "Technical avoid braking suddenly, racing starts and violent specifications" chapter. impact against the curb, potholes or other IN AN EMERGENCY obstacles and driving for extended periods on Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyre wear uneven road surfaces; SERVICING AND fig. 203: MAINTENANCE ❒ periodically check that the tyres have no cuts in TECHNICAL A normal pressure: tread evenly worn; the side wall, abnormal swelling or irregular tread SPECIFICATIONS B low pressure: tread particularly worn at the edges; wear; INDEX C high pressure: tread particularly worn in the ❒ avoid travelling with the car overloaded. If a tyre is centre. punctured, stop immediately and change it; ❒ tyres age even if they are not used much. Cracks in the tread rubber and at the sides are a sign of ageing. In any case, if the tyres have been on the car for over 6 years, they should be checked by specialised personnel. Also remember to check the space-saver wheel very carefully (for versions/markets, where provided); ❒ alternate the tyres, between front and rear, every 10-15 thousand kilometres, keeping them on the same side of the car so as not to reverse the direction of rotation; ❒ In the case of replacement, always fit new tyres, avoiding those of dubious origin; ❒ if a tyre is changed, also change the inflation valve.
fig. 203 F0Y0006 239 WARNING WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW GETTING TO KNOW WIPER YOUR CARThe road holding qualities of the car also depend on the correct inflation SAFETY BLADES pressure of the tyres. STARTING AND Replace the blades if the rubber edge is deformed or DRIVING worn. In any event, it is advisable to replace them WARNING LIGHTS approximately once a year. AND MESSAGES WARNING A few simple precautions can reduce the possibility IN AN EMERGENCYIf tyre pressure is too low, it may of damage to the blades: overheat and be severely damaged as a ❒ if the temperature falls below zero, make sure that SERVICINGresult. AND MAINTENANCE ice has not frozen the rubber against the glass. Use
TECHNICAL an antifreeze product to release it if required; SPECIFICATIONS ❒ remove any snow from the glass: in addition to INDEX WARNING protecting the blades, this prevents effort on Do not cross switch the tyres, moving the motor and over-heating; them from the right of the car to the ❒ do not operate the windscreen/rear window left and vice versa. wipers on dry glass.
WARNING WARNING Driving with worn windscreen/rear Do not repaint alloy wheel rims at window wiper blades is a serious hazard, temperatures higher than 150°C.The because visibility is reduced in bad weather. mechanical characteristics of the wheels might be compromised.
240 Lifting the wiper blades IMPORTANT Place the blades back in contact with
the windscreen before activating the windscreen GETTING TO KNOW If it is necessary to raise the blades from the wiper again and/or turning the ignition key to YOUR CAR windscreen (e.g. in the event of snow or if the blades MAR-ON. need replacement) proceed as follows: SAFETY ❒ turn ring nut A fig. 204 in position (windscreen Replacing the windscreen wiper blades STARTING AND wiper off); DRIVING Proceed as follows: ❒ ignition key turned to the OFF position; WARNING LIGHTS ❒ raise the wiper arm, press tab A fig. 205 of the AND MESSAGES ❒ after turning the ignition key to STOP, move for at attachment spring and remove the blade from IN AN EMERGENCY least half a second the right lever in unstable the arm; position within 2 minutes to activate the ❒ SERVICING AND windscreen wiper for a wiping section; fit the new blade, inserting the tab into the special MAINTENANCE slot in the arm, making sure that it is locked. ❒ TECHNICAL the previous operation can be repeated for a SPECIFICATIONS maximum of 3 times in order to move the blades ❒ lower the windscreen wiper arm on the in the most convenient position for their possible windscreen. INDEX replacement; ❒ to lower the blades again turn the key to MAR-ON. Do not operate the windscreen wiper with the blades lifted from the windscreen.
fig. 204 F0Y0049 fig. 205 F0Y0114 241 Replacing the rear window wiper blade SPRAY NOZZLES
GETTING TO KNOW YOURProceed CAR as follows: Windscreen washer ❒ raise cover A fig. 206, undo nut B and remove arm The window washer jets A fig. 207 are fixed. If there SAFETYC; is no jet of fluid, firstly check that there is fluid in
STARTING❒ AND the reservoir (see paragraph “Checking fluid levels” DRIVINGcorrectly position the new arm, fully tighten nut B then lower cover A. in this chapter). WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Then check that the nozzle holes are not clogged; use a needle to unblock them if necessary. IN AN EMERGENCY IMPORTANT In versions with a sun roof, make sure SERVICING AND that the sun roof is closed before operating the MAINTENANCE window washer jets. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 206 F0Y0208 fig. 207 F0Y0209 242 Rear window washer BODYWORK GETTING TO KNOW The rear window washer jets are fixed. The nozzle YOUR CAR holder is on the rear window fig. 208. PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS SAFETY
The car is equipped with the best available STARTING AND technological solutions to protect the bodywork DRIVING
against corrosion. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES These include: ❒ painting products and systems which give the car IN AN EMERGENCY particular resistance to corrosion and abrasion SERVICING AND ❒ use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel sheets, with MAINTENANCE high resistance to corrosion TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ❒ spraying the underbody, engine compartment, wheel arch interiors and other parts with highly INDEX protective wax products ❒ spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function in the more exposed points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc. ❒ use of “open” boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets of moisture from triggering rust inside.
fig. 208 F0Y0210 243 BODY AND UNDERBODY WARRANTY ❒ wipe the bodywork using a sponge with a slightly
GETTING TO KNOW soapy solution, frequently rinsing the sponge; YOURYour CAR car is covered by warranty against perforation due to corrosion of any original element of the ❒ rinse well with water and dry with a jet of air or a structureSAFETY or body. chamois leather.
STARTINGFor ANDthe general terms of this warranty, refer to your Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door frames, bonnet, DRIVINGWarranty Booklet. headlight frames etc.) with special care, as water may
WARNING LIGHTS stagnate more easily in these areas. The car should AND MESSAGESPRESERVINGTHE BODYWORK not be taken to a closed area immediately, but left outside so that residual water can evaporate. IN AN EMERGENCY Paint Do not wash the car after it has been left in the sun SERVICING AND or with the bonnet hot: this may alter the shine of MAINTENANCETouch up abrasions and scratches immediately to the paintwork. TECHNICALprevent the formation of rust. SPECIFICATIONS Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in the same Maintenance of paintwork consists of washing the way as the rest of the car. car:INDEX the frequency depends on the conditions and environment where the car is used. For example, in Avoid parking under trees as much as possible; the highly polluted areas, or if the roads are spread resin from trees dulls the paintwork and increases with salt, it is advisable to wash the car more the possibility of corrosion. frequently. IMPORTANT Bird droppings must be washed off To wash the car correctly, proceed as follows: immediately and thoroughly as the acid they contain ❒ remove the aerial from the roof to prevent damage is particularly aggressive. to it if the car is washed in an automatic system; ❒ if high pressure jets or cleaners are used to wash Detergents pollute the environment. Only the car, keep a distance of at least 40 cm from wash your car in areas equipped to collect the bodywork to avoid damage or alteration. and treat wastewater from this type of It should be remembered that the build up activity. of water can damage the car over a period of time; ❒ wash the body using a low pressure jet of water; In order to preserve the aesthetic properties of the paintwork, abrasive products and/or polishes should not be used to clean the car. 244 Windows Engine compartment
GETTING TO KNOW Use specific detergents and clean cloths to prevent At the end of every winter, wash the engine YOUR CAR scratching or altering the transparency. compartment thoroughly, taking care not to aim the jet of water directly at the electronic control units or SAFETY IMPORTANT Wipe the inside surface of the rear at the windscreen wiper motors. Have this STARTING AND window gently with a cloth in the direction of the operation performed at a specialised workshop. DRIVING filaments to avoid damaging the heating device. WARNING LIGHTS IMPORTANT The washing should take place with the AND MESSAGES Front headlights engine cold and the ignition key in the STOP position. After washing, make sure that the various IN AN EMERGENCY Use a soft, damp cloth soaked in water and protective devices (e.g. rubber caps and guards) have detergent for washing cars. SERVICING AND not been removed or damaged. MAINTENANCE
IMPORTANT Never use aromatic substances (e.g. TECHNICAL petrol) or ketenes (e.g. acetone) for cleaning the SPECIFICATIONS plastic lenses of the front headlights. INDEX IMPORTANT When cleaning with a pressure washer, keep the water jet at least 20 cm away from the headlights.
245 INTERIORS PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS GETTING TO KNOW YOURPeriodically CAR check for water puddles under the mats Clean interior plastic parts with a damp cloth (if that could cause the panels to rust. possible made from microfibre), and a solution SAFETY of water and neutral, non-abrasive detergent. To clean oily or persistent stains, use specific products STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING free from solvents and designed to maintain the original appearance and colour of the components. WARNING LIGHTSNever use flammable products, such as AND MESSAGESpetrol ether or rectified petrol to clean Remove any dust using a microfibre cloth, if
IN AN EMERGENCYthe inside of the car.The electrostatic charges necessary moistened with water. The use of paper which are generated by rubbing during the tissues is not recommended as these may leave
SERVICINGcleaning AND operation may cause a fire. residues. MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL IMPORTANT Never use alcohol, petrols and SPECIFICATIONS derivatives to clean the instrument panel lens. WARNING INDEX Do not keep aerosol cans in the car: LEATHER PARTS they might explode.Aerosol cans must (for versions/markets, where provided) not be exposed to temperatures above 50°C. Use only water and neutral soap to clean these parts. Temperatures may greatly exceed this value Never use alcohol or alcohol-based products. Before inside a car exposed to direct sunlight. using a specific product for cleaning interiors, make sure that it does not contain alcohol and/or alcohol based substances. SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuum cleaner. It is advisable to use a moist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub the seats with a sponge and a solution of water and mild soap.
246 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
IDENTIFICATION DATA V.I.N.PLATE SAFETY
STARTING AND We recommend taking note of the identification This is applied on the left side of the luggage DRIVING compartment fig. 209 (lift the mat for access) and codes. The following identification codes are printed WARNING LIGHTS and shown on the plates: bears the following data: AND MESSAGES ❒ B Type-approval number. VIN plate. IN AN EMERGENCY C Vehicle type identification code. ❒ Chassis marking. D Chassis serial number. SERVICING AND ❒ Bodywork paint identification plate. MAINTENANCE E Maximum authorised weight of vehicle fully laden. ❒ Engine marking. TECHNICAL F Maximum authorised weight of vehicle fully laden SPECIFICATIONS
plus trailer. INDEX G Maximum authorised weight on first (front) axle. H Maximum authorised weight on second (rear) axle. I Engine type. L Bodywork version code. M Number for spare parts. N Correct value of smoke coefficient (for diesel engines).
fig. 209 F0Y0130 247 BODYWORK PAINT IDENTIFICATION ENGINE MARKING
GETTING TOPLATE KNOW YOUR CAR This is stamped on the cylinder block and gives the This is fitted to the inside of the tailgate and bears model and the chassis serial number. theSAFETY following data fig. 210:
STARTINGA Paint AND manufacturer. DRIVING B Colour name. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESC Fiat colour code.
IN AN EMERGENCYD Respray and touch up colour code.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCECHASSIS MARKING
TECHNICALThis is etched on the crossmember under the SPECIFICATIONSpassenger side seat and bears the following data:
❒ typeINDEX of vehicle ❒ chassis serial number.
fig. 210 F0Y0003 248 ENGINE CODES - BODY VERSIONS GETTING TO KNOW Versions Engine codes Body versions YOUR CAR
0.9TwinAirTurbo 105 HP 199B6000 199LYC1B L2 (5 seats) SAFETY
1.4 16V 843A1000 199LYB1B L1 (5 seats) STARTING AND DRIVING 1.3 16V MultiJet 199B4000 199LXY1A L0 (5 seats) WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
249 ENGINE GETTING TO KNOW 0.9TwinAirTurbo YOURVersions CAR 1.4 16V 1.3 16V MultiJet 105 HP SAFETY Type code 199B6000 843A1000 199B4000
STARTING AND DRIVINGCycle Otto Otto Diesel
WARNINGNumber LIGHTS and arrangement of cylinders 2 in line 4 in line 4 in line AND MESSAGES Piston diameter and travel (mm) 80.5 x 86.0 72.0 x 84.0 69.6 x 82.0 IN AN EMERGENCY Total displacement (cm3) 875 1368 1248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCECompression ratio 10 ± 0,2 11 ± 0,2 16,8 ± 0,4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSMaximum power (EC) (kW) 77/72 (*) 70 62
MaximumINDEX power (EC) (HP) 105/98 (*) 95 85 corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5500/5750 (*) 6000 3500 Maximum torque (EC) (Nm) 145/120 (*) 127 200 Maximum torque (EC) (kgm) 14.8/12.2 (*) 12.9 20.4 corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2000/1750 (*) 4500 1500 Spark plugs NGK ILKR9G8 NGK DCPR7E-N-10 – Unleaded petrol 95 Unleaded petrol 95 Diesel for automotive Fuel RON (EN 228 RON (EN 228 engines (EN 590 Specification) Specification) Specification) (*) With ECO button pressed
250 FUEL SUPPLY GETTING TO KNOW Versions Power supply YOUR CAR Multipoint sequential timed electronic injection, with knock control and variable intake 0.9TwinAirTurbo 105 HP SAFETY valve actuation
STARTING AND 1.4 16V Multipoint sequential timed electronic injection, returnless system DRIVING
Electronically controlled Common Rail MultiJet direct injection with turbocharger and WARNING LIGHTS 1.3 16V MultiJet AND MESSAGES intercooler
IN AN EMERGENCY
WARNING SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not TECHNICAL take the system's technical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to SPECIFICATIONS the risk of fire. INDEX
TRANSMISSION Versions Gearbox Clutch Drive
0.9TwinAirTurbo 105 HP Six forward gears plus reverse with synchronisers for forward gear 1.4 16V engagement Self-adjusting pedal Front Five forward gears and without idle stroke reverse with synchronizers 1.3 16V MultiJet for forward gear engagement
251 BRAKES GETTING TO KNOW YOURVersions CAR Front service brakes Rear service brakes Parking brake 0.9TwinAirTurbo 105 HP SAFETY Controlled by handbrake 1.4 16V Self-ventilated disc Disc lever, acting on the rear STARTING AND DRIVING brakes 1.3 16V MultiJet WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESIMPORTANT Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking
IN AN EMERGENCYefficiency the first time the brakes are applied.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCESUSPENSION
TECHNICALVersions Front Rear SPECIFICATIONS 0.9TwinAirTurbo 105 HP Independent, MacPherson type with INDEX Interconnected wheels by means of 1.4 16V lower transversal wishbones and anti-roll torsion beam bar secured to an auxiliary crossmember 1.3 16V MultiJet
252 STEERING GETTING TO KNOW Versions Turning circle (m) Type YOUR CAR 0.9TwinAirTurbo 105 HP 10,7 SAFETY Rack and pinion with electric power 1.4 16V 10,7 steering STARTING AND 1.3 16V MultiJet 10,7 DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
253 WHEELS Maximum speed rating GETTING TO KNOW up to 160 km/h YOUR CAR Q RIMS ANDTYRES R up to 170 km/h PressedSAFETY steel or alloy rims. Tubeless radial carcass S up to 180 km/h
STARTINGtyres. AND The vehicle registration document also lists all T up to 190 km/h DRIVINGtype-approved tyres. U up to 200 km/h WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESIMPORTANT If there are any discrepancies between H up to 210 km/h the Owner Handbook and the registration V up to 240 km/h IN AN EMERGENCYdocument, take the information from the latter. For safe driving, the car must be fitted with tyres of SERVICING AND Maximum speed index for snow tyres MAINTENANCEthe same make and type on all wheels. QM+Sup to 160 km/h TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSIMPORTANT Do not use tubes with tubeless tires. TM+Sup to 190 km/h HM+Sup to 210 km/h WHEELINDEX GEOMETRY Front wheel toe-in measured from rim to rim: -0.5 ± 1 mm. The values refer to the car in running order.
READINGTHETYRE CODE
Example fig. 211: 195/65 R 15 82T 195 Rated width (S, distance in mm between sidewalls) 65 Height/width ratio (H/S) as a percentage R Radial tyre 15 Rim diameter in inches (Ø) 82 Load rating (capacity) T Maximum speed rating fig. 211 F0Y0004 254 Load rating (capacity) CORRECT READING OFTHE RIM CODE GETTING TO KNOW 70 = 335 kg 81 = 462 kg Example fig. 211: 6Jx15H2 YOUR CAR 71 = 345 kg 82 = 475 kg 6 rim width in inches (1). SAFETY J rim drop centre outline (side projection where the 72 = 355 kg 83 = 487 kg STARTING AND tyre bead rests) (2). DRIVING 73 = 365 kg 84 = 500 kg 15 rim fitting diameter in inches (corresponds to WARNING LIGHTS 74 = 375 kg 85 = 515 kg diameter of the tyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø). AND MESSAGES 75 = 387 kg 86 = 530 kg H2 shape and number of humps (circumference IN AN EMERGENCY projection which keeps the bead of tubeless tyres SERVICING AND 76 = 400 kg 87 = 545 kg in position on the rim). MAINTENANCE
77 = 412 kg 88 = 560 kg TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 78 = 425 kg 89 = 580 kg INDEX 79 = 437 kg 90 = 600 kg 80 = 450 kg 91 = 615 kg
255 WHEELS ANDTYRES PROVIDED
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR Space-saver wheel (*) VersionsSAFETY Wheels Tyres Snow tyres Rim
STARTING AND Tyre DRIVING 195/65 R15 91Q WARNING LIGHTS 6Jx15 H2 ET 39 195/65 R15 91H AND MESSAGES (M+S) 205/55 R16 91Q IN AN EMERGENCY 6Jx16 H2 36.5 205/55 R16 91H 0.9TwinAirTurbo (M+S) 4JX16 H ET15 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE105 HP 205/55 R16 91Q T135/70 R16 100M 6½Jx16 H2 ET 39 205/55 R16 91H (*) (M+S) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 225/45 R17 91Q 7Jx17 H2 ET41 225/45 R17 91H(*) INDEX (M+S) 195/65 R15 91Q 6Jx15 H2 ET 39 195/65 R15 91H (M+S) 205/55 R16 91Q 6Jx16 H2 36.5 205/55 R16 91H (M+S) 4JX16 H ET15 1.4 16V 205/55 R16 91Q T135/70 R16 100M 6½Jx16 H2 ET 39 205/55 R16 91H (*) (M+S) 225/45 R17 91Q 7Jx17 H2 ET41 225/45 R17 91H(*) (M+S) (*) For versions/markets, where provided
256 Space-saver wheel (*) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR Versions Wheels Tyres Snow tyres Rim Tyre SAFETY
195/65 R15 91Q STARTING AND 6Jx15 H2 ET 39 195/65 R15 91H DRIVING (M+S)
WARNING LIGHTS 205/55 R16 91Q AND MESSAGES 6Jx16 H2 36.5 205/55 R16 91H (M+S) 4JX16 H ET15 1.3 16V MultiJet IN AN EMERGENCY 205/55 R16 91Q T135/70 R16 100M 6½Jx16 H2 ET 39 205/55 R16 91H (*) SERVICING AND (M+S) MAINTENANCE 225/45 R17 91Q 7Jx17 H2 ET41 225/45 R17 91H(*) TECHNICAL (M+S) SPECIFICATIONS
(*) For versions/markets, where provided INDEX Note Reduced-width snow chains with a maximum projection of 9 mm beyond the tyre profile can be fitted on 195/65 R15 91H and 205/55 R16 91H tyres. The 225/45 R17 91H tyre cannot be fitted with snow chains.
257 COLDTYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)
GETTING TO KNOW YOURAdd CAR+0.3 bar to the prescribed pressure when the tyres are warm.
RecheckSAFETY pressure value with cold tyres.
STARTING AND No load/medium load Full load Space-saver DRIVINGTyres Front Rear Front Rear wheel(*) WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES195/65 R15 91H 2,2 2,0 2,5 2,5 IN AN EMERGENCY205/55 R16 91H 2,2 2,0 2,5 2,5 4,2
SERVICING225/45 AND R17 91H 2,2 2,0 2,5 2,5 MAINTENANCE (*) For versions/markets, where provided TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
258 RIM PROTECTORTYRES
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR WARNING SAFETY DO NOT fit wheel hub caps when using integral hub caps fixed (with springs) STARTING AND to the steel rim and after sale tyres provided DRIVING with Rim Protector (fig. 212).The use of WARNING LIGHTS unsuitable tyres and hub caps may cause AND MESSAGES sudden loss of tyre pressure. IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 212 F0Y0005 259 DIMENSIONS GETTING TO KNOW YOURThe dimensionsCAR are expressed in mm fig. 213 and refer to the vehicle equipped with its original tyres. Height is measured with vehicle unladen. SAFETY LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTVOLUME Capacity (V.D.A. standards) = 400 litres (1310 litres with rear STARTINGseats AND completely folded down). DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 213 F0Y0214 A B C D E F (*) G H (*) I 4147 829 2612 706 1667 1522 2018 1519 1736 (*) Minor variations in size are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.
260 PERFORMANCE GETTING TO KNOW Max. speed in km/h that can be reached after initial car use. YOUR CAR
Versions km/h SAFETY
0.9TwinAirTurbo 105 HP 180 STARTING AND DRIVING 1.4 16V 170 WARNING LIGHTS 1.3 16V MultiJet 165 AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
261 WEIGHTS AND LOADS GETTING TO KNOW 0.9TwinAirTurbo YOURVersions CAR 1.4 16V 1.3 16V MultiJet 105 HP SAFETY Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel
STARTINGtank AND filled to 90% and without 1260 1245 1315 DRIVINGoptional equipment) (kg):
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGESPayload including the driver (kg): (*) 560 560 560
IN AN EMERGENCYMaximum permitted loads (kg) (**)
SERVICING– front AND axle: 1050 1050 1050 MAINTENANCE – rear axle: 1000 1000 1000 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS– total: 1820 1805 1875 TowableINDEX loads (kg) – braked trailer: 1000 1000 1000 – non-braked trailer: 400 400 400 Maximum load on roof: 60 60 60 Maximum load on the ball 60 60 60 (braked trailer) (kg): (*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload in relation to the maximum permissible loads. (**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads.
262 REFUELLING 0.9TwinAirTurbo Prescribed fuels and GETTING TO KNOW Petrol versions 1.4 16V YOUR CAR 105 HP original lubricants SAFETY Fuel tank capacity (litres): 50 50 Unleaded petrol not less STARTING AND including a reserve of than 95 RON (EN 228 DRIVING 6÷8 6÷8 (litres): specification) WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Engine cooling system 50-50 mixture of water and 5,3 4,5 UP (litres): PARAFLU (*) IN AN EMERGENCY SELENIA DIGITEK P.E. Engine sump (litres): 2.8 2.8 SERVICING AND (0.9 TwinAir Turbo 105 HP MAINTENANCE version) Engine sump and filter TECHNICAL 3,3 2,95 SELENIA K P.E. SPECIFICATIONS (litres): (1.4 16V version) INDEX Gearbox casing/differential TUTELA TRANSMISSION 1,76 1,76 (litres): GEARFORCE Hydraulic brake circuit (kg): 0,5 0,5 TUTELA TOP 4 Windscreen and rear Mixture of water and window washer fluid 2,9 2,9 TUTELA PROFESSIONAL reservoir (litres): SC35 (*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralised water is recommended.
263 Prescribed fuels and original Diesel versions 1.3 16V MultiJet GETTING TO KNOW lubricants YOUR CAR Fuel tank capacity (litres): 50 SAFETY Diesel for automotive engines including a reserve of (litres): 6 ÷ 8 (EN 590 Specification) STARTING AND DRIVING 50-50 mixture of water and Engine cooling system (litres): 5,9 UP WARNING LIGHTS PARAFLU (*) AND MESSAGES Engine sump (litres): 3,0 IN AN EMERGENCY SELENIA WR P.E. Engine sump and filter (litres): 3,2 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TUTELA TRANSMISSION Gearbox casing/differential (litres): 2,0 GEARFORCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Hydraulic brake circuit (kg): 0,5 TUTELA TOP 4 INDEX Windscreen and rear window washer Mixture of water and TUTELA 2,9 fluid reservoir (litres): PROFESSIONAL SC35 (*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralised water is recommended.
264 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS GETTING TO KNOW Your car is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the YOUR CAR requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration. SAFETY
STARTING AND PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS DRIVING Fluid and lubricant features for a correct Genuine fluids and Replacement WARNING LIGHTS Use AND MESSAGES use of the car lubricants interval IN AN EMERGENCY Lubricant for SELENIA DIGITEK petrol engines SAE 0W-30 ACEA C2 grade totally synthetic P.E. According to Scheduled SERVICING AND (0.9 TwinAir MAINTENANCE Turbo 105 HP lubricant. FIAT Classification 9.55535-GS1. Contractual Technical Servicing Plan Reference No. F020.B12 TECHNICAL version) SPECIFICATIONS
SELENIA K P.E. INDEX Lubricant for According to Scheduled petrol engines SAE 5W-40 ACEA C3 grade totally synthetic Contractual Technical (1.4 16V version) lubricant. FIAT Classification 9.55535-S2. Reference No. Servicing Plan F603.C07 SELENIA WR P.E. Lubricant for SAE 5W-30 grade totally synthetic lubricant. Contractual Technical According to Scheduled diesel engines FIAT Classification 9.55535-S1. Reference No. Servicing Plan F510.D07 In case of emergency, if lubricants with the prescribed specifications are not available, products with the minimum indicated ACEA performance can be used for topping up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed. For 0.9 TwinAir Turbo 105 HP engines only use lubricants with indicated SAE grade and specifications.
The use of products with specifications other than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine not covered by the warranty.
265 Fluid and lubricant features for a correct Genuine fluids and Use Applications GETTING TO KNOW use of the car lubricants YOUR CAR TUTELA SAFETY TRANSMISSION SAE 75W grade synthetic lubricant. GEARFORCE Mechanical gearbox STARTING AND FIAT Classification 9.55550-MZ6 and differential DRIVING Contractual Technical Reference No. F002.F10 WARNINGLubricants LIGHTS and AND MESSAGES greases for TUTELA ALL STAR motion Molybdenum disulphide grease, for use at high temperatures. Consistency NL.G.I. 1-2. FIAT Wheel side constant IN AN EMERGENCYtransmission Contractual Technical velocity joints Classification 9.55580 Reference No. F702.G07 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Grease for constant velocity joints with low TUTELA STAR 700 Differential side friction coefficient. Consistency NL.G.I. 0-1. Contractual Technical constant velocity TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FIAT Classification 9.55580 Reference No. F701.C07 joints
INDEX Synthetic fluid for brake and clutch systems. TUTELATOP 4 Exceeds specifications: FMVSS no. 116 DOT 4, Hydraulic brakes and Brake fluid ISO 4925 SAE J1704 FIAT Classification Contractual Technical hydraulic clutch 9.55597 Reference No. F001.A93 controls
266 Fluid and lubricant features for a correct Genuine fluids and Use Applications use of the car lubricants GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR Red protective agent with antifreeze action, UP Cooling circuit usage PARAFLU (*) SAFETY Protective agent based on inhibited monoethylene glycol with percentage: 50% organic formula. Exceeds CUNA NC 956-16, Contractual Technical for radiators water 50% STARTING AND ASTM D 3306 specifications. FIAT Reference No. F101.M01 UP DRIVING Classification 9.55523 PARAFLU (**) WARNING LIGHTS TUTELA DIESEL ART AND MESSAGES Diesel fuel Additive for diesel with antifreeze and To be mixed with the Contractual Technical diesel (25 cc per 10 additive protective action for diesel engines. IN AN EMERGENCY Reference No. F601.L06 litres) SERVICING AND TUTELA To be used diluted or MAINTENANCE Windscreen/rear Mixture of spirits and surfactants. Exceeds PROFESSIONAL undiluted in windscreen/rear TECHNICAL window washer CUNA NC 956-11 specifications. FIAT SC 35 SPECIFICATIONS window fluid Classification 9.55522 Contractual Technical washer/wiper INDEX Reference No. F201.D02 systems (*) IMPORTANT Do not use fluids with different specifications for topping up or mixing. (**) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% PARAFLUUP and 40% demineralised water is recommended.
267 FUEL CONSUMPTION GETTING TO KNOW YOURThe fuelCAR consumption figures given in the table below are determined on the basis of the type-approval tests laid down by specific European Directives. SAFETY The procedures below are followed for measuring consumption: STARTING AND DRIVING❒ urban cycle: cold starting followed by driving that simulates urban use of the car; ❒ WARNING LIGHTSextra-urban cycle: frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating extra-urban use of the car: speed varies AND MESSAGESbetween 0 and 120 km/h;
IN AN EMERGENCY❒ combined fuel consumption: calculated with a weighting of approximately 37% of the urban cycle and 63% of the extra-urban cycle. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic conditions, weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the TECHNICALcar, trim level/equipment/accessories, use of the climate control system, car load, presence of roof racks SPECIFICATIONSand other situations that adversely affect the aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to different fuel consumptionINDEX figures than those measured. IMPORTANT The fuel consumption will get more regular only after having driven the first 3000 km.
FUEL CONSUMPTION ACCORDINGTOTHE CURRENT EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE (litres/100 km) Versions Urban Extra-urban Combined 0.9TwinAirTurbo 105 HP (*) 5.7 4.3 4.8 0.9TwinAirTurbo 105 HP (**) 5.6 4.2 4.7 1.4 16V 8,3 5,0 6,2 1.3 16V MultiJet 5.0 3.7 4.2 (*) Type approval test starting in 2nd gear. (**) For versions/markets, where provided.
268 CO2 EMISSIONS GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR The CO2 emission levels given in the following table refer to combined consumption.
Versions CO2 emissions according to the current European directive (g/km) SAFETY
0.9TwinAirTurbo 105 HP 112 STARTING AND DRIVING 0.9TwinAirTurbo 105 HP (*) 109 WARNING LIGHTS 1.4 16V 145 AND MESSAGES 1.3 16V MultiJet 110 IN AN EMERGENCY
(*) For versions/markets where provided. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
269 PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE GETTING TO KNOW YOURFiat has CAR been committed for many years to safeguarding the environment through the constant improvement of its production processes and manufacturing products that are increasingly compatible with the ecosystem. ToSAFETY grant customers the best possible service in terms of respecting environmental laws and in response to European Directive 2000/53/EC governing vehicles at the end of their life, Fiat is offering all customers the STARTING AND DRIVINGopportunity of handing over their vehicle* at the end of its life without incurring any additional costs.
WARNINGThe LIGHTS European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not AND MESSAGESincur any expenses as a result of it having a zero or negative market value. In particular, in almost all European
IN AN EMERGENCYUnion countries, until 1st January 2007, vehicles registered after 1st July 2002 will be collected free of charge, whilst from 2007 collection will be free of charge irrespective of the year of registration as long as the SERVICINGvehicle AND contains its basic components (in particular, the engine and bodywork) and has no additional waste. MAINTENANCE To hand your vehicle over at the end of its life without extra cost, go to one of our Dealerships or TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFiat-authorised collection and scrapping centres. These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high quality service for the collection, treatment and recycling of vehicles at their end of life, respecting the surroundingINDEX environment. You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from a Fiat and Fiat Commercial Vehicle Dealership or by calling the toll-free number 00800 3428 0000 or on the Fiat website. * Vehicle for transporting passengers with a maximum of nine seats with a total permitted weight of 3.5 t
270 RADIOFREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: MINISTERIAL APPROVALS GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
fig. 214 F0Y0277 271 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SAFETY
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Parts & Services - Technical Services - Service Engineering
fig. 215 F0Y0278
272 DASHBOARD The presence and position of the controls, instruments and indicators may vary according to the different versions.
fig. 1 F0Y0185 RIGHT HAND DRIVEVERSIONS 1. Adjustable air diffusers 2. Upper glove compartment (for versions/markets, where provided the compartment may be conditioned) 3. Passenger front airbag 4. Adjustable and directable centre air diffusers 5. Fixed upper air vent 6. Radio controls on the steering wheel (for versions/markets, where provided) 7. Exterior light control lever 8. Instrument panel 9. Windscreen wiper/rear window wiper/trip computer control lever 10. Ignition switch 11. Driver front airbag 12. Cruise Control/Speed Limiter lever (for versions/markets, where provided) 13. UConnect® (for versions/markets, where provided) or radio system setup 14. USB port/AUX socket (for versions/markets, where provided) 15. Heating/ventilation system or manual climate control (for versions/markets, where provided) or automatic dual zone climate control (for versions/markets, where provided) 16. Control buttons 17. Lower glove compartment 18. Oddment compartment
273 CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS Instrument background colour and type may vary according to the version. The warning lights and are only present on Diesel versions. On diesel versions, the max. rpm (red range on the revolution counter) corresponds to 5000 rpm.
VERSIONS WITH MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY RIGHT HAND DRIVEVERSIONS
fig. 2 F0Y0183 A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Multifunction display C. Rev counter D. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light E. Engine coolant temperature gauge with overheating warning light
274 VERSIONS WITH RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
fig. 3 F0Y0184 A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Reconfigurable multifunction display C. Rev counter D. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light E. Engine coolant temperature gauge with overheating warning light RIGHT HAND DRIVEVERSIONS
275 REPLACING FUSES ❒ press the device B fig. 6 inside-out from the compartment; FUSE LOCATION ❒ tilt the compartment C fig. 7 forward: in this way, you get access to the fuse box fig. 8 Dashboard junction box To reach the fuse box, proceed as follows: ❒ open the lower oddments compartment; ❒ using the supplied screwdriver fig. 4 remove the two side lids A fig. 5;
fig. 5 F0Y0235 RIGHT HAND DRIVEVERSIONS
fig. 4 F0Y0236 fig. 6 F0Y0238 276 To refit the oddments compartment, proceed in the reverse order, paying special attention to the new connection of the slowing device, linked to the same compartment through the device B fig. 6. RIGHT HAND DRIVEVERSIONS
fig. 7 F0Y0239 fig. 8 F0Y0237 277 page intentionally left blank
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ...... 283 MEDIA MODE ...... 300 TIPS, CONTROLS AND GENERAL INFORMATION...284 TRACK CHANGE (previous/next)...... 300 TIPS ...... 284 TRACK FAST FORWARD/REWIND ...... 300 MULTIMEDIA DEVICES: SUPPORTED TRACK SELECTION (Browse)...... 300 AUDIO FILES AND FORMATS ...... 286 AUDIO SOURCE SELECTION...... 301 NOTES ON TRADEMARKS...... 286 TRACK INFORMATION DISPLAY...... 301 EXTERNAL AUDIO SOURCES...... 287 RANDOM TRACK REPRODUCTION ...... 301 ANTI-THEFT PROTECTION...... 287 TRACK REPETITION...... 301 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...... 288 CD PLAYER...... 302 QUICK GUIDE...... 289 LOADING/EJECTING A CD...... 302 CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL ...... 289 Bluetooth ® SOURCE ...... 303 FRONT PANEL CONTROL SUMMARY TABLE...... 290 PAIRING A Bluetooth® AUDIO DEVICE ...... 303 STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS...... 29 1 USB/iPod SUPPORT...... 304 DESCRIPTION...... 291 STEERING WHEEL CONTROL SUMMARY TABLE....292 AUX SUPPORT...... 304 SWITCHING THE SYSTEM ON/OFF ...... 293 PHONE MODE ...... 305 RADIO (TUNER) MODE...... 293 PHONE MODE ACTIVATION...... 306 RADIO MODE SELECTION ...... 293 MAIN FUNCTIONS ...... 306 FREQUENCY BAND SELECTION...... 293 DISPLAYED INFORMATION...... 306 DISPLAYED INFORMATION...... 294 PAIRING A MOBILE PHONE...... 307 RADIO STATION SELECTION...... 294 STORING NAMES/NUMBERS IN THE MOBILE PREVIOUS/NEXT RADIO STATION SEARCH ...... 294 PHONE PHONEBOOK ...... 307 PREVIOUS/NEXT RADIO STATION FAST SEARCH..294 CONNECTION/DISCONNECTION OF A MOBILE AM/FM RADIO STATION TUNING...... 295 PHONE OR A Bluetooth® AUDIO DEVICE ...... 308 DAB RADIO ...... 296 DELETION OF A MOBILE PHONE OR A SETTING THE PRESELECTIONS ...... 296 Bluetooth® AUDIO DEVICE ...... 309 AUDIO...... 297 SETTING A MOBILE PHONE OR A Bluetooth® AUDIO DEVICE AS FAVOURITE ...... 309 DELETION OF PHONE DATA (PHONEBOOK AND RECENT CALLS) ...... 309
281 TRANSMISSION OF PHONE DATA "MORE" MODE...... 313 (PHONEBOOK AND RECENT CALLS) ...... 309 TRIP COMPUTER ...... 313 MAKING A PHONE CALL...... 310 CLOCK ...... 314 MANAGING AN INCOMING CALL ...... 311 eco:Drive ...... 314 MAKING A SECOND PHONE CALL...... 312 SETTINGS ...... 316 MANAGING TWO PHONE CALLS...... 312 VOICE COMMANDS ...... 320 ENDING A CALL...... 312 USE OF THE VOICE COMMANDS...... 320 REDIALLING ...... 312 USE OF STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS TO CONTINUING A PHONE CALL...... 312 ACTIVATE VOICE COMMANDS ...... 320 ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF THE VOICE SESSION STATUS...... 321 MICROPHONE...... 312 MULTIPLE CHOICE...... 321 TRANSFERRING A CALL...... 313 GLOBAL VOICE COMMANDS...... 322 SMS MESSAGE READER...... 313 PHONE VOICE COMMANDS ...... 323 RADIO AM/FM/DAB VOICE COMMANDS ...... 327 MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS...... 329 CUSTOMER SERVICE NUMBER LIST...... 332
282 INTRODUCTION The car is equipped with an infotelematic system designed according to the specific characteristics of the passenger compartment, with a customised design that matches the style of dashboard. The system is installed in an ergonomic position for the driver and passenger, and controls can be quickly located from the graphical display on the front, making the device easy to use. To increase protection against theft, the system has a protection system that only allows it to be used on the vehicle in which it was originally fitted. The instructions for use are given below and we recommend you read them carefully and always keep them to hand (for example, in the glove compartment). Enjoy reading. Happy motoring!
The information in this publication is provided by way of example. Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.can modify the specifications of the vehicle model described in this publication at any time, for technical or marketing purposes. For further information, contact a Fiat Dealership.
283 TIPS, CONTROLS AND GENERAL Care and maintenance INFORMATION Observe the following precautions to ensure the system is fully operational: TIPS ❒ the display is sensitive to scratching, liquids and Road safety detergents. The display should not come into Learn how to use the various system functions contact with pointed or rigid objects which could before setting off. damage its surface. Do not press on the display when cleaning it. Read the instructions for the system carefully before ❒ setting off. prevent any liquid from entering the system: this could be damaged beyond repair.
WARNING Only clean the front panel and the display If the volume is too loud this can be with a soft, clean, dry, anti-static cloth. dangerous.Adjust the volume so that you Cleaning and polishing products may can still hear background noises (e.g. horns, damage the surface. Do not use alcohol or similar ambulances, police vehicles, etc.). products to clean the panel or the display.
Important Reception conditions In the event of a failure, the system should only be Reception conditions change constantly while driving. checked and repaired at a Fiat Dealership. Reception may be interfered with by the presence of mountains, buildings or bridges, or when you are far If the temperature is particularly low, the display may away from the broadcaster. take a while to reach optimum brightness. If the car is stopped for a while and the outside IMPORTANT The volume may be increased when temperature is very high, the system may go into receiving traffic alerts and news. “thermal protection” mode, suspending operation until the temperature in the passenger compartment returns to acceptable levels.
284 CD To achieve the best quality audio reproduction we recommend the use of original CD supports. Correct Dirt, scratches or any distortions on CDs may cause operation is not guaranteed when CD-R/RW media skipping during playback and poor sound quality. are used that were not correctly burnt and/or with a Follow these tips for optimum playback conditions: maximum capacity above 650 Mb. ❒ only use CDs with the following mark: IMPORTANT Do not use commercially available protective sheets for CDs or discs with stabilisers as they could get stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc. IMPORTANT If a copy-protected CD is used, it may take a few seconds before the system starts to play it. The CD player cannot be guaranteed to play all protected discs. The presence of copy protection is ❒ clean every CD thoroughly removing any often in small letters or may be difficult to read on fingerprints or dust using a soft cloth. Hold CDs by the cover of the actual CD and it may say something the circumference and clean them from the centre like, for example, "COPY CONTROL", "COPY towards the edge; PROTECTED", "THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ❒ ON A PC/MAC" or identified through the use of never use chemical products (e.g. antistatic, symbols, such as, for example: thinner or spray cans) for cleaning as they could damage the surface of the CDs; ❒ after listening to them place CDs back in their cases to avoid them being damaged; ❒ do not expose CDs to direct sunlight, high temperatures or moisture for long periods; ❒ do not stick labels on the surface of the CD and do not write on the recorded surface using pens IMPORTANT If a multisession disc is loaded, only the or pencils; first session will be played. ❒ never use CDs that are very scratched, cracked, deformed, etc. Their use could cause damage the player or make it malfunction. 285 MULTIMEDIA DEVICES: SUPPORTED NOTES ONTRADEMARKS AUDIO FILES AND FORMATS iPod, iTunes and iPhone are registered trademarks of For CD, USB and iPod sources the system can play Apple Inc. files with the following extensions and formats: All other trademarks are the property of their ❒ .MP3 (32 – 320Kbps); respective owners. ❒ .WAV; ❒ .WMA (5 – 320Kbps) mono and stereo; ❒ .AAC (8 – 96KHz) mono and stereo; ❒ .M4A (8 – 96KHz) mono and stereo; Apple is not responsible for the operation of this ❒ .M4B (8 – 96KHz) mono and stereo; device and of its conformity with the safety rules and standards. ❒ .MP4 (8 – 96KHz) mono and stereo. For all sources (CD, AUX, iPod and Bluetooth ®), the system can also play the following Playlist formats: ❒ .M3U ❒ .PLS The DAB/DAB+/DMB Digital Radio function has ❒ been certified according to the specifications of .WPL "ARD" white sticker, for Class A - Audio services. NOTE It makes no difference whether the suffixes ARD is a trademark of the Associazione per la are written in capital or small letters. Radiofonia Digitale in Italia.
286 EXTERNAL AUDIO SOURCES Entering the secret code Other electronic devices (e.g. iPod, PDA, etc...) can When the system is switched on, if the code is be used on the car. requested, the display will show "Please enter Anti- Some of them can however cause electromagnetic Theft Code" followed by the video page showing a interference. Disconnect these devices if the system keypad to enter the secret code. performance worsens. The secret code is made up of four digits, from 1 to NOTE The system supports only FAT32-formatted 9: to insert the first number of the code press the USB devices. The system does not support devices corresponding key on the display. Enter the other with a capacity higher than 64 Gb. code digits in the same way. After entering the fourth figure, uconnect® begins ANTI-THEFT PROTECTION operating. uconnect® is equipped with an anti-theft protection If an incorrect code is entered, the system displays system based on the exchange of information with "Incorrect Code. Please Try Again" to notify the user the electronic control unit (Body Computer) on the of the need to enter the correct code. car. After the 3 available attempts to enter the code, the This guarantees maximum safety and prevents the system displays "Incorrect Code. Radio locked. Please secret code from being entered after the power wait 30 minutes": the waiting time is displayed. Once supply has been disconnected. the text has disappeared you can start the code entering procedure again. If the check has a positive outcome, the system will start to function, whereas if the comparison codes Car radio passport are not the same or if the electronic control unit (Body Computer) is replaced, the system will ask the This document certifies ownership of the system. user to enter the secret code according to the The car radio passport shows the system model, procedure described in the paragraph below. serial number and secret code. IMPORTANT Keep the car radio passport in a safe place so that you can give the information to the relevant authorities if the system is stolen. In case of loss of the car radio passport, contact the Fiat Dealership, taking an ID document and the car ownership documents.
287 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Hi-Fi specification speakers (for versions/markets, where provided) Speakers for basic specification Front speakers Front speakers ❒ 2 38 mm tweeters on the door handle; ❒ 2 38 mm tweeters on the door handle; ❒ 2 165 mm mid-woofer speakers in the door ❒ 2 165 mm mid-woofer speakers in the door panel. panel. Rear speakers Rear speakers ❒ 2 165 mm full-range speakers in the door panel; ❒ 2 165 mm full-range speakers in the door panel. ❒ 1 8-channel amplifier in the luggage compartment; ❒ 1 subwoofer box in the luggage compartment (position varies according to the versions).
288 QUICK GUIDE
CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL
fig. 1 F0Y0001
289 FRONT PANEL CONTROL SUMMARYTABLE Button Functions Mode Ignition Brief button press 1- Off Brief button press Volume adjustment Left/right rotation of knob 2- Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/Pause) Brief button press 3- CD ejection Brief button press 4 CD housing – 5- Display on/off Brief button press 6- Exit the selection/return to previous screen Brief button press 7-BROWSE Scrolling the list or tuning to a radio station Left/right rotation of knob ENTER Confirmation of the option displayed Brief button press Accessing the addition functions (displaying of 8 - MORE Time, Trip Computer, eco:Drive function data) Brief button press 9 - PHONE Phone data displaying Brief button press 10 - SETTINGS Accessing the Vehicle Settings menu Brief button press Source selection: CD, USB/iPod, AUX or Brief button press 11 - MEDIA Bluetooth ® 12 - RADIO Accessing the Radio mode Brief button press
290 STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (for versions/markets, where provided)
DESCRIPTION The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make things easier. The activation of the function selected is controlled, in some cases, by how long the button is pressed (short or long press) as described in the table below.
fig. 2 F0Y0002
291 STEERING WHEEL CONTROL SUMMARYTABLE Button Interaction (pressure/rotation) - Acceptance of incoming call - Acceptance of the second incoming phone call and putting the active phone call on hold - Activation of voice recognition for Phone function - Interruption of the voice message in order to give a new voice command - Interruption of voice recognition - Rejection of incoming call - Ending of call in progress Pressing the centre of the left wheel: - deactivation/reactivation of the microphone during a phone conversation - activation/deactivation of the CD, USB/iPod, Bluetooth ® source Pause - activation/deactivation of radio Mute function Turning left wheel upwards or downwards: +/– - adjustment of the audio volume: hands-free, SMS message reader, voice announcements and music sources - Scrolling the stored radio stations (preset) - Activation of voice recognition - Interruption of the voice message in order to give a new voice command - Interruption of voice recognition Turning right wheel upwards or downwards: - Radio Mode: selection of previous/next radio station - CD, USB/iPod, Bluetooth ® mode: selection of previous/next track Pressing the centre of the right wheel: SRC - selection of audio sources available: radio, CD, USB/iPod, AUX and Bluetooth ®
292 SWITCHINGTHE SYSTEM ON/OFF RADIO MODE SELECTION Press the RADIO button (12-fig. 1) on the front RADIO (TUNER) MODE panel to activate the radio mode. The system switches on/off when the button/knob The different tuning modes can be selected with the (ON/OFF) is pressed (1-fig. 1). corresponding button on the display (see fig. 4). The electronic volume adjustment control rotates Each tuning mode can have a specific preselection set. continuously (360°) in both directions without stop positions. FREQUENCY BAND SELECTION Turn the button/knob clockwise to increase the radio Briefly press the "AM/FM" button to switch from AM volume or counterclockwise to decrease it. to FM and vice versa. The system has the following tuners: AM, FM and If the DAB tuner is available, briefly press the DAB (for versions/markets, where provided). "AM/FM", "AM/DAB", "FM/DAB" buttons to select the desired band.
fig. 3 F0Y1030 fig. 4 F0Y1001 293 DISPLAYED INFORMATION ❒ "Info": additional information on the source being listened to; After the desired radio station is selected on the display (see fig. 5), the following information is ❒ "Audio": access to the "Audio setting" screen. shown: RADIO STATION SELECTION At the top: the list of radio stations stored (preset) is displayed; the station being listened to is To search for the desired radio station press buttons highlighted. or on the display or use the steering wheel controls. In the middle: the name of the radio station being listened to and the buttons to select the previous or PREVIOUS/NEXT RADIO STATION SEARCH the next radio station are displayed. At the bottom: the following buttons are displayed: Briefly press buttons or on the display: when the button is released the previous or the next radio ❒ "Browse": list of the radio stations available; station is displayed. ❒ "AM/FM", "AM/DAB", "FM/DAB": selection of the When searching forwards, if the system reaches the desired frequency band (button reconfigurable end of the band, it will automatically stop on the according to the band selected: AM,FM or DAB); station where the search has started from. ❒ "Tune" : manual radio station tuning (not available for DAB radios); PREVIOUS/NEXT RADIO STATION FAST SEARCH Hold down buttons or on the display to start the fast search: when the button is released, the first tunable radio station can be heard.
fig. 5 F0Y1000 294 AM/FM RADIO STATIONTUNING Incomplete radio station selection ("OK") Use the "Tune" button to select a radio station. Press the "OK" button on the display to tune to the Press the "Tune" button on the display then select radio station selected and close the "Direct Tune" the first number of the desired radio station (see fig. screen (manual tuning). 6). Exit the "DirectTune" screen The graphic keyboard on the display is used to enter the number of the station. Press the "Exit" or the "Radio" button on the display to return to the system main screen. In this mode, use buttons + and – to fine-tune the frequency. Press button (Delete) to delete a wrong number (and enter the correct station number). After entering the last digit of the station, the "Tune" screen is deactivated and the system tunes automatically to the station selected (the number of the radio station is displayed in the "Tune" text box). The screen disappears automatically after 5 seconds or manually by pressing the "OK" or (Delete) buttons.
fig. 6 F0Y1007 295 DAB RADIO The "Browse" button is used to display: (for versions/markets, where provided) ❒ the list of all DAB stations; Once the DAB radio mode on the display is selected, ❒ the list of stations filtered by "Genres"; the information on the station being listened to is ❒ the list of stations filtered by "Ensembles" displayed (see fig. 7) and the following modes will be (broadcast group). available: Use the "ABC" button inside each list to skip to the Selection of the previous/next radio station by: desired letter. ❒ rotating the BROWSE ENTER button/knob (7-fig. The "Refresh" button requires the DAB radio station 1); list to be updated: the update can take a few seconds up to about two minutes. ❒ briefly pressing the or buttons on the display; SETTINGTHE PRESELECTIONS ❒ pressing the or controls on the steering Preselections are available in all system modes and wheel. are activated by touching one of the preselection Hold down the or buttons to fast scroll the buttons located at the top of the display. station list. To store the radio station being listened to, press and hold down the button corresponding to the desired preset until a confirmation acoustic signal is heard. The system can store up to 12 radio station in each mode: 4 radio stations are displayed at the top. Press the "All" button on the display to show all the radio stations stored in the frequency band selected.
fig. 7 F0Y1020 296 AUDIO Equalizer (for versions/markets, where provided) To enter the "Audio" menu, press the SETTINGS button (10-fig. 1) on the front panel, scroll the menu Select "Equalizer" on the display to adjust the bass, then select and press the "Audio" item on the display. medium and treble tones. The following adjustments can be carried out using Use the "+" or "–" buttons to carry out the settings the "Audio" menu: desired (see fig. 8). ❒ "Equalizer" (for versions/markets, where provided); Then press /Done button to return to the "Audio" ❒ "Balance/Fade" (left/right and front/rear balance menu. adjustment); ❒ "Volume/Speed" (excluding versions with Hi-Fi system) speed-dependent automatic volume adjustment; ❒ "Loudness" (for versions/markets, where provided); ❒ "Auto-On Radio"; ❒ "Radio Off Delay". To exit the "Audio" menu, press the /Done button. NOTE When a setting is changed, the button is replaced with the word "Done".
fig. 8 F0Y1002 297 Balance/Fade Volume/Speed Press the "Balance/Fade" button to balance the sound Press the "Volume/Speed" button to choose between from the front and rear seat speakers. "Off" and "1, 2 or 3". Press the or buttons to balance the front and The option selected is displayed (see fig. 10). rear speakers (see fig. 9). Choose "1, 2 or 3" to increase the volume Press the or buttons to balance the speakers on proportionally to the selection made. the left and the right side. Then press /Done button to return to the "Audio" The adjustment is also possible by moving the menu. symbol on the right side of the display upwards/downwards/to the left/to the right. Press the central "C" button to balance the adjustments. Then press /Done button to return to the "Audio" menu.
fig. 9 F0Y1003 fig. 10 F0Y1004 298 Loudness Radio Off Delay (for versions/markets, where provided) To keep the radio on for a preset time after the To activate/deactivate the "Loudness" function to ignition key is turned to STOP. improve the sound quality at low volumes.
Auto-On Radio To set the radio behaviour when the ignition key is turned to MAR. The options are radio on, radio off or reset of the condition active when the ignition key was last turned to STOP.
299 MEDIA MODE TRACK SELECTION (Browse) This chapter describes the interaction modes Use this function to scroll through or select the concerning the operation of CD, Bluetooth ®, tracks on the active device. AUX, USB/iPod. The selection options depend on the device connected or the CD type inserted. TRACK CHANGE (previous/next) For example, on an audio CD you can select the track to be played, whilst on a CD-ROM, a USB/iPod Briefly press the button or turn the BROWSE or Bluetooth ® device you can scroll through the ENTER button/knob (7-fig. 1) clockwise to play the next track or briefly press the button or turn the list of artists, genres and albums available depending BROWSE ENTER button/knob counterclockwise to on the information present on the tracks. return to the beginning of the selected track or at Use the "ABC" button inside each list to skip to the the beginning of the previous track if this has been desired letter within the list. played for less than 8 seconds. NOTE This button may be disabled for some Apple® devices. TRACK FAST FORWARD/REWIND NOTE The "Browse" button does not allow any Press and hold down the button to fast forward operation on an AUX device. the selected track or keep the button pressed to fast rewind the track. NOTE To consult the list of Bluetooth ® audio devices and supported functions, visit the website The fast forward/rewind will stop once the button is www.fiat.com or call Customer Services on released or when the previous/next track is reached. 00800.3428.0000 (the number may vary depending on the country: please refer to the reference table in the "Customer Service number list" section herein).
300 Press the "Browse" button to activate this function TRACK INFORMATION DISPLAY on the source being played. Press the "Info" button to show on the display the Turn the BROWSE ENTER (7-fig. 1) button/knob to information on the track being listened to for devices select the desired category and then press the that support the function. button/knob to confirm the selection. Press the "X" button to exit the screen. Press the "X" button to cancel the function. NOTE The indexing time of a USB device can vary RANDOMTRACK REPRODUCTION according to the media inserted (in some cases it can Press the ">" button then the "Shuffle" button to play take a few minutes). the tracks on CD, USB/iPod or Bluetooth®in random mode. AUDIO SOURCE SELECTION Press the "Shuffle" button again to deactivate the Press the "Source" button to select the desired audio function. source among those available: CD, AUX, USB/iPod or Bluetooth®. TRACK REPETITION If no source is selected, the screen disappears after a few seconds and the display shows the main screen Press the ">" button then the "Repeat" button to again. activate the function. Press the "Repeat" button again to deactivate the function.
301 CD PLAYER After the ejection, the audio source will be automatically selected. To activate the CD mode, enter an audio CD or an MP3 in the relevant slot 4 (fig. 1) or press the MEDIA If the CD is not removed from the slot, the system button (11 - fig. 1) on the front panel. will re-enter it automatically after about 10 seconds without playing it. If there is a CD inside, press the graphic button "Source" then select "CD". If the CD loaded cannot be read (e.g. a CD-ROM has been inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way round or there is a reading error) the display will show an error message.
LOADING/EJECTING A CD To load the CD, insert it gently into the slot to activate the motorised loading system, which will position it correctly (the "CD" symbol on the display comes on). Enter a CD when the system is on, the CD mode is automatically selected and the system starts playing the tracks. The display shows the number of the track and the time (minutes and seconds). Press the button (EJECT) (3 - fig. 1) on the front panel, with the system on, to activate the motorised ejection of the CD.
302 Bluetooth ® SOURCE ❒ when requested by the audio device, enter the PIN code shown on the system display or confirm on This mode is activated by pairing a Bluetooth ® the device the PIN displayed; device containing music tracks.with the system. ❒ if the pairing procedure is completed successfully, a screen is displayed. Answer "Yes" to the question PAIRING A Bluetooth® AUDIO DEVICE to pair the Bluetooth® audio device as favourite To pair a Bluetooth® audio device, proceed as (the device will have priority on all other devices follows: that will be paired later on). If "No" is selected, the ❒ activate the Bluetooth® function on the device; priority is determined according to the order of connection. The last device connected will have ❒ press the MEDIA button (11-fig. 1) on the front the highest priority; panel; ❒ ❒ an audio device can also be paired by pressing the if the "Media" source is active, press the "Source" SETTINGS button (10-fig. 1) on the front panel button; and by selecting "Phone / Bluetooth®". ❒ select the Bluetooth® media source; ❒ press the "Add Device" button; IMPORTANT If the Bluetooth ® connection between mobile phone and system is lost, consult ❒ search for uconnect®ontheBluetooth® audio the mobile phone owner's handbook. device (during the pairing stage a screen is displayed showing the progress of the operation);
303 USB/iPod SUPPORT AUX SUPPORT To activate the USB/iPod mode insert the To activate the AUX mode engage a suitable device corresponding device (USB or iPod) in the USB port in the AUX port fig. 12 on the car. fig. 11 present on the car. Entering a device when the system is on, it starts If a USB/iPod device is inserted with the system on, playing the tracks on the device (playing starts from this starts playing the tracks present on the device. the first track). Adjust the volume by the button/knob (1 - fig. 1) on the front or by the volume adjustment control on the connected device. As for the "Audio source selection" function, see the chapter "Media Mode".
fig. 11 F0Y0097 fig. 12 F0Y0097 304 IMPORTANT PHONE MODE The functions of the device connected with the AUX port are directly managed by the device itself: it is PHONE MODE ACTIVATION not possible to change track/folder/playlist with the Press the PHONE button (9-fig. 1) on the front panel controls on the front or on the steering wheel. to activate the Phone mode. Do not leave the cable of your portable player connected with the AUX socket after disconnection, The following screen appears on the display (see fig. to avoid possible hiss from the speakers. 13).
fig. 13 F0Y1012 305 MAIN FUNCTIONS DISPLAYED INFORMATION Use the buttons on the display to: When a phone is connected to the system, the ❒ dial the phone number (using the graphic keypad display shows various information (if available): on the display); ❒ status of roaming; ❒ display and call the contacts on the mobile phone ❒ network signal intensity; phonebook; ❒ mobile phone battery charge; ❒ display and call contacts from the registers of ❒ mobile phone name. previous calls; NOTE To consult the list of mobile phones and ❒ pair up to 10 phones/audio device to make access supported functions, visit the website www.fiat.com and connection easier and quicker; or call Customer Services on 00800.3428.0000 (the ❒ transfer calls from the system to the mobile phone number may vary depending on the country: please and vice versa and deactivate the microphone refer to the reference table in the "Customer Service audio for private conversations. number list" section herein). Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Phone function.
306 PAIRING A MOBILE PHONE ❒ if the pairing procedure is completed successfully, a screen is displayed: answer "Yes" to the question to IMPORTANT Carry out this operation only with car pair the mobile phone as favourite (the mobile stationary and in safety conditions; this function is phone will have priority on all other mobile phones deactivated when the car is moving. that will be paired later on). If no other devices are paired, the system will consider the first associated Even though the mobile phone pairing procedure is device as favourite. described below we always recommend to consult the mobile phone owner's handbook. Note To pair the mobile phone, proceed as follows: The priority is determined according to the order of ❒ activate the Bluetooth ® function on the mobile connection for mobile phones which are not set as phone; favourite. The last phone connected will have the highest priority. ❒ press the PHONE button (9-fig. 1) on the front panel; STORING NAMES/NUMBERS INTHE ❒ if no phone is paired with the system yet, the MOBILE PHONE PHONEBOOK display shows a dedicated screen; Before pairing your mobile phone, you must make ❒ select "Yes" to start the pairing procedure then sure you have stored the names you want to contact search for the uconnect® device on the mobile in the phonebook on your mobile phone so that you phone (if "No" is selected, the Phone main screen can call them using the car's hands-free system. is displayed); If your phonebook does not contain any names, ❒ when prompted by the mobile phone, use its enter new names for the most frequently used keyboard to enter the PIN code shown on the numbers. system display or confirm on the mobile phone the For further details, consult your mobile phone PIN displayed; owner's handbook. ❒ from the "Phone" screen you can always pair a IMPORTANT The names in the phonebook not mobile phone pressing the "Settings" button: press containing phone numbers or name and surname will the "Add Device" button and proceed as described not be displayed. above; ❒ during the pairing stage a screen is displayed showing the progress of the operation;
307 CONNECTION/DISCONNECTION OF A Disconnection MOBILE PHONE OR A Bluetooth® To disconnect a specific mobile phone or AUDIO DEVICE Bluetooth® audio device, proceed as follows: ❒ Connection press the SETTINGS button (10-fig. 1) on the front panel; The system connects automatically to the mobile ❒ phone paired with the highest priority. select "Phone / Bluetooth" on the display; ❒ To choose a specific mobile phone or Bluetooth® select the "Paired Phones" or "Paired Audio" list using the corresponding button on the display; audio device, proceed as follows: ❒ ❒ select the specific device (mobile phone or press the SETTINGS button (10-fig. 1) on the front Bluetooth® device); panel; ❒ press the "Disconnect" button. ❒ select "Phone / Bluetooth" on the display; ❒ select the "Paired Phones" or "Paired Audio" list using the corresponding button on the display; ❒ select the specific device (mobile phone or Bluetooth® device); ❒ press the "Connect" button; ❒ during the connection stage a screen is displayed showing the progress of the operation; ❒ the device connected is highlighted in the list.
308 DELETION OF A MOBILE PHONE OR A ❒ select the specific device (mobile phone or Bluetooth® AUDIO DEVICE Bluetooth® device); To delete a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio ❒ press the "Make Favourite" button; device from a list, proceed as follows: ❒ the device selected is moved to the top of the list. ❒ press the SETTINGS button (10-fig. 1) on the front panel; DELETION OF PHONE DATA (PHONEBOOK AND RECENT CALLS) ❒ select "Phone / Bluetooth" on the display; ❒ select the "Paired Phones" or "Paired Audio" list Select "Phone Data Delete" on the display to delete using the corresponding button on the display; the list of recent calls and the phonebook copy. ❒ select the device (mobile phone or Bluetooth® TRANSMISSION OF PHONE DATA device); (PHONEBOOK AND RECENT CALLS) ❒ press the "Delete Device" button; If your mobile phone has a function for sending the ❒ a confirmation screen will appear on the display: phonebook via Bluetooth® technology. press "Yes" to delete the device or "No" to cancel During the pairing procedure a screen will appear the operation. with the request "Do you want to download you phone data and recent calls?". SETTING A MOBILE PHONE OR A Bluetooth® AUDIO DEVICE AS FAVOURITE Answer "Yes" to copy the whole phonebook and the list of recent calls to the system. To set a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio device Answer "No" to carry out the operation later on. as favourite, proceed as follows: ❒ press the SETTINGS button (10-fig. 1) on the front panel; ❒ select "Phone / Bluetooth" on the display; ❒ select the "Paired Phones" or "Paired Audio" list using the corresponding button on the display;
309 After the first phone data transmission, the A call can be made by: procedure for transmitting and updating the ❒ selecting the icon (mobile phone phonebook); phonebook (if supported) starts as soon as a ❒ Bluetooth® connection is established between selecting "Recent Calls"; mobile phone and system. ❒ selecting the icon; Whenever a mobile phone is connected to the ❒ Pressing the "Redial" button. system, a maximum of 1000 contacts can be downloaded and updated for each phone. Dialling the phone number using the Depending on the amount of items downloaded from "keyboard" icon on the display the phonebook, a slight delay can occur before the Enter the phone number using the graphic keyboard last names downloaded can be used. Up to then the displayed. phonebook downloaded previously (if present) will be available. Proceed as follows: ❒ Only the phonebook of the mobile phone currently press the PHONE button (9-fig. 1) on the front connected to the system can be accessed. panel; ❒ The phonebook downloaded from the mobile phone press the button on the display and use the can neither be modified nor be deleted through the numbered buttons to enter the number; uconnect® system: changes will be transmitted and ❒ press the "Call" button to make a call. updated in the system when the mobile phone is next connected. Dialling the phone number using the mobile phone MAKING A PHONE CALL It is possible to dial a phone number with the mobile The operations described below can only be accessed phone and continue using the system (never allow if supported by the mobile phone in use. yourself to be distracted while driving). For all functions available, refer to the mobile phone When a phone number is dialled with the keyboard owner's handbook. of the mobile phone, the audio of the call is played over your car's sound system.
310 Recent calls Answering a phone call The list of the last calls made for each of the When a phone call is received on the mobile phone, following call types can be displayed: the system deactivates the audio system (if active) ❒ Calls received; and displays a screen. ❒ Calls made; Press the "Answer" button or the button on the steering wheel controls to answer. ❒ Calls without a reply; ❒ All calls. Rejecting a phone call To access these types of calls, press the "Recent Press the "Ignore" button or the button on the Calls" button on the Phone menu main screen. steering wheel controls to reject.
MANAGING AN INCOMING CALL Answering an incoming call during an active conversation Call controls To answer an incoming call whilst another phone The buttons on the display allow the following phone conversation is in progress, press the "Answer" call functions to be managed: button to put the ongoing call on hold and answer ❒ Answer; the new incoming call. ❒ End; IMPORTANT Not all mobile phones may support the ❒ Ignore; management of an incoming call when another phone conversation is active. ❒ Put on hold/resume; ❒ Deactivate/activate the microphone; ❒ Transfer the call; ❒ Switch from one call to the other; ❒ Conference/merge two active calls.
311 MAKING A SECOND PHONE CALL REDIALLING When a phone conversation is active, a second To call the number/contact of last call made, press phone call can be made as follows: the "Redial" button. ❒ select the number/contact of the list of recent calls; CONTINUING A PHONE CALL ❒ select the contact from the phonebook; After the engine is switched off, it is still possible to ❒ press the "Hold" button and dial the number using continue a phone call. the graphic keyboard of the display. The call continues until it is ended manually or for a maximum period of about 20 minutes. MANAGINGTWO PHONE CALLS When the system is switched off the call is If two calls are in progress (one active and one on transferred to the mobile phone. hold), it is possible to switch between them pressing the "Call On Hold" button or to merge the two calls ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OFTHE in a conference pressing the "Merge calls" buttons. MICROPHONE During a call the microphone can be deactivated Note pressing the button on the front panel (or on the Check whether the telephone in use supports the steering wheel controls) or the "Mute" button on the management of a second call and the "Conference" display. mode. When the microphone is deactivated it is still possible to listen to the call in progress. ENDING A CALL To reactivate the microphone, press the Press the "End" button or the button on the corresponding button again. steering wheel controls to end a call in progress. Only the ongoing call is ended and any call on hold becomes the new active call. Depending on the type of mobile phone, if the ongoing call is ended by the caller, the call on hold may not be activated automatically.
312 TRANSFERRING A CALL "MORE" MODE The ongoing calls can be transferred from the mobile Press the MORE button (8-fig. 1) on the front panel phone to the system and vice versa without ending to display (see fig. 14) the following operation the calls. settings: To transfer the call, press the "Transfer" button. ❒ Trip Computer; ❒ SMS MESSAGE READER Clock; ❒ The system can read the messages received by the eco:Drive. mobile phone. TRIP COMPUTER To use this function the mobile phone must support the SMS exchange function via Bluetooth ®. Press the "Trip" button (see fig. 14) to display the trip If this function is not supported by the phone, the information of the car. corresponding button is deactivated (greyed out). This function allows you to display the consumption When a text message is received, the display will levels and define two separate trips called “Trip A” show a screen where the options "Listen", "Call" or and “Trip B” for monitoring the car's "complete "Ignore" can be selected. journey" in a reciprocally independent manner. Press the button to access the list of SMS messages received by the mobile phone (the list displays a maximum of 60 messages received).
fig. 14 F0Y1013 313 Both functions can be reset (reset - start of a new The assessment of driving style is indicated by 4 journey): to reset the desired "Trip" hold down the indices which are assessed as optimal when the "Trip A" or "Trip B" buttons. "eco"-driving style criteria below are complied with: ❒ Acceleration/Deceleration: avoid abrupt CLOCK acceleration/deceleration, favouring gradual Press the "Clock" button (see fig. 14) to display the increases/decreases in speed. clock. ❒ Gearbox: use the gear most suited to the road conditions, in order to optimise fuel consumption eco:Drive (on versions with automatic transmission, using The eco:Drive application (fig. 15) allows the driver "Auto" mode, this parameter is not displayed). to monitor their driving style in order to achieve ❒ Speed: adopt a driving style which maintains, above more efficient driving in terms of fuel economy and all on traffic-free roads, the most appropriate, emissions reduction. constant driving speed, anticipating any Monitoring appears on the display in real time; it is deceleration due to uneven road surfaces or traffic however possible to access detailed overall conditions. information by consulting the eco:Drive site (see paragraph "Data transfer"). NOTES The values measured are not directly connected to instant fuel consumption but are intended to suggest how the driver can alter their driving style in order to reduce consumption. Different journeys may have different values even though the driver maintains the same driving style, since they are affected by factors such as traffic conditions, length of journey and cold starting. An "eco:Drive" is a more "fluid" drive, even if traffic conditions often inhibit this. A more "aggressive" drive, on the other hand, implies frequent acceleration/deceleration with resulting increased fuel consumption and harmful emissions. fig. 15 F0Y1014 314 Activation With reference to the fig. 16 "Current index" refers to the overall average value of the indices described Press the "eco:Drive" button (see fig. 14) to interact calculated in real time, indicating the eco- with the function. sustainability of the driving style, from 0 (low) to 100 To activate the function press the "eco:Drive ON" (high). button. To check the data average of previous trip (the "trip" A screen will be displayed (see fig. 16) showing the 4 starts when the ignition key is turned to MAR and indices described above. stops when it is turned to STOP), select the These indexes are grey until the system has sufficient "Previous Trip" button (see fig. 17). data to evaluate the driving style or in the event of long stops. Deactivation Once sufficient data are available, the indexes will Press the "eco:Drive Off" button to deactivate the have 4 colours depending on the evaluation: green function. (very good), yellow, orange and red (very bad).
fig. 16 F0Y1015 fig. 17 F0Y1016 315 Data transfer SETTINGS The trip data is saved in the system’s memory. By Press the SETTINGS button (10-fig. 1) on the front correctly configuring a USB drive and going to the panel to display the "Settings" main menu (see fig. eco:Drive site, the history of trips can be archived in 18). a personal profile and the overall analysis of the trip NOTE The menu items displayed vary according to data and driving style can be consulted. the versions. Do not remove the USB stick until the system has The menu comprises the following options: downloaded the data since they might be lost completely or partially. ❒ Display; During the transfer of data to the USB drive, ❒ Time & Date; messages may appear on the display to guide the user ❒ Safety/Assistance (for versions/markets, where correctly through the operation; follow these provided); instructions. ❒ Lights (for versions/markets where provided); These messages are only displayed with ignition key ❒ Doors & Locks; in STOP position and system off delay longer than 0 minutes. ❒ Audio; ❒ Phone / Bluetooth; NOTES Warning messages will be displayed when the USB storage device is full. When the eco:Drive data is not transferred to USB storage device for a long time, the internal memory of the uconnect® system may be exhausted. Warning messages will also be displayed in these circumstances: it will be necessary to connect the USB storage device configured for eco:Drive in order not to lose the saved data.
fig. 18 F0Y1005 316 ❒ Radio; ❒ "Voice Resp. Length": press the relevant button to ❒ Restore Default Settings. set the detail level of the voice messages supplied by the system and the suggestions displayed. Display ❒ "Touchscreen Beep": press the relevant button to activate/deactivate the acoustic signal when the The "Display" menu contains the following options: buttons on the displayed are pressed. ❒ "Brightness" (this setting is not available when the ❒ "DisplayTrip B": press the relevant button to display mode is set to "Automatic"): select activate/deactivate the displaying of the Trip B on "Brightness" and press the "+" or "–" buttons to the instrument panel display. adjust the display brightness with the headlights on or off (the setting not corresponding to the active headlight condition is greyed out). ❒ "Display Mode": press the "Display Mode" button to set the display brightness according to "Day", "Night" or "Auto" condition. In "Auto" mode the display brightness is aligned to that of the instrument panel. ❒ "Language": press the "Language" button to select one of the languages available. ❒ "Units": press the "Units" button to select the correct unit for "Temperature" ("°C" or "°F"), "Distance" ("km" or "mi") and "Fuel Consumption". If the distance is in "km", "km/l" or "l/100km" can be selected. If the distance is in "mi" (miles), "miles per gallon" ("mpg") are set automatically.
317 Clock & Date Date setting Use this function to set the clock. To set the date proceed as for the time setting: select "Set Date" to adjust day, month and year. Time setting Safety/Assistance Press the SETTINGS button (10-fig. 1) on the front (for versions/markets, where provided) panel then select "Clock & date" (see fig. 18). Select this function to adjust the rain sensor Select "Set Time" and press the or buttons (see sensitivity (for versions/markets, where provided). fig. 19) to adjust hours and minutes. Press the "12h" or "24h" buttons to select the time Lights format. (for versions/markets, where provided) The "am" and "pm" are available in "12h" mode. Use this function to carry out the following In the Clock menu, "Show Time Status" can be adjustments: selected to activate/deactivate the displaying of the ❒ "Twilight sensor" (for versions/markets, where clock at the top of the display (for versions/markets provided): adjustment of headlight switching on where provided). sensitivity; ❒ "Daytime Lights" (DRL) (for versions/markets where provided): activation/deactivation of daytime lights; ❒ "Cornering Lights" (for versions/markets where provided): activation/deactivation of cornering lights.
fig. 19 F0Y1006 318 Doors & Locks Radio Use this function to activate/deactivate the automatic Use this function to configure the following options: door locking when the car is moving ("Autoclose" ❒ "Traffic Announc.": activation/deactivation of the function). automatic tuning of the traffic announcements Audio ("TA" function); ❒ See paragraph "Audio" in chapter "Switching the "Altern. Frequency": activation/deactivation of the system on/off". automatic tuning of the strongest signal for the station selected ("AF" function); Phone / Bluetooth ❒ "Regional": activation/deactivation of the automatic tuning to a station which broadcasts regional news See the description in the "Connecting/disconnecting ("REG" function); a mobile phone or a Bluetooth ® audio device" ❒ paragraph in the "Phone Mode" chapter. "Playing DAB Announcements": activation/deactivation of the automatic tuning to DAB announcements and selection of announcement categories of interest among those available.
Restore Default Settings Use this function to restore the settings for display, time, date, audio and radio to the default values set by the manufacturer.
319 VOICE COMMANDS USE OF STEERING WHEEL CONTROLSTO ACTIVATEVOICE COMMANDS USE OFTHEVOICE COMMANDS "Phone" button Please follow the suggestions below to be sure that the voice commands are always recognised by the The button on the steering wheel controls system: activates the "Phone" voice recognition system to ❒ make calls, display recent incoming and outgoing calls speak at a normal volume; and phonebook, etc. ❒ always wait for the "beep" before speaking; Every time the button is pressed, there is a "beep" ❒ the system is capable of recognising the voice and the display shows a suggestion screen inviting the commands given, irrespective of gender, by the user to say a command. tone of voice and intonation of the person giving the instructions; "Voice" button ❒ if possible, try and keep the noise in the passenger The button on the steering wheel controls compartment to a minimum; activates the "Radio/Media" voice recognition system ❒ before giving voice commands, ask other to: passengers not to talk. This is to prevent ❒ tune to a specific radio station; misunderstanding since the system may recognise other words (in addition to or different from your ❒ tune to a specific AF/FM radio frequency; voice command) if several people are speaking; ❒ play a track on a USB memory stick/iPod/CD MP3; ❒ for optimum operation it is advisable to close the ❒ play an album track on a USB memory windows and the sun roof (for versions/markets, stick/iPod/CD MP3. where provided) to avoid external interference. Every time the button is pressed, there is a "beep" IMPORTANT Voice commands must always be given and the display shows a suggestion screen inviting the in safe driving conditions, in compliance with the laws user to say a command. in force in the country where you are driving and using the mobile phone correctly.
320 Fast use of the voice interaction ❒ (yellow icon): displayed when the system is saying a help, information or multiple choice voice The buttons or , when pressed during a system message. In this case you cannot say a voice voice message, enable to say a voice command command; directly. ❒ (red icon): displayed when the voice For example, if the system is saying a help voice interaction is ended by the user. In this case you message and you know the command to give to the cannot say a voice command. system, pressing the buttons or , the voice message is interrupted and you can say the wished voice command directly (without having to listen to MULTIPLE CHOICE the whole help voice message). In a few specific cases the system cannot define The buttons or , if pressed when the system is univocally the said voice command and asks for waiting for a voice command by the user, close the choosing among max. four alternatives. voice session. For example, if you ask to call a name in the phonebook and there are similar names, the system VOICE SESSION STATUS will suggest a numerical list of the available alternatives (see fig. 20), asking to say the associated The system displays the voice session status with number. specific icons: ❒ (green icon): displayed when the system is listening. In this case you can say a voice command; ❒ (green icon): displayed when the system has interpreted the said voice command and its function is performed. In this case you cannot say a voice command; ❒ (green icon): displayed when the system is processing the given voice command. In this case you cannot say a voice command;
fig. 20 F0Y1046 321 GLOBALVOICE COMMANDS
fig. 21 F0Y1040
322 PHONEVOICE COMMANDS
fig. 22 F0Y1041
323 fig. 23 F0Y1042
324 fig. 24 F0Y1043
325 fig. 25 F0Y1044
326 RADIO AM/FM/DABVOICE COMMANDS
fig. 26 F0Y1045
327 fig. 27 F0Y1050
328 MEDIAVOICE COMMANDS
fig. 28 F0Y1047
329 fig. 29 F0Y1048
330 fig. 30 F0Y1049
331 CUSTOMER SERVICE NUMBER LIST The following table shows the specific Customer Service numbers for each country. International freephone Company freephone Country International number number number Austria 00800.3428.0000 – +39.02.44412.041 Belgium 00800.3428.0000 0800.55111 +39.02.44412.041 Denmark – – – France 00800.3428.0000 0800.3428.00 +39.02.44412.041 Germany 00800.3428.0000 – +39.02.44412.041 Greece – 800.11500.800 +39.02.44412.041 Ireland – 1800.3428.00 +39.02.44412.041 Italy 00800.3428.0000 800.3428.00 +39.02.44412.041 Luxembourg 00800.3428.0000 800.28111 +39.02.44412.041 Holland 00800.3428.0000 – +39.02.44412.041 Poland 00800.3428.0000 – +39.02.44412.041 Portugal 00800.3428.0000 – +39.02.44412.041 United Kingdom 00800.3428.0000 – +39.02.44412.041 Czech Republic – – – Slovakia – – – Spain 00800.3428.0000 900.3428.00 +39.02.44412.041
332 International freephone Company freephone Country International number number number Sweden – – – Switzerland 00800.3428.0000 – +39.02.44412.041 06.40.245.245 Hungary – +36.1.465.3688 (upon payment)
333
INDEX – body codes ...... 249 Child restraint systems GETTING TO KNOW Body versions ...... 249 (compliance for use) ...... 142 YOUR3rd CAR brake light (changing Bodywork Cigar lighter ...... 80 SAFETYbulbs)...... 206 – maintenance ...... 244 City Brake Control - "Collision Mitigation" STARTINGABS AND ...... 106 DRIVING – protection from System ...... 115 ABS (system)...... 106 atmospheric agents...... 243 WARNING LIGHTS Cleaning and maintenance AND MESSAGESAccessories purchased by – warranty...... 244 the owner...... 122 – bodywork...... 243 IN AN EMERGENCY Bonnet...... 102 Additional heater...... 60 – car interior...... 246 Brake (mechanical wear SERVICING AND – engine compartment ...... 245 MAINTENANCEAirbag ...... 150 detection system)...... 238 – Deactivation of front – front headlights...... 245 TECHNICAL Brakes SPECIFICATIONSpassenger airbag and side – Leather parts...... 246 bag ...... 152 – brake fluid level...... 235 INDEX – Plastic and coated parts...... 246 – window bag...... 153 – specifications ...... 252 – seats ...... 246 Airbags Bulb replacement – windows ...... 245 – Front airbags ...... 150 – exterior lights ...... 199 Climate control...... 40 Air cleaner...... 236 – interior lights...... 207 – Passenger compartment ASR system ...... 109 Car dimensions ...... 260 air diffusers...... 41 ASR (system) ...... 109 "Cargo Magic Space" ...... 98 Climatic comfort...... 41 Automatic dual zone climate Carrying children safely...... 137 Clutch...... 251 control system ...... 50 – Carrying children safely ...... 137 CO2 emissions...... 269 Battery (charge)...... 219 – child restraint systems ...... 145 Conditions of use ...... 165 Battery ...... 237 – "Isofix" child restraint Control panel and – advice for extending system setup ...... 143 instruments...... 4 lifetime...... 237 Central air diffusers ...... 40 Controls...... 74-90 – replacement...... 237 Changing a wheel...... 184 “Cornering lights” ...... 62 Body Checking levels ...... 231-232-233 Cruise Control...... 67 336 Dashboard ...... 3 Electric windows...... 90 Fitting "Universal" child Daytime running lights restraint system ...... 139 GETTING TO KNOW Engine codes...... 249 YOUR CAR (DRL) Engine compartment Fixed glass roof ...... 82 SAFETY – "Daytime Running Lights".... 60 – checking levels ...... 230 Fixed rear light clusters (changing bulbs)...... 205 Diesel filter...... 236 STARTING AND – washing...... 245 DRIVING Dipped beam headlights Fix&Go Automatic Kit ...... 190 Engine coolant temperature WARNING LIGHTS – control...... 61 indicator...... 6 Fluids and lubricants AND MESSAGES (specifications)...... 265 Dipped headlights Engine Follow me home (device) ...... 63 IN AN EMERGENCY – control...... 61 – engine cooling system SERVICING AND Direction indicators fluid level ...... 234 Front roof light MAINTENANCE – bulb replacement...... 207 – control...... 62 – identification codes...... 249 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Display...... 7 – technical specifications...... 250 Fuel consumption ...... 268 – Control buttons ...... 10 Engine oil Fuel level gauge ...... 6 INDEX Doors ...... 87 – consumption...... 234 Fuse boxes (location)...... 212 – Door lock/unlock...... 87 – level check ...... 234 Fuses DPF (particulate filter) ...... 129 – specifications ...... 265 – Dashboard fuse box ...... 214 Driving style...... 164 Environment protection...... 129 – Engine compartment fuse box...... 212 DRLs (Daytime Running EOBD system...... 118 – fuse list...... 216 Lights)...... 60 EOBD (system)...... 118 DST system...... 110 – Luggage compartment ESC system ...... 108 fuse box...... 215 DST (system)...... 110 ESC (system)...... 108 Dualdrive (electric power – replacing fuses...... 211 steering)...... 119 External lights...... 60 Gearbox (use of)...... 162 Dualdrive electric power Extinguisher ...... 82 Gear Shift Indicator steering ...... 119 Fiat CODE (system) ...... 23 (system) ...... 9 Dusk sensor...... 61 Fiat CODE system ...... 23 Glasses holder...... 81 Electric sun roof ...... 84 Filling the tank ...... 126 Glove compartment light 337 – bulb replacement...... 210 Installing – direction indicators
GETTING TO KNOW electrical/electronic devices.. 122 (changing a bulb)...... 199 YOURGSI CAR (Gear Shift Indicator) system ...... 9 Instrument panel...... 4 – fog lights (changing a SAFETY bulb) ...... 203 Handbrake...... 161 Interior fittings ...... 78 – front lower light cluster STARTING AND Interiors (cleaning) ...... 246 DRIVINGHazard warning lights ...... 74 (changing a bulb)...... 200 HBA system ...... 110 WARNING LIGHTS – front upper light cluster AND MESSAGES "Isofix" child restraint HBA (system) ...... 110 system setup...... 143 (changing a bulb)...... 199 IN AN EMERGENCYHeadlights - fog light – main beams (changing a alignment ...... 105 Jack ...... 186 bulb) ...... 201 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Headlights...... 104 Keys – side direction indicators TECHNICAL (changing a bulb)...... 202 SPECIFICATIONS– adjusting headlights – key without remote abroad...... 106 control...... 24 – side lights/daytime INDEX– bulb replacement...... 199 running lights (DRL) – key with remote control ..... 25 (changing a bulb)...... 201 – headlamp alignment – replacing remote control Lights corrector...... 104 battery...... 26 – bulbs (replacement)...... 195 – light beam direction...... 104 – request for additional – general instructions ...... 195 Head restraints...... 35 remote controls ...... 26 – types of bulbs...... 197 Heating and ventilation ...... 42 Key with remote control Load limiters ...... 134 Hill Holder system ...... 108 (replacing the battery)...... 26 Lubricants (specifications) ...... 265 Hill Holder (system) ...... 108 Knowing your car ...... 3 Luggage compartment...... 93 Identification data "Lane Change" function...... 62 Luggage compartment roof – bodywork paint plate ...... 248 – Luggage compartment light – chassis marking ...... 248 (capacity)...... 260 – bulb replacement...... 210 – engine marking...... 248 Light clusters Main beam headlights – identification data plate ...... 247 – dipped beams (changing a – control...... 62 Ignition device ...... 28 bulb) ...... 200 Maintenance and care 338 – scheduled servicing plan ..... 224 Preparation to install a Reconfigurable multifunction
portable navigation system.... 121 display...... 8 GETTING TO KNOW Manual climate control YOUR CAR system ...... 45 Pretensioners...... 133 Refuelling Menu items...... 12 Protecting the environment .... 129 – capacities table...... 263 SAFETY
MSR system...... 107 Refuelling the car ...... 126 STARTING AND Radiofrequency remote DRIVING MSR (system)...... 107 Replacing fuses...... 211 control: ministerial WARNING LIGHTS Multifunction display ...... 7 approvals...... 271 Rev counter...... 6 AND MESSAGES
Radio setup system ...... 120 Rim Protector...... 259 IN AN EMERGENCY Number plate lights (bulb Rain sensor...... 64 Roof lights ...... 71 replacement)...... 206 SERVICING AND Raising the car ...... 220 – courtesy lights...... 73 MAINTENANCE On board instruments TECHNICAL Rear armrest...... 35 – front roof light...... 71 SPECIFICATIONS – engine coolant Rear light clusters...... 203 – glove compartment light ..... 74 temperature indicator...... 6 INDEX Rear roof light – multifunction display...... 4 – luggage compartment – bulb replacement...... 208 roof light...... 73 On-board instruments Rear seat surveillance – rear roof light...... 72 – On-board instruments...... 4 mirror...... 82 Roof rack/ski rack...... 103 On board instruments Rear view mirrors...... 37 Safety ...... 131 – reconfigurable Rear window washer jets...... 243 multifunction display...... 5 – carrying children safely...... 137 Rear window washer – "Isofix" child restraint Parking...... 161 – rear window washer fluid system (fitting)...... 143 Parking sensors ...... 123 level ...... 235 – seat belts...... 131 Particulate filter (DPF) ...... 129 Rear window washer/wiper ..... 66 Saving fuel ...... 163 Performance (top speed)...... 261 Rear window wiper SBR system...... 132 Pollen filter...... 236 – blade replacement...... 242 Scheduled Servicing Plan...... 224 Power sockets ...... 79 – blades ...... 240 Seat belts Power supply...... 251 – level check...... 231-232-233 – load limiters...... 134 339 – maintenance ...... 136 – left stalk...... 60 "Universal" child restraint
GETTING TO KNOW system fitting ...... 145 YOUR– pretensioners CAR ...... 133 Storage compartments...... 78 – SBR system ...... 132 Storing the car...... 168 SAFETY Upper air diffusers ...... 40 – using the seat belts ...... 131 Sun visors ...... 81 Using the gearbox...... 162 STARTING AND DRIVINGSeats...... 29 Suspension...... 252 Warning lights and WARNING LIGHTS– Adjusting the seats ...... 29 AND MESSAGES Table...... 33 messages...... 169 Servicing and care...... 223 Technical data...... 247 Weights and loads...... 262 IN AN EMERGENCY– heavy-duty use of the car... 229 The keys...... 24 Wheel geometry...... 254 SERVICING– periodic AND checks...... 229 MAINTENANCE Top speed ...... 261 Wheel rims – scheduled servicing...... 223 TECHNICAL Towing the car...... 221 – correct reading of the SPECIFICATIONSSetup menu ...... 10 Towing trailers...... 165 rim code...... 255 SideINDEX airbags (side airbag - – Rim Protector...... 259 window airbag)...... 153 Transmission ...... 251 – rims and tyres ...... 254 Side air diffusers...... 40 TRIP button ...... 22 – wheels and tyres...... 239 Side bag)...... 153 Trip Computer Wheels and tyres Snow chains...... 167 – TRIP button...... 22 – changing a wheel ...... 184 Sound system (wiring)...... 120 – Trip Computer...... 19 – Fix&Go Automatic (kit)...... 190 Speed Limiter...... 69 – Trip Computer parameters...... 20 – tyre inflation pressure...... 258 Speedometer ...... 6 – Wheels and tyres ...... 239 Starting the engine...... 158-183 Tyres Wheels and tyres provided ..... 256 Start&Stop system...... 111 – Fix&Go Automatic (kit)...... 190 Wheels...... 254 Steering ...... 253 – inflation pressures...... 258 Window airbag...... 153 Steering lock ...... 29 – reading the tyre code...... 254 Window cleaning ...... 63 Steering Wheel ...... 36 – Rim Protector tyres...... 259 Tyres - maintenance...... 239 Windows (cleaning) ...... 245 Steering wheel stalks Windscreen washer 340 – windscreen washer fluid
level ...... 235 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR Windscreen washer sprays...... 242 Windscreen washer/wiper ...... 63 SAFETY
Windscreen wiper STARTING AND DRIVING – level check...... 231-232-233 WARNING LIGHTS Windscreen wipers AND MESSAGES
– blades ...... 240 IN AN EMERGENCY
– replacing wiper blades...... 241 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
341 Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Parts & Services - Technical Services - Service Engineering Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Ita lia ) Print no. 603.99 . 282 - 10 /2012 - 1Edition COP 500L UM GB SISTEMA 15-06-2012 8:30 Pagina 2
WHY CHOOSING GENUINE PARTS
We really know your car because we invented, designed and built it: we really know every single detail. At Fiat Service authorised workshops you can find technicians directly trained by us, offering quality and professionalism for all service operations. Fiat workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks and practical recommendations by our experts. With Fiat Genuine Parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance features of your new car unchanged in time: that's why you bought it for. Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our cars; we recommend them because they come from our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies. For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones designed by Fiat for your car.
SAFETY: ENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS, COMFORT: SUSPENSION PERFORMANCE: SPARK PLUGS, LINEACCESSORI BRAKING SYSTEM CLIMATE CONTROL MAINTENANCE AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS INJECTORS AND BATTERIES ROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS COP 500L UM GB SISTEMA 15-06-2012 8:30 Pagina 1
FIAT500L ENGLISH
The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FIAT reserves the right to modify the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons. If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer. Printed in recycled paper without chlorine. OWNER HANDBOOK